Table of contents 
Introduction 4 
Congratulations 4 
Safety and environment protection 5 
Symbol glossary 8 
Instrument cluster 10 
Warning and control lights 10 
Gauges 15 
Entertainment systems 18 
AM/FM stereo cassette (CD changer compatible) 18 
Rear seat controls 29 
CD changer 32 
Climate controls 37 
Electronic automatic temperature control 37 
Lights 47 
Headlamps 47 
Bulb replacement 52 
Driver controls 58 
Steering wheel adjustment 60 
Power windows 66 
Mirrors 68 
Locks and security 85 
Keys 85 
Locks 85 
Anti-theft system 86 
1
Table of contents 
Seating and safety restraints 99 
Seating 99 
Safety restraints 112 
Air bags 124 
Child restraints 132 
Driving 142 
Starting 142 
Brakes 146 
Transmission operation 153 
Vehicle loading 170 
Trailer towing 172 
Recreational towing 176 
Roadside emergencies 177 
Hazard flasher switch 178 
Fuses and relays 180 
Changing tires 188 
Jump starting 194 
Wrecker towing 199 
Customer assistance 200 
The dispute settlement board 203 
Utilizing the mediation/arbitration 206 
Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada 206 
Ordering additional owner’s literature 207 
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 209 
Cleaning 210 
Cleaning your vehicle 210 
Underbody preservation 215 
2
Table of contents 
Maintenance and specifications 217 
Hood 218 
Engine compartment 219 
Engine oil 220 
Battery 223 
Fuel information 232 
Air filter(s) 246 
Part numbers 252 
Refill capacities 253 
Lubricant specifications 255 
Engine data 257 
Vehicle dimensions 258 
Accessories 261 
Index 264 
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical 
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval 
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written 
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without 
notice and without incurring obligation. 
Copyright © 2001 Ford Motor Company 
3
Introduction 
The following warning may be required by California law: 
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning 
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and 
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to 
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and 
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known 
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. 
CONGRATULATIONS 
Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to 
get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The 
more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety 
and pleasure you will derive from driving it. 
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the 
following website: 
In the United States: www.ford.com 
In Canada: www.ford.ca 
In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx 
In Australia: www.ford.com.au 
Additional owner information is given in separate publications. 
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant 
available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply 
to your particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may 
describe options before they are generally available. 
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the 
vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle. 
4
Introduction 
Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of an accident the 
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the 
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g. 
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump 
shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter. 
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION 
Warning symbols in this guide 
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible 
damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers 
to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning 
triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed. 
Warning symbols on your vehicle 
When you see this symbol, it is 
imperative that you consult the 
relevant section of this guide before 
touching or attempting adjustment 
of any kind. 
Protecting the environment 
We must all play our part in 
protecting the environment. Correct 
vehicle usage and the authorized 
disposal of waste cleaning and 
lubrication materials are significant 
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this 
guide with the tree symbol. 
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE 
There are no particular guidelines for breaking-in your vehicle. During 
the first 1 600 km (1 000 miles) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is 
recommended to give the moving parts a chance to break in. 
5
Introduction 
SPECIAL NOTICES 
Emission warranty 
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper 
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L 
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible 
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a 
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to 
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s 
Guide. 
Special instructions 
For your safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic 
controls. 
By operating other electronic equipment (e.g. mobile telephone 
without exterior aerial) electromagnetic fields can occur which 
can cause malfunctions of the vehicle electronics. Therefore you should 
observe the instructions of the equipment manufacturers. 
Please read the section Air bag in the Seating and safety 
restraints chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and 
instructions could result in personal injury. 
Rear facing child or baby seats should NEVER be used in front 
of a passenger side air bag. 
6
Using your vehicle with a snowplow 
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing. 
Using your vehicle as an ambulance 
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. 
Introduction 
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation 
Package. 
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles 
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than 
other types of vehicles. 
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. 
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, 
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an 
accident. 
7
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. 
Vehicle Symbol Glossary 
Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide 
Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front 
Air Bag-Side Child Seat 
Child Seat Installation 
Warning 
Child Seat Tether 
Anchorage 
Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System 
Brake Fluid - 
Non-Petroleum Based 
Traction Control 
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher 
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment 
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe 
Windshield 
Defrost/Demist 
Rear Window 
Defrost/Demist 
Power Windows 
Front/Rear 
Power Window Lockout 
Introduction 
8
Vehicle Symbol Glossary 
Child Safety Door 
Lock/Unlock 
Introduction 
Interior Luggage 
Compartment Release 
Symbol 
Panic Alarm Engine Oil 
Engine Coolant 
Engine Coolant 
Temperature 
Do Not Open When Hot Battery 
Avoid Smoking, Flames, 
or Sparks 
Battery Acid 
Explosive Gas Fan Warning 
Power Steering Fluid 
Maintain Correct Fluid 
Level 
MAX 
MIN 
Emission System Engine Air Filter 
Passenger Compartment 
Air Filter 
Jack 
Check fuel cap Low tire warning 
9
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES 
L 
L 
H 
00 H 
NAVIGATOR 
DOOR 
AJAR 
THEFT 
20 
40 
60 80 
40 
60 
20 
F MPH km/h 
RPMX1000 
P RNDD 2 
SELECT 
RESET 
4X4 
LOW 
RANGE 
H 
E C 
LOW 
FUEL 
BRAKE 
CK 
SUSP 
SERVICE 
ENGINE 
SOON 
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may 
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may 
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions. 
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the 
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have 
the respective system inspected immediately. 
Service engine soon 
Illuminates briefly to ensure the 
SERVICE 
system is functional. If it comes on 
ENGINE 
after the engine is started, one of 
SOON 
the engine’s emission control 
systems may be malfunctioning. The 
light may illuminate without a 
driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will usually be drivable and 
will not require towing. 
Light turns on solid: 
Temporary malfunctions may cause the light to illuminate. Examples are: 
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. 
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 
3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely 
tightened. 
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank 
with high quality fuel of the recommended octane and/or properly 
installing and securely tightening the fuel cap. After three driving cycles 
without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the light 
should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup 
Instrument cluster 
10
Instrument cluster 
followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is 
required. 
If the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available 
opportunity. 
Light is blinking: 
Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. 
You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and 
deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available 
opportunity. 
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures 
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior 
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. 
Brake system warning 
Illuminates if the parking brake is 
engaged. Also momentarily 
BRAKE 
illuminates at start up to ensure the 
! 
circuit is functional. If the brake 
warning lamp does not illuminate at 
these times, or illuminates after releasing the parking brake, seek service 
immediately. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more 
information. 
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
Momentarily illuminates at start up 
to ensure the circuit is functional. If 
ABS 
the light does not illuminate, 
remains on or continues to flash, the 
ABS needs to be serviced (refer to 
Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information). With the ABS light 
on, the ABS is disabled and normal braking is still functional. 
Safety belt 
Illuminates to remind you to fasten 
your safety belts. For more 
information, refer to the Seating 
and safety restraints chapter. 
11
Air bag readiness 
Illuminates to confirm that the air 
bags (front or side) are operational. 
If the light fails to illuminate, 
continues to flash or remains on, 
have the system serviced immediately. 
Charging system 
Illuminates when the battery is not 
charging properly. 
Check air suspension 
Illuminates momentarily when the 
ignition is turned to the ON position 
and the engine is OFF. The light 
also illuminates when the air 
suspension switch is turned OFF or the air suspension system requires 
servicing. 
For information on the air suspension system, refer to the Driving 
chapter. 
Low fuel 
Illuminates when the fuel level in 
the fuel tank is at, or near, empty 
(refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter 
for more information). 
Low washer fluid 
Illuminates when the windshield 
washer fluid is low. 
CK 
SUSP 
LOW 
FUEL 
Instrument cluster 
12
Instrument cluster 
Oil pressure/Engine coolant 
Illuminates when the engine coolant 
temperature is above the normal 
range or the engine oil pressure is 
below normal range. Check the 
engine oil and coolant level refer to 
Adding engine oil and Adding coolant in the Maintenance and 
specifications chapter. 
Turn signals 
Illuminates when the turn signals or 
the hazard lights are turned on. If 
the lights stay on continuously or 
flash faster, check for a burned-out 
bulb. 
High beams 
Illuminates when the high beam 
headlamps are turned on. 
Door ajar 
Illuminates when any door is open 
(or not fully closed). 
DOOR 
AJAR 
SecuriLockY anti-theft system 
Illuminates when the anti-theft 
alarm system is armed. If the light 
fails to illuminate, continues to flash 
THEFT 
or remains on, have the system 
serviced. 
Refer to SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system in the Locks and 
Security chapter. 
13
Four wheel drive low (if equipped) 
Illuminates when four-wheel drive 
LOW 
low is is engaged. If the light 
continues to flash have the system 
RANGE 
serviced. 
Four wheel drive indicator (if equipped) 
Illuminates when the four-wheel 
4x4 
drive is engaged. If the light 
continues to flash have the system 
serviced. 
Safety belt warning chime 
Sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belts. 
BeltMinder chime 
Sounds intermittently to remind you to fasten your safety belts. 
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning chime 
Sounds when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system (front 
or side airbags) has been detected. Have the supplemental restraint 
system inspected immediately. 
Headlamps on warning chime 
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the key is removed 
from the ignition and the driver’s door is opened. 
Key-in-ignition warning chime 
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition and the driver’s door is 
opened. 
Instrument cluster 
14
GAUGES 
L 
H 
Instrument cluster 
00 H 
NAVIGATOR 
DOOR 
AJAR 
THEFT 
20 
40 
60 80 
40 
60 
20 
F MPH km/h 
RPMX1000 
P RNDD 2 
SELECT 
RESET 
4X4 
LOW 
RANGE 
H 
E C 
LOW 
FUEL 
SERVICE 
ENGINE 
SOON 
Engine coolant temperature gauge 
Indicates the temperature of the 
engine coolant. At normal operating 
temperature, the needle remains 
within the normal area (the area 
between the “H” and “C”). If it 
enters the red section, the engine is 
overheating. Stop the vehicle as 
soon as safely possible, switch off 
the engine immediately and let the 
engine cool. Refer to Engine 
coolant in the Maintenance and 
specifications chapter. 
Never remove the coolant 
reservoir cap while the 
engine is running or hot. Steam 
and scalding liquid from a hot 
cooling system can burn you 
badly. 
L 
BRAKE 
CK 
SUSP 
C 
H 
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the 
coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level the gauge indication 
will not be accurate. If the gauge enters the red section, the oil 
pressure/engine coolant and Check Engine/Service Engine Soon 
indicators illuminate, refer to What you should know about fail-safe 
cooling in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. 
15
Engine oil pressure gauge 
Indicates engine oil pressure. At 
normal operating temperature, the 
needle will be in the normal range 
(the area between the “L” and “H”); 
if the needle goes below the normal 
range, stop the vehicle as soon as 
safely possible and switch off the 
engine immediately. Check the oil 
level. Add oil if needed (refer to 
Engine oil in the Maintenance 
and specifications chapter). If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle 
checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician. 
Battery voltage gauge 
Indicates battery voltage. If the 
pointer moves and stays outside the 
normal operating range (as 
indicated by the arrows), have the 
vehicle’s electrical system checked 
as soon as possible. 
Fuel gauge 
Displays approximately how much 
fuel is in the fuel tank. The fuel 
gauge may vary slightly when the 
vehicle is in motion or on a grade. 
When refueling the vehicle from 
empty indication, the amount of fuel 
that can be added will be less than 
the advertised capacity due to the 
reserve fuel. 
L 
H 
L 
H 
E 
F 
FUEL DOOR 
Instrument cluster 
16
Instrument cluster 
A minimum of 22.2 L (six gallons) must be added or removed from the 
fuel tank in order for the gauge to instantaneously update. If less than 
six gallons is the change, the gauge will take between five to twenty 
minutes to update. 
Speedometer 
Indicates the current vehicle speed. 
Odometer 
Registers the total kilometers 
(miles) of the vehicle. 
20 
Trip odometer 
Registers the kilometers (miles) of 
individual journeys. Press and 
release the reset button until a “T” 
appears in the display (this 
represents the trip mode). Press 
and hold the button for three seconds to reset. 
Tachometer 
Indicates the engine speed in 
revolutions per minute. 
Driving with your tachometer 
pointer continuously at the top of 
the scale may damage the engine. 
40 
60 80 
MPH km/h 
40 
60 
20 
00 
P RNDD 2 
SELECT 
RESET 
NAVIGATOR 
RPMX1000 
17
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE 
(CD CHANGER COMPATIBLE) 
SEL 
SEEK TUNE SCAN 
AUTO 
VOL 
PUSH ON 
REW 
1 
FF 
2 
SIDE 1.2 
3 4 
COMP 
5 
SHUFF 
6 
ALPINET AUDIO SYSTEM WITH AM/FM STEREO CASSETTE 
(CD CHANGER COMPATIBLE) 
BAL 
FADE 
MUTE 
AM FM 
EJ 
BASS 
TREB 
CD TAPE RDS 
VOL 
PUSH ON 
BASS 
TREB 
BAL 
FADE 
SEL 
CD TAPE EJ RDS 
DSP 
MUTE SEEK TUNE SCAN AUTO 
AM FM 
REW 
1 
FF 
2 
SIDE 1-2 
3 4 
COMP 
5 
SHUFF 
6 
Entertainment systems 
18
Entertainment systems 
Your audio system is equipped with selective lighting, a unique lighting 
strategy. This lighting feature is operable when the headlamps are 
illuminated. During the operation of any selected mode, lighting for the 
individual function controls will either illuminate or turn off. Those 
controls which have a function for the specific mode of operation 
selected will be lit, while the controls which have no function for that 
mode will be turned off. 
The Alpine Audio System is equipped with a delayed accessory feature. 
This feature enables the audio playing media to continue playing up to 
10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off, or until a door is 
opened. 
Volume/power control 
Press the control to turn the audio 
system on or off. 
Turn the control to raise or lower 
volume. 
VOL 
PUSH ON 
VOL 
PUSH ON 
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, 
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the 
ignition switch is turned back on. 
Speed sensitive volume (if equipped) 
With this feature, radio volume automatically changes slightly with 
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise. 
The recommended level for speed sensitive volume is from level 1 
through level 3. Level 0 turns the speed sensitive volume off and level 7 
is the maximum setting. 
19
With the radio on, press and hold 
the volume control for five seconds, 
until the display reads SPEED VOL, 
then press: 
² to increase volume 
compensation 
² to decrease or shut off the 
volume compensation 
Bass adjust 
The bass adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s bass output. 
Press the BASS control. Use the 
SEL control to increase or decrease 
the amount of bass. 
Treble adjust 
The treble adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s treble output. 
Press the TREB control. Use the 
SEL control to increase or decrease 
the amount of treble. 
Speaker balance adjust 
Speaker sound distribution can be 
adjusted between the right and left 
speakers. 
Press the BAL control. Use the SEL 
control to adjust the sound between 
the speakers. 
VOL 
PUSH ON 
SEL 
SEL 
BASS 
TREB 
SEL 
BASS 
TREB 
SEL 
BAL 
FADE 
Entertainment systems 
20
Speaker fade adjust 
Speaker sound can be adjusted 
between the front and rear 
speakers. 
Press the FADE control. Use the SEL 
control to adjust the sound between 
the front and rear speakers. 
Entertainment systems 
SEL 
BAL 
FADE 
Seek function 
The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode (if equipped). 
Seek function in radio mode 
² Press to find the next 
listenable station down the 
frequency band. 
SEEK 
² Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. 
Seek function in tape mode 
² Press to listen to the previous 
selection on the tape or return to 
the beginning of the current 
selection. 
SEEK 
² Press to listen to the next selection on the tape. 
Seek function for CD changer 
² Press to seek to the previous 
SEEK 
track of the current disc. If a 
selection has been playing for 
three seconds or more and you press , the CD changer will replay 
that selection from the beginning. 
² Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After 
the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc 
will automatically replay. 
Scan function 
The scan function works in radio, 
tape or CD mode (if equipped). 
SCAN 
21
Entertainment systems 
Scan function in radio mode 
Press the SCAN control to activate scan mode and to hear a brief 
sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. 
Press the SCAN control again to disengage scan mode. 
Scan function in tape mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the 
tape. The tape will scan in a forward direction. At the end of the tape’s 
first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the 
tape. 
To stop on a particular selection, press the SCAN control again. 
Scan function in CD mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the 
CD. The CD will scan in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first 
track at the end of the CD. 
To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. 
AM/FM select 
The AM/FM select control works in 
radio, tape and CD modes (if 
AM FM 
equipped). 
AM/FM select in radio mode 
The AM/FM control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. 
Press the control to toggle between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset 
stations. 
AM/FM select in tape mode 
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play. 
AM/FM select in CD mode 
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play. 
Radio station memory preset 
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These 
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve 
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 
22
Entertainment systems 
Setting memory preset stations 
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. 
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more 
information on selecting a station. 
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, 
indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected. 
REW 
1 
FF 
2 
SIDE 1.2 
3 4 
COMP 
5 
SHUFF 
6 
Autoset memory preset 
Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your 
original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips 
when you travel between cities with different radio stations. 
Starting autoset memory preset 
1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls. 
2. Press the AUTO control. 
3. When the first six strong stations 
AUTO 
are filled, the station stored in 
memory preset control 1 will start 
playing. 
If there are less than six strong stations available on the frequency band, 
the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong 
station available. 
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set 
memory stations, press the control again. 
Setting the clock with radio data system (RDS) feature 
Press the RDS control until SELECT 
HOUR or SELECT MINS is 
RDS DSP 
displayed. 
23
Entertainment systems 
Use the SEL control to manually set 
the time. 
² Press to increase 
hours/minutes. 
² Press to decrease 
SEL 
hours/minutes. 
Tune adjust 
The tune control works in radio or CD mode (if equipped). 
Tune adjust in radio mode 
² Press to move to the next 
TUNE 
frequency down the band 
(whether or not a listenable 
station is located there). Hold the control to move through the 
frequencies quickly. 
² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not 
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. 
Tune adjust for CD changer 
² Press to select the previous 
TUNE 
disc in the CD changer. (Play will 
begin on the first track of the 
disc unless the CD changer is in shuffle mode.) Refer to Shuffle 
feature for more information. Hold the control to continue reversing 
through the discs. 
² Press to select the next disc in the CD changer. Hold the control 
to fast-forward through the remaining discs. 
Tape/CD select 
² To begin tape play (with a tape 
CD TAPE 
loaded into the audio system) 
while in the radio or CD mode, 
press the TAPE control. Press the 
button during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast 
forward function. 
24
² To begin CD play (if equipped 
Entertainment systems 
with CD changer), ensure that 
the CDs are loaded. Press the CD 
control. The first track of the disc 
will begin playing. After that, CD play will begin where it stopped last. 
Do not insert any promotional (odd shaped or sized) discs, or discs 
with removable labels into the CD player as jamming may occur. 
Rewind 
The rewind control works in tape 
and CD modes. 
² In tape mode, radio play will 
continue until rewind is stopped 
(with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached. 
² In CD mode, pressing the REW control for less than three seconds 
results in slow rewind. Pressing the control for more than three 
seconds results in fast rewind. 
Fast forward 
The fast forward control works in 
tape and CD modes (if equipped). 
² In the tape mode, tape direction 
will automatically reverse when 
the end of the tape is reached. 
² In CD mode, pressing the control for less than three seconds results in 
slow forward action. Pressing the control for more than three seconds 
results in fast forward action. 
Tape direction select 
Press SIDE 1–2 to play the alternate 
side of a tape. 
Eject function 
Press the control to stop and eject a 
tape. 
CD TAPE 
REW 
1 
FF 
2 
SIDE 1-2 
3 
EJ 
25
DolbyT noise reduction 
Dolbyt noise reduction operates 
only in tape mode. Dolbyt noise 
reduction reduces the amount of 
4 
hiss and static during tape playback. 
Press the control to activate 
(and deactivate) Dolbyt noise reduction. 
The Dolbyt noise reduction system is manufactured under license from 
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyt and the double-D 
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolbyt Labratories Licensing 
Corporation. 
Compression feature 
Compression adjust brings soft and 
loud CD passages together for a 
COMP 
more consistent listening level. 
5 
Press the COMP control to activate 
and deactivate compression adjust. 
The effect of the feature varies with the music content. 
Shuffle feature 
The shuffle feature operates in CD 
mode and plays all tracks on the 
SHUFF 
current disc in random order. If 
6 
equipped with the CD changer, the 
shuffle feature continues to the next 
disc after all tracks are played. 
Press the SHUFFLE control to start this feature. Random order play will 
continue until the SHUFFLE control is pressed again. 
Mute mode 
Press the control to mute the 
playing media. Press the control 
again to return to the playing media. 
MUTE 
Entertainment systems 
26
Entertainment systems 
Radio data system (RDS) feature 
This feature allows your audio system to receive station identification or 
program type from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. 
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio 
and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend FM radio 
broadcasters to use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio 
stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS 
technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired. 
Press the RDS control until RDS ON 
or RDS OFF appears in the display. 
Use the SEL control to enable (ON) 
or disable (OFF) the feature. With 
the RDS activated, press the SEL 
control to scroll through the 
following selections: 
Traffic 
² Press the RDS control until 
TRAFFIC is displayed. 
² Use the SEL control to select ON 
or OFF. With the feature on, use 
the SEEK or SCAN control to 
find a radio station broadcasting a 
traffic report (if it is broadcasting 
RDS data). 
Traffic information is not available in most U.S. markets. 
Program type 
² Press the RDS control until the 
FIND program type is displayed. 
RDS 
SEL 
RDS 
SEL 
RDS 
27
² Use the SEL control to select the 
program type. With the feature 
on, use the SEEK or SCAN 
control to find the desired 
program type from the following 
selections: 
² Classic 
² Country 
² Info 
² Jazz 
² Oldies 
² R & B 
² Religious 
² Rock 
² Soft 
² Top 40 
Show 
² With RDS activated, press the 
RDS control until SHOW is 
displayed. 
² Use the SEL control to select 
TYPE (the display shows the 
program type), NAME (the 
display shows the call letters of 
the station) or NONE. 
SEL 
RDS 
SEL 
Digital signal processing (if equipped) 
The digital signal processing (DSP) 
feature allows you to change the 
RDS DSP 
signal mode to suit your listening 
tastes. 
These effects will change the sound quality and may need to be adjusted 
based upon the program material to suit your listening needs. 
Press the control to turn the feature on or off. 
Entertainment systems 
28
Use the SEL control to select the 
desired signal mode (the selected 
mode will appear in the display). 
The following signal modes can be 
selected: 
² JAZZ CLUB—jazz club with 
clearly reflected sounds. 
Entertainment systems 
² HALL—rectangular concert hall capacity of about 2 000 
² CHURCH—church with a high vault. 
² STADIUM—outdoor stadium with a capacity of about 30 000. 
² NEWS—“voice-only” type of sound with a limited audio band. 
Press the DSP control until one of 
the following appears: 
² ALL SEATS 
² DRIVER SEAT 
² REAR SEATS 
Use the SELECT control to change 
the equalization to the desired 
mode. 
REAR SEAT CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) 
The Personal Audio System, allows 
front and middle seat passengers to 
listen to different media sources 
(radio, cassette or CD) 
simultaneously. However, the front 
and middle-seat passengers cannot 
listen to two different radio stations 
at the same time. 
SEL 
RDS DSP 
SEL 
- VOLUME + MODE 
SEEK MEMORY 
29
REW 
1 
FF 
2 
SIDE 1.2 
3 4 
To turn on the rear seat controls, press the memory preset controls 3 
and 5 at the same time. The will appear in the display. 
Pressing 3 and 5 at the same time again will turn the rear seat controls 
off. 
If there is a discrepancy between the rear seat and the front audio 
controls, (such as both trying to listen to the same playing media), the 
front audio system will receive the desired selection. 
To activate the Personal Audio 
System, press the 
speaker/headphone control. Press 
the MODE control to change audio 
sources (for headphone mode only). 
Use the SEEK, VOLUME and 
MEMORY controls to make 
adjustments to the playing media. 
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME 
Press the + control to increase 
volume. 
Press the - control to decrease 
volume. 
COMP 
5 
SHUFF 
6 
- VOLUME + MODE 
SEEK MEMORY 
- VOLUME + MODE 
SEEK MEMORY 
Entertainment systems 
30
Entertainment systems 
From the rear seat controls, volume control can be set no higher than 
the current radio setting unless the speakers are turned off. Refer to 
Turning the rear speakers on and off. 
TURNING THE REAR SPEAKERS ON AND OFF 
Press to turn the rear speakers on 
or off. 
- VOLUME + MODE 
SEEK MEMORY 
USING HEADPHONES/PERSONAL AUDIO SYSTEM 
Plug a 3.5 mm headphone (not included) into the jack. Press the 
speaker on/off control to operate the headphones. DUAL PLAY 
illuminates in the radio display and the fade control is disabled. 
The rear speakers will cut out once the speaker on/off control is pressed. 
The front speaker will remain playing for the front passengers. Press the 
control again to deactivate the headphones (Personal Audio System). 
SINGLE PLAY illuminates in the radio display and the fade control is 
enabled. 
For the Personal Audio System to be enabled, the rear seat controls 
must be active and illuminated in the radio display. 
MODE SELECT 
Push the MODE control to toggle 
between AM, FM1, FM2, tape, CD or 
- VOLUME + MODE 
CD changer (if equipped). If in the 
Personal Audio System mode, 
SHARED illuminates in the radio 
SEEK MEMORY 
display when the front and rear 
modes are set to the same media. 
31
Entertainment systems 
MEMORY PRESET CONTROL 
Push the MEMORY control 
successively to allow rear seat 
passengers to scroll through the 6 
memory presets in AM, FM1 or 
FM2. 
Push the MEMORY control in CD 
changer mode (if equipped) to 
advance to the next disc. 
SEEK FUNCTION 
² In radio mode, press to find 
the next listenable station down 
the frequency band. 
² In radio mode, press to find 
the next listenable station up the 
frequency band. 
² In tape mode, use the SEEK 
function to access the next or 
previous selection. 
² In CD mode (if equipped), use 
- VOLUME + MODE 
SEEK MEMORY 
- VOLUME + MODE 
SEEK MEMORY 
the SEEK function to access the next or previous selection. 
CD CHANGER (IF EQUIPPED) 
Your CD changer is located in the center console. 
Slide the door to access the CD 
changer magazine. 
32
Press to eject the magazine. 
1. Pull the lever to remove a CD 
tray from the magazine. 
2. Insert one disc into each CD tray 
of the magazine (up to 6 discs). 
Ensure that the label side is facing 
up. 
If you pull too hard on the disc 
holder, the disc holder may come 
completely out of the magazine. If 
this happens, reinsert the disc 
holder back into the magazine. 
3. Insert each CD tray, with the disc 
loaded, all the way into the CD 
magazine. 
Entertainment systems 
33
Entertainment systems 
4. Insert the CD magazine into the 
changer. 
5. Slide the door to the left to close. 
Use only compact discs containing 
this mark. 
The magazine does not need to be full for the changer to operate. 
Radio power must be turned on to play the CDs in the changer. The 
magazine may be stored in the glove compartment when not being used. 
The CD magazine may be inserted or ejected with the radio power off. 
Keep the CD changer door closed. Coins and foreign objects will damage 
the CD player and void your audio system warranty. 
Do not insert any promotional (odd shaped or sized) discs, or 
discs with removable labels into the CD player as jamming may 
occur. 
TROUBLESHOOTING THE CD CHANGER (IF EQUIPPED) 
The laser beam used in the compact disc player is harmful to the 
eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the case. 
If sound skips: 
² You may be traveling on a rough road, playing badly scratched discs or 
the disc may be dirty. Skipping will not scratch the discs or damage 
the player. 
34
If your changer does not work, it may be that: 
² A disc is already loaded where you want to insert a disc. 
² The disc is inserted with the label surface downward. 
² The disc is dusty or defective. 
² A disc with format and dimensions not within industry standards is 
inserted. 
CLEANING COMPACT DISCS 
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean 
discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to 
the edge. Do not use circular motion. 
CD AND CD CHANGER CARE 
² Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface. 
² Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended 
periods of time. 
² Do not insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer 
magazine. 
Do not insert any promotional (odd shaped or sized) discs, or 
discs with removable labels into the CD player as jamming may 
occur. 
CLEANING CASSETTE PLAYER (IF EQUIPPED) 
Clean the tape player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 to 
12 hours of play in order to maintain the best sound and operation. 
CASSETTE AND CASSETTE PLAYER CARE 
² Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less. 
² Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high humidity, extreme heat or 
extreme cold. Allow tapes that may have been exposed to extreme 
temperatures to reach a moderate temperature before playing. 
² Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole 
and turning the hub. 
² Remove loose labels before inserting tapes. 
² Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not 
being played. 
Entertainment systems 
35
Entertainment systems 
RADIO FREQUENCY INFORMATION 
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio 
and Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) establish the frequencies 
AM and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. Allowable frequencies 
are: 
AM 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz 
FM 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz 
Not all frequencies are used in a given area. 
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS 
Three factors can affect radio reception: 
² Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is. 
The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km 
(24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal 
modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their 
strength/volume relative to other stations. 
² Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s 
antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems. 
Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences, 
traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering 
structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal. 
² Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger 
signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may 
temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station 
frequency is displayed. 
The audio system automatically switches to single channel reception if it 
will improve the reception of a station normally received in stereo. 
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTIES AND SERVICE 
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. 
If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified technician. 
36
Climate controls 
ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC) 
SYSTEM 
The EATC system will maintain a 
selected temperature and 
automatically control airflow. You 
can override automatic operation 
with any of the override controls, 
the fan speed control or the steering 
wheel controls (if equipped). 
Turning the EATC on 
Press AUTOMATIC, any of the 
override controls or the fan speed 
control. The EATC will only operate 
when the vehicle is running. 
Turning the EATC system off 
Press OFF. The outside temperature 
function will continue to operate 
until the ignition is turned off. 
OFF F 
AUTO 
OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC 
MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF 
LO 
HI 
OFF F 
AUTO 
OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC 
MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF 
LO 
HI 
OFF 
AUTOMATIC 
FLR • DEF DEF 
HI 
LO 
Automatic operation 
Press AUTOMATIC and select the desired temperature. The selected 
temperature and the word AUTO will appear in the display window. The 
EATC system will either heat or cool to achieve the selected 
temperature. The system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow 
location and if outside air or recirculated air is required. Fan speed 
remains automatic unless the fan speed thumbwheel is turned or the 
steering wheel fan speed control (if equipped) is pressed. 
When in AUTOMATIC and weather conditions require heat, air will be 
sent to the floor. However, if the engine is not warm enough to provide 
37
Climate controls 
heat, the fan will be at a low speed and the air will be directed to the 
windshield. In approximately 31⁄2 minutes or less, the fan speed will start 
to increase and the airflow location will change to the floor area. 
If unusual conditions exist (i.e.-window fogging, etc.), the manual 
override controls allow you to select airflow locations and the fan control 
allows you to adjust fan speed as necessary. 
Temperature selection 
The display window indicates the 
°F 
selected temperature, function 
(AUTO or one of the override 
AUTO 
controls) and manual control of fan 
speed ( ) if automatic fan speed is not desired. 
To control the temperature, select 
any temperature between 18°C 
(65°F) and 29°C (85°F) by pressing 
the blue (cooler) or red (warmer) 
buttons. 
OUTSIDE TEMP 
MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR 
For continuous maximum cooling, push the blue button until 16°C 
(60°F) is shown in the display window. The EATC will continue 
maximum cooling (disregarding the displayed temperature) until a 
warmer temperature is selected by pressing the red control. 
For continuous maximum heating, push the red button until 32°C (90°F) 
is shown in the display window. The EATC will continue maximum 
heating (disregarding the displayed temperature) until a cooler 
temperature is selected by pressing the blue control. 
38
Climate controls 
Temperature conversion 
Press MAX A/C and DEF at 
the same time (for one second) to 
OFF 
switch between Fahrenheit and 
AUTO 
OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC 
Celsius. 
The English/Metric (E/M) control on 
the trip computer and message center (if equipped) will not change 
temperature display. 
Fan speed ( ) 
When AUTOMATIC is pressed, fan 
speed is adjusted automatically for 
existing conditions. You can override 
fan speed at any time. To control 
fan speed manually, use the 
thumbwheel to cancel automatic fan 
speed operation. Rotate the thumbwheel or press the steering wheel 
controls (if equipped) up for higher fan speed or down for lower fan 
speed. 
The display will show to 
indicate manual fan operation. 
MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF 
LO 
To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTOMATIC. 
Manual override controls 
The manual override controls allow 
you to determine where airflow is 
directed. To return to full automatic 
control, press AUTOMATIC. 
HI 
°F 
AUTO 
OFF F 
AUTO 
OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC 
MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF 
LO 
HI 
The air conditioning compressor can operate in all modes except FLOOR 
and VENT. It will also operate only when required when AUTOMATIC 
has been selected. However, the air conditioning will only function if the 
outside temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher. 
Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air 
during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under 
the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you 
have stopped the vehicle. 
39
Climate controls 
² MAX A/C-Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. The temperature 
will display 16°C (60°F). To exit, press AUTOMATIC or any other 
override controls. MAX A/C is louder than normal A/C but more 
economical and will cool the inside of the vehicle faster. Airflow is 
from the instrument panel registers. This mode can also be used to 
prevent undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. 
² VENT-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers. 
However, the air cannot be cooled below the outside temperature 
because the air conditioning does not operate in this mode. 
² PNL²FLR-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel 
registers and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities 
are provided in this mode. The air will be heated or cooled based on 
the temperature selection. For added customer comfort, the air 
distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air 
sent to the instrument panel registers. 
² FLOOR-Distributes outside air through the floor ducts. However, the 
air cannot be cooled below the outside temperature because the air 
conditioning does not operate in this mode. 
² FLR²DEF-Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster 
ducts and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are 
provided in this mode. The air will be heated or cooled based on the 
temperature selection. For added customer comfort, the air 
distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air 
sent to the windshield defroster ducts. If the temperature is about 6°C 
(43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the 
air to reduce fogging. 
² DEF -Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster 
ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. If the 
outside air temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air 
conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. 
² OFF-Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. For short 
periods of time only, use this mode to reduce undesirable odors from 
entering the vehicle. 
40
Displaying outside temperature 
Press OUTSIDE TEMP to display 
the outside air temperature. It will 
be displayed until OUTSIDE TEMP 
is pressed again. 
Climate controls 
OUTSIDE TEMP 
MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR 
If the selected temperature is changed while the outside temperature is 
displayed, the new temperature will be displayed for four seconds after it 
is changed, then the outside temperature will return to the window. 
If a manual override function is selected while the outside temperature is 
displayed, the new function will be displayed for four seconds after it is 
changed, then the outside temperature will return to the window along 
with the override selection. 
The outside temperature reading is most accurate when the vehicle is 
moving. Higher readings may be obtained when the vehicle is not 
moving. The readings that you get may not agree with temperatures 
given on the radio due to differences in vehicle and station locations. 
Operating tips 
² In humid weather conditions, place the climate control system in DEF 
before driving. This will reduce fogging on your windshield. Once the 
windshield has been cleared, operate the climate control system as 
desired. 
² To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in cold weather 
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF or 
MAX A/C position. 
² To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in warm weather 
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF 
position. 
² Under normal weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control 
system should be left in any position other than MAX A/C or OFF 
when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” 
through the outside air inlet duct. 
41
Climate controls 
² Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate 
control system should be left in the OFF position when the vehicle is 
parked. This allows the climate control system to be free from 
contamination of outside pollutants. 
² If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during warm 
weather conditions, the air conditioner will perform more efficiently in 
cooling the vehicle if driven for two or three minutes with the 
windows open. This will force most of the hot, stale air out of the 
vehicle. Once the vehicle has been “aired out”, operate the climate 
control system as desired. 
² Don’t put objects under the front seat that will interfere with the 
airflow to the rear seats. 
² Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of 
the windshield. 
² Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can 
block airflow and reduce your ability to see through your windshield. 
Avoid placing small objects on top of the instrument panel. These 
objects may fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow, in 
addition to damaging the climate control system. 
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather conditions: 
1. Select PNL ² FLR 
2. Set the temperature control to full heat 
3. Set the fan speed control to HI 
4. Direct the outer panel vents towards the side windows. 
To increase airflow to the outer panel vents, close the central panel 
vents. 
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these 
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 
REAR CONSOLE CLIMATE CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) 
Depending on the equipment package of your vehicle, the rear console 
may be equipped with audio/climate controls. 
The instrument panel climate controls must be on in order for the rear 
console climate controls to work. 
42
Your climate controls will either be 
located on the rear of the center 
console, 
or located in the overhead console. 
Climate controls 
COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR 
- VOLUME + MODE 
SEEK MEMORY 
OFF 
LO 
HI 
OFF LO 
HI 
COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR 
Turn the air distribution control to the desired airflow position. 
Turn the fan speed control to the desired position. 
AUXILIARY A/C-HEATER CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) 
Depending on your equipment package, your vehicle may be equipped 
with auxiliary A/C-heater controls. The auxiliary A/C-heater feature 
provides increased capacity to quickly heat or cool the vehicle. Besides 
the driver’s control panel for the front seat occupants, the second row 
auxiliary A/C-heater controls allow the rear passengers to control the 
temperature in the rear of the vehicle through a second control panel 
above the second row, or in the floor console. 
43
If your vehicle is equipped with 
auxiliary A/C controls, they may be 
located in the floor console, 
or located in the overhead console. 
If your vehicle is equipped with a 
moon roof and a navigation system, 
you will not have a front auxiliary 
A/C- heater control console. All 
operation is obtained through the 
rear auxiliary A/C-heater control 
console. 
HI 
OFF REAR 
WARM COOL PANEL FLOOR 
Climate controls 
44
Climate controls 
In order for the auxiliary A/C-heater 
controls (if equipped) to function, 
the driver’s auxiliary A/C-heater 
control must be set to REAR, unless 
your vehicle is equipped with a 
moonroof and a navigation system. 
In which case, the rear auxiliary A/C-heater control console serves as the 
main control for the auxiliary climate control system. 
The instrument panel climate 
controls must be on in order for the 
OFF F 
auxiliary A/C-heater to operate. 
AUTO 
OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC 
When the auxiliary A/C-heater control is set to FLOOR, airflow only 
occurs from the third row seat floor vent located in the driver’s side rear 
quarter trim panel. 
When the auxiliary A/C-heater control is set to PANEL, airflow occurs 
from the overhead 2nd and 3rd row vents. 
Turn the fan speed control knob to 
the desired speed. 
Turn the temperature control to the 
desired temperature. 
You can get warm or cool air 
through either the overhead 
registers or floor vent by turning the 
auxiliary mode selector: 
² Far left for airflow to the overhead registers. 
² Far right for airflow to the rear floor vent. 
² Anywhere between PANEL and 
FLOOR to vary airflow between 
the outlets. 
COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR 
OFF REAR 
HI 
VENT PNL • FLR FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF 
HI 
MAX A/C LO 
OFF LO 
HI 
COOL WARM 
PANEL FLOOR 
45
Climate controls 
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER 
The rear defroster control is located 
on the instrument panel. 
Press the rear defroster control to 
clear the rear window of thin ice 
and fog. 
² A small LED will illuminate when 
the rear defroster is activated. 
The ignition must be in the ON position to operate the rear window 
defroster. 
The defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the 
ignition is turned to the OFF position. To manually turn off the defroster 
before 10 minutes have passed, push the control again. 
46
HEADLAMP CONTROL 
Rotate the headlamp control to the 
first position to turn on the parking 
lamps. Rotate to the second position 
to also turn on the headlamps. 
Foglamp control (if equipped) 
The headlamp control also operates 
the foglamps. The foglamps can be 
turned on only when the headlamp 
control is in the position and 
the high beams are not turned on. 
Pull headlamp control towards you 
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp 
indicator light will illuminate. 
Autolamp control 
The autolamp system provides light 
sensitive automatic on-off control of 
the exterior lights normally 
controlled by the headlamp control. 
The autolamp system also keeps the 
lights on for approximately 20 
seconds after the ignition switch is 
turned to OFF. 
² To turn autolamps on, rotate the 
control counterclockwise. 
A 
A 
A 
Lights 
² To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to OFF. 
² Foglamps are not controlled by the autolamps. In order to turn on the 
foglamps, you must turn the lamp switch to the position and 
pull toward you for foglamps. 
47
Lights 
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped) 
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate: 
² the ignition must be in the ON position and 
² the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking lamps position. 
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during 
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system 
does not activate with your tail lamps and generally may not provide 
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your 
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision. 
High beams 
² Push forward to activate. 
² Pull toward you to deactivate. 
Flash to pass 
Pull toward you to activate and 
release to deactivate. 
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL 
Use to adjust the brightness of the 
instrument panel during headlamp 
and parklamp operation. 
² Rotate up to brighten. 
² Rotate down to dim. 
² Rotate to full up position (past 
detent) to turn on interior lamps. 
² Rotate to full down position (past 
detent) to turn off interior lamps. 
48
Lights 
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS 
Your vehicle is equipped with a 
Vehicle Headlamp Aim Device 
(VHAD) on each headlamp. Each 
headlamp may be properly aimed in 
the vertical (up/down) and the 
horizontal (left/right) directions 
using your VHAD system. The 
headlamps on your vehicle are 
properly aimed at the assembly 
plant. 
A bubble (vertical indicator) that is 
not centered between the two red 
lines does not necessarily indicate 
out-of-aim headlamps. If your vehicle is not positioned on a level surface, 
the slope will be included in the vertical indication. Therefore, vertical 
and horizontal headlamp adjustment should be performed only when the 
beam direction appears to be incorrect. 
You will need one 4 mm wrench or socket to make the adjustments. 
If the vehicle has been in an accident, the vehicle’s front structure 
should be properly aligned before aiming the headlamps. 
Horizontal aim adjustment 
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 
2. With the hood open, locate the 
horizontal indicator and the 
adjusting screw. They are located 
below the viewing hole at the rear 
of the headlamp assembly. 
3. Use a 4 mm wrench or socket to 
turn the horizontal adjusting screw 
until the “0” mark on the yellow dial 
lines up with the reference mark on 
the marker (as shown) when viewed directly from above. 
D 
U 
49
Turning the horizontal adjusting 
screw in the direction of the arrow 
changes the horizontal aim as 
shown. 
Vertical aim adjustment 
1. Park the vehicle on a level 
surface. 
2. With the hood open, locate the 
bubble level and the vertical 
adjustment screw. The adjustment 
screw is located on the outboard 
side of the headlamp. 
D 
U 
3. The “U” and “D” on the bubble 
indicate the directional change (up 
or down) of the vertical aim. 
4. Use a 4 mm wrench or socket to 
turn the vertical adjusting screw 
until the bubble is centered between 
the two red lines which represents 
the “0” mark position. 
When the horizontal and vertical indicators are set to the “0” mark, the 
headlamp has been properly aimed. 
D 
U 
Lights 
50
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 
² Push down to activate the left 
turn signal. 
² Push up to activate the right turn 
signal. 
INTERIOR LAMPS 
Map lamps 
To turn on the map lamps, press the 
control next to each lamp. 
Rear dome lamp 
The dome lamp lights when: 
² any door is opened. 
² the instrument panel dimmer 
switch is held up until the 
courtesy lamps come on. 
² any of the remote entry controls 
are pressed and the ignition is 
OFF. 
VENT ROOF VENT 
Lights 
With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can 
be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control. 
51
Lights 
BULBS 
Replacing exterior bulbs 
Check the operation of the following lamps frequently: 
² Headlamps 
² Foglamps 
² High-mount brakelamp 
² Brakelamps 
² Turn signals 
² License plate lamp 
² Tail lamps 
² Back-up lamps 
Do not remove lamp bulbs unless they can be replaced immediately with 
new ones. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, 
contaminants may enter the lamp housings and affect lamp performance. 
Using the right bulbs 
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must 
be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for 
Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe 
visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the 
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. 
Function Number of bulbs Trade number 
Headlamps 2 9007 
Front park/turn lamps 2 3157 AK (amber) 
Front sidemarker 2 194 AK (amber) 
Foglamps 2 800 
Dome/map lamps 2 579 
Turn/tail/brake lamps 2 3157K 
Liftgate lamp 2 916 
Backup lamp 2 579 
License lamp 2 168 
Running board lamp (if equipped) 2 168 
High-mount brake lamp See a dealer or qualified service technician 
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted. 
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer 
52
Replacing the interior bulbs 
Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently: 
² interior overhead lamp 
² map lamp 
For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. 
Replacing headlamp bulbs 
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position. 
2. Open the hood. 
3. At the back of the headlamp, 
remove the headlamp assembly 
retainers by pushing rearward and 
pulling up. 
4. Pull the headlamp assembly 
forward slightly to expose the 
electrical connectors. 
5. Rotate the bulb cover 
counterclockwise and remove. 
6. Disconnect the electrical 
connector from the bulb by pulling 
rearward. 
Lights 
53
Lights 
7. Remove the bulb retainer ring by 
turning it counterclockwise, then 
slide the ring off the plastic base. 
8. Without turning, carefully pull the 
bulb out of the headlamp assembly. 
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of 
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do 
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to 
break the next time the headlamps are operated. 
9. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly. 
When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, push the bulb into the 
lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp 
assembly. 
10. To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse 
order. 
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs 
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position. 
2. Open the hood. 
54
3. At the back of the headlamp, 
remove the headlamp assembly 
retainers by pushing rearward and 
pulling up. 
4. Pull the headlamp assembly 
forward slightly to expose the 
electrical connectors. 
Lights 
5. Release clip and disconnect the 
electrical connector from the bulb 
socket. 
6. Rotate the bulb socket 
counterclockwise and remove. 
7. Pull the bulb straight out of the 
socket and push in the new bulb. 
8. To complete installation of the 
parking lamp/turn signal assembly, 
follow the removal procedures in reverse order. 
Replacing foglamp bulbs 
The halogen bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may 
shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is 
dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only by its 
base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. 
1. Rotate the foglamp bulb 
counterclockwise and remove from 
foglamp (the rear side of the 
foglamp is shown). 
2. Disconnect the electrical 
connector from the foglamp bulb. 
3. Connect the electrical connector 
to the new foglamp bulb. 
4. Install the foglamp bulb in 
foglamp by rotating clockwise. 
55
Lights 
Replacing tail lamp bulbs 
1. Open the liftgate to expose the 
lamp assembly screws. 
2. Remove the two screws from the 
lamp assembly. 
3. Carefully pry the lamp assembly 
away from the vehicle to expose the 
bulb socket. 
4. Rotate the bulb socket 
counterclockwise and remove from 
lamp assembly. 
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb. 
6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise. 
7. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws. 
Replacing liftgate tail lamp bulb 
1. Raise the liftgate and remove the 
lamp assembly nuts. 
2. Carefully pull the lamp assembly 
outward to expose the electrical 
connector. 
56
3. Rotate the bulb socket 
counterclockwise counterclockwise 
and remove. 
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket 
and push in the new bulb. 
5. To complete installation, follow 
the removal procedure in reverse 
order. 
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 
To change the license plate bulbs: 
1. Remove screw and the license 
plate lamp assembly from liftgate. 
2. Remove the bulb socket from 
lamp assembly by turning 
counterclockwise. 
3. Carefully pull the bulb out from 
the socket and push in the new 
bulb. 
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp 
assembly by turning clockwise. 
5. Install the lamp assembly on 
liftgate with screw. 
Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs 
For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. 
Replacing running board lamp bulbs 
For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. 
Lights 
57
Driver controls 
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS 
Rotate the windshield wiper control 
to the desired interval, low or high 
speed position. 
The bars of varying length are for 
intermittent wipers. When in this 
position rotate the control upward 
for fast intervals and downward for 
slow intervals. 
Push (tap) the end of the stalk 
briefly for a single swipe (no wash). 
Push and hold for three swipes with 
wash. Push and hold for a longer 
wash (up to ten seconds). 
Rear window wiper/washer controls 
For rear wiper operation, rotate the 
rear window wiper and washer 
control to the desired position. 
Select: 
INT 1 — 3.5 second interval rear 
wiper. 
INT 2 — 10.5 second interval rear 
wiper. 
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off. 
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer 
control to either position. 
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT2 or 
OFF position. 
Speed dependent wipers 
When the windshield wiper control is set on the intermittent settings, 
speed-sensitive front wipers automatically adjust as the vehicle’s speed 
changes. 
58
Driver controls 
Windshield wiper blades 
Check the wiper blades at least twice a year or when they seem less 
effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used 
by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. 
Checking the wiper blades 
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and 
wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild 
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the 
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents. 
Changing the wiper blades 
To replace the wiper blades: 
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the 
windshield and lock into the service 
position. 
2. Turn the blade at an angle from 
the wiper arm. Push the lock pin 
manually to release the blade and 
pull the wiper blade down toward 
the windshield to remove it from the 
arm. 
3. Attach the new wiper to the 
wiper arm and press it into place 
until a click is heard. 
Rear window wiper blades 
Refer to Windshield wiper blades in this section for more information 
on rear wiper blades. 
59
Driver controls 
TILT STEERING 
Pull the tilt steering control toward 
you to move the steering wheel up 
or down. Hold the control while 
adjusting the wheel to the desired 
position, then release the control. 
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. 
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED) 
To turn on the visor mirror lamps, 
lift the mirror cover open. 
OVERHEAD CONSOLE 
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to 
your option package. 
60
Forward storage bin (if equipped) 
Press the release control to open 
the storage compartment. The door 
will open slightly and can be moved 
to full open. 
The storage compartment may be 
used to secure sunglasses or a 
similar object. 
Driver controls 
Installing a garage door opener (if equipped) 
The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of 
aftermarket garage door openers: 
² Place Velcro hook onto back side of aftermarket transmitter opposite 
of actuator control. 
² Place transmitter into storage compartment, control down. 
² Place the provided height adaptors onto the back of the storage bin 
door as needed. 
² Press the storage compartment door to activate the transmitter. 
61
Driver controls 
One-touch moon roof (if equipped) 
² Press and release the rear portion 
of the moon roof control to open. 
² Press and hold (as desired) the 
front portion of the moon roof 
control to close. 
² To halt motion at any point 
during one-touch opening, press 
the control a second time. 
² The moon roof has a sliding 
shade that can be manually 
opened or closed when the glass 
panel is shut. 
² To close the shade, pull it toward 
the front of the vehicle. 
VENT ROOF VENT 
Do not let children play with the moon roof. They may seriously 
hurt themselves. 
Trip computer 
For information on the trip computer, refer to Trip computer this 
chapter. 
Electronic compass (if equipped) 
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large 
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antennas. 
Magnetic or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also 
affect compass accuracy. 
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will 
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal 
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual 
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration 
adjustment. 
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that 
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four 
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the 
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this 
error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment. 
62
Compass zone adjustment 
1. Determine which magnetic zone 
you are in for your geographic 
location by referring to the zone 
map. 
1 
Driver controls 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 8 9 
10 
14 
15 
13 
12 
11 
2. Locate the compass module 
mounted on the center rear view 
mirror post. 
3. Turn ignition to the ON position. 
4. Press and hold the RESET button 
on top of the compass module until 
the message display in the trip 
computer shows the current zone 
setting. 
5. Release the RESET button. 
6. Press the RESET button until the correct zone is displayed on the trip 
computer. 
Compass calibration adjustment 
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and 
high voltage lines. 
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air 
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut. 
1. Start the vehicle. 
63
Driver controls 
2. Press and hold the RESET button 
on the compass module until CAL 
indicator is displayed in the trip 
computer. 
3. Release pressure from the RESET 
button. 
4. Slowly drive the vehicle in a 
circle (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) until the CAL indicator turns off. This 
will take three to five circles to complete calibration. 
5. The compass is now calibrated. 
Power quarter rear windows (if equipped) 
² With out a moon roof 
² With a moon roof 
VENT VENT 
MODE E/M 
RESET 
VENT ROOF VENT 
Press the portion of the VENT control to open the power rear 
quarter windows. 
Press the portion of the VENT control to close the power rear 
quarter windows. 
64
CLOCK 
Press H to set the hour. 
Press M to set the minute. 
Driver controls 
AUXILIARY POWER POINT 
Power outlets are designed for 
accessory plugs only. Do not 
hang any type of accessory or 
accessory bracket from the plug. 
Improper use of the power 
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. 
The auxiliary power point is located on the instrument panel. 
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter. Use 
the power point. 
65
Power outlets are designed for 
accessory plugs only. Do not 
hang any type of accessory or 
accessory bracket from the plug. 
Improper use of the power 
outlet can cause damage not 
covered by your warranty. 
A second auxiliary power point is 
located on the lower rear side of the 
console. The power point is 
accessible from the rear seats. 
POWER WINDOWS 
Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows. 
² Press the top portion of the 
rocker switch to close. 
AUTO 
Driver controls 
66
² Press the bottom portion of the 
rocker switch to open. 
One touch down 
² Press AUTO completely down and 
release quickly. The driver’s 
window will open fully. Depress 
again to stop window operation. 
One touch down can be deactivated 
during operation by pushing down 
on the top part of the driver power 
window control. 
Driver controls 
AUTO 
AUTO 
Window lock 
The window lock feature allows only 
the driver to operate the power 
windows. 
To lock out all the window controls 
WINDOW LOCK 
except for the driver’s press the left 
side of the control. Press the right side to restore the window controls. 
Accessory delay 
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten 
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until 
any door is opened. 
67
MIRRORS 
Automatic dimming rear view mirror 
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside rear view mirror with an 
auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from 
the normal state to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach 
the inside rear view mirror. When the inside rear view mirror detects 
bright light from in front of or behind the vehicle, the inside rear view 
mirror will automatically adjust (darken) to minimize glare. 
Do not block the sensor on the backside of the inside rear view mirror 
since this may impair proper system performance. 
Press the control to turn the mirror 
OFF or AUTO. 
The mirror will automatically return 
to the normal state whenever the 
OFF AUTO 
vehicle is placed in R 
(Reverse)(when the mirror is on) to ensure a bright clear view when 
backing up. 
Power side view mirrors 
The ignition can be in any position to adjust the power side view mirrors. 
To adjust your mirrors: 
1. Select L to adjust the left mirror 
or R to adjust the right mirror. 
MIRRORS 
L R 
Driver controls 
68
2. Move the control in the direction 
you wish to tilt the mirror. 
Driver controls 
MIRRORS 
L R 
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place. 
4. Adjust spotter mirrors (if equipped) manually. 
Heated outside mirrors 
Both mirrors are heated 
automatically to remove ice, mist 
and fog when the rear window 
defrost is activated. 
Do not remove ice from the mirrors 
with a scraper or attempt to 
readjust the mirror glass if it is 
frozen in place. These actions could 
cause damage to the glass and 
mirrors. 
Signal mirrors (if equipped) 
When the turn signal is activated, 
the outer portion of the appropriate 
mirror housing will blink red. 
This provides an additional warning 
to other drivers that your vehicle is 
about to turn. 
69
Driver controls 
Fold-away mirrors 
Pull the side mirrors in carefully 
when driving through a narrow 
space, like an automatic car wash. 
Power fold mirrors (if equipped) 
Press the control to retract or 
extend the outside rear view 
mirrors. 
If the mirrors are extended and are pushed-in manually, they will deploy 
back out after a short period of time; likewise, if they are retracted and 
pulled-out manually, they will deploy back in. 
Use caution in certain instances (i.e. automatic car washes) in order to 
avoid damage to the mirrors. 
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS 
The accelerator and brake pedal 
PEDALS 
should only be adjusted when the 
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift 
lever is in the P(Park) position. 
Press and hold the rocker control to 
adjust accelerator and brake pedal toward you or away from you. 
The adjustment allows for approximately 76 mm (3 inches) of maximum 
travel. 
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on pedals 
or while the vehicle is moving. 
70
SPEED CONTROL 
To turn speed control on 
² Press ON. 
Vehicle speed cannot be controlled 
until the vehicle is traveling at or 
above 48 km/h (30 mph). 
Do not shift the gearshift lever 
into N (Neutral) with the speed 
control on. 
Do not use the speed 
control in heavy traffic or 
on roads that are winding, 
slippery, or unpaved. 
To turn speed control off 
² Press OFF or 
² Turn off the vehicle ignition. 
Once speed control is switched off, 
the previously programmed set 
speed will be erased. 
Driver controls 
71
Driver controls 
To set a speed 
² Press SET ACCEL. For speed 
control to operate, the speed 
control must be ON and the 
vehicle speed must be greater 
than 48 km/h (30 mph). 
If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle speed may vary 
momentarily slower or faster than the set speed. This is normal. 
Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it increases above the 
set speed on a downhill. If your vehicle speed is faster than the set 
speed while driving on a downhill, you may want to shift to the next 
lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce your vehicle speed. 
If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set 
speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. This is normal. 
Pressing RESUME will re-engage it. 
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that 
are winding, slippery, or unpaved. 
72
To set a higher set speed 
² Press and hold SET ACCEL. 
Release the control when the 
desired vehicle speed is reached 
or 
² Press and release SET ACCEL to 
operate the Tap-Up function. 
Each press will increase the set 
speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or 
² Accelerate with your accelerator 
pedal. When the desired vehicle 
speed is reached, press and 
release SET ACCEL. 
You can accelerate with the 
accelerator pedal at any time during 
speed control usage. Releasing the 
accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to the previously programmed 
set speed. 
To set a lower set speed 
² Press and hold COAST. Release 
the control when the desired 
speed is reached or 
² Press and release COAST to 
operate the Tap-Down function. 
Each press will decrease the set 
speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or 
Driver controls 
73
Driver controls 
² Depress the brake pedal. When 
the desired vehicle speed is 
reached, press SET ACCEL. 
To disengage speed control 
² Depress the brake pedal. 
Disengaging the speed control will 
not erase the previously 
programmed set speed. 
74
Pressing OFF will erase the 
previously programmed set speed. 
To return to a previously set speed 
² Press RESUME. For RESUME to 
operate, the vehicle speed must 
be faster than 48 km/h (30 mph). 
Driver controls 
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS 
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control 
features. 
75
Radio control features 
² Press BAND/MODE to select AM, 
FM1, FM2, TAPE or CD (if 
equipped). 
In Radio mode: 
² Press MEM/NEXT to select a 
preset station from memory. 
In Tape mode: 
² Press MEM/NEXT to listen to the next selection on the tape. 
In CD mode: 
² Press MEM/NEXT to listen to the next track on the disc. 
In any mode: 
² Press VOL up or down to adjust the volume. 
Climate control features 
² Press TEMP up or down to adjust temperature. 
² Press FAN up or down to adjust fan speed. 
HOMELINKT UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (IF EQUIPPED) 
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver, located on the driver’s visor, 
provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters 
with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency 
codes of most current transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gates, 
security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting. 
When programming your HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver, to a 
garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of 
the way to prevent potential harm or damage. 
NEXT 
MODE 
Driver controls 
76
Driver controls 
Do not use the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver with any garage door 
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. 
federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model 
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot detect 
an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current 
U.S. federal safety standards. For more information on this matter, call 
toll-free: 1–800–355–3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink.jci.com. 
Programming 
Do not program the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver with the 
vehicle parked in the garage. 
1. Prepare for programming the 
HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver by 
erasing the three factory default 
codes by holding down the two 
outside buttons until the red light 
begins to flash after 20 seconds. 
Release both buttons. 
2. Hold the end of your hand-held 
transmitter 5–14 cm (2–5 inches) 
away from the HomeLinkt Universal 
Transceiver surface (located on your visor) while keeping the red light in 
view. 
3. Using both hands simultaneously 
press and hold the hand-held 
transmitter button and the desired 
HomeLinkt button. Do not release 
the buttons until step 4 has been 
completed. 
Some entry gates and garage door 
openers may require you to replace 
step 3 with the procedure in the “Canadian Programing” section. 
4. The red light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both buttons 
when the red light flashes rapidly. 
5. Follow steps 2 through 4 to program the remaining two buttons. 
If you do not successfully program the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver 
after repeated attempts, refer to Rolling code programing which 
follows, or call toll-free customer assistance: 1–800–355–3515 or on the 
Internet at HomeLink.jci.com. 
77
Driver controls 
Canadian Programming 
During programming, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop 
transmitting after two seconds which may not be long enough to 
program the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver. 
To program your hand-held 
transmitters: 
² Continue to hold the button on 
the HomeLinkt Universal 
Transceiver. 
² Press and re-press the hand-held 
transmitter button every two 
seconds until the red light changes from a slow to a fast flash. 
Operating the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver 
Once programmed, the HomeLinkt 
Universal Transceiver can be used in 
place of hand-held transmitters. To 
operate, simply press and release the 
appropriate HomeLinkt button (the 
red light will illuminate, indicating 
the signal is being transmitted). 
Rolling code programming 
Rolling code garage door openers (or other rolling code devices) which 
are “code protected” and manufactured after 1996, may be determined 
by the following: 
² Reference the device owner’s manual for verification 
² The hand-held transmitter appears to program the HomeLinkt 
Universal Transceiver but does not activate the device. 
² Press and hold the trained HomeLinkt button. The device has the 
rolling code feature if the indicator light flashes rapidly and then turns 
solid after two seconds. 
After completing the “Programming” functions, follow these steps to 
train a garage door opener with the rolling code feature: 
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor head unit. 
Refer to the garage door opener manual or call 1–800–355–3515 or on 
the Internet at HomeLink.jci.com. if there is difficulty locating the 
training button. 
78
Driver controls 
2. Press the training button on the garage door motor head unit (which 
will activate the “training” light). 
3. Press and release the 
programmed HomeLinkt button. 
Press and release the HomeLinkt 
button a second time to complete 
the training process. (Some garage 
door openers may require this 
procedure to be done a third time 
to complete the training.) 
The 2nd or 3rd press from step 3 will activate the door. The HomeLinkt 
Universal Transceiver has now been trained to the receiver. The 
remaining two buttons may now be programmed if this has not 
previously been done. 
Erasing HomeLinkT buttons 
Individual buttons cannot be erased, 
however, to erase the three 
programmed buttons: 
1. Hold down the two outside 
buttons until the red light begins to 
flash after 20 seconds. 
2. Release both buttons. 
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button 
To program a device to HomeLinkt using a HomeLinkt button previously 
trained, follow these steps: 
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button. Do NOT release until 
step 4 has been completed. 
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), 
position the hand-held transmitter 5–14 cm (2 to 5 inches) away from 
the HomeLinkt surface. 
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 
4. The HomeLinkt indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. 
When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons. 
79
Driver controls 
The previous device has now been erased and the new device can be 
activated by pushing the HomeLinkt button that has just been programmed. 
TRIP COMPUTER 
The trip computer tells you about the condition of your vehicle through 
a constant monitor of vehicle systems. You may select display features on 
the trip computer for a display of status. 
The appearance of your vehicle’s trip computer may differ depending on 
your vehicle’s option package, but the functions are the same. 
The trip computer only works when the ignition is in the ON position. 
Trip computer features follow: 
Selectable features 
English/metric display 
Press this control to change the trip 
computer display from metric to 
English units. Press again to change 
from English to metric units. 
Mode control 
Each press of the MODE control will 
display a different feature as follows: 
Fuel range. This displays the 
approximate number of kilometers 
(miles) left to drive before the fuel 
tank is empty. The indicated 
distance to empty may be 
inaccurate: 
² with sustained, drastic changes in 
fuel economy (such as trailer towing), but will eventually recover. 
² if the vehicle is started while parked on an incline. 
² if less than 27 liters (6 gallons) of fuel is added to the fuel tank. 
80
Driver controls 
The fuel range function will flash for 5 seconds when you have 
approximately the following distance you can drive before the fuel tank 
is empty: 
² 80 km (50 miles) 
² 40 km (25 miles) 
² 16 km (10 miles) 
Average fuel economy. The display will indicate the vehicle’s average 
fuel economy in liters/100 km (or miles/gallon) since last reset. 
² To reset the average fuel 
economy: 
1. Press the MODE control 
repeatedly until AVG F/ECON is 
displayed (no other display is 
resettable). 
2. Press the E/M and MODE 
controls simultaneously. 
Compass display. Refer to Electronic compass in the Controls and 
features chapter for more information. 
Off. In this mode the display will go blank indicating the system is off. 
OVERDRIVE CONTROL 
Activating overdrive 
(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy. 
The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through 
all available gears. 
Deactivating overdrive 
Press the Transmission Control 
Switch (TCS) located on the end of 
the gearshift lever. The 
OVERDRIVE 
Transmission Control Indicator Light 
(TCIL) (the word OFF) will 
illuminate on the end of the gearshift lever. The transmission will operate 
in all gears except overdrive. 
81
Driver controls 
To return to normal overdrive mode, 
press the Transmission Control 
Switch again. The TCIL (the word 
OVERDRIVE OFF 
OFF) will no longer be illuminated. 
When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will 
automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode. 
For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission 
control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission 
Operation section of the Driving chapter. 
CENTER CONSOLE 
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These 
include: 
² Utility compartment 
² Cupholders 
² Coin holder slots 
² Tissue box holder 
² Compact disc changer (if equipped) 
² Cellular phone (if equipped) 
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you 
in a collision. 
Navigation system (if equipped) 
The navigation system is located in the center console. For information 
on operating the navigation system, refer to the Navigation System 
Supplement. 
For any other question or problems, contact Navigation Technologies at: 
1–888–NAV-MAPS (1–888–628–6277), (800#) 
740 East Arques Avenue 
Sunnyvale, CA 94086–3734 
www.navtech.com 
Cellular phone 
Refer to the “Cellular phone guide” for instructions on operation. 
82
Driver controls 
Rear center console features (if equipped) 
The rear center console incorporates the following features: 
² utility compartment 
² cupholders 
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT 
Position the floor mat so that the 
eyelet is over the pointed end of the 
retention post and rotate forward to 
lock in. Make sure that the mat does 
not interfere with the operation of 
the accelerator or the brake pedal. 
To remove the floor mat, reverse the 
installation procedure. 
LIFTGATE 
To open the rear window, pull the 
left side of the liftgate handle. 
To open the liftgate, pull the right 
side of the liftgate handle. 
² Do not open the liftgate or 
liftgate glass in a garage or other 
enclosed area with a low ceiling. 
If the liftgate glass is raised and 
the liftgate is also opened, both 
liftgate and glass could be 
damaged against a low ceiling. 
² Do not leave the liftgate or 
liftgate glass open while driving. Doing so could cause serious damage 
to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing carbon monoxide 
to enter the vehicle. 
83
Driver controls 
Make sure that the liftgate door and/or window are closed to 
prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This 
will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must 
drive with the liftgate door or window open, keep the vents open so 
outside air comes into the vehicle. 
LUGGAGE RACK (IF EQUIPPED) 
The rear cross-bar can be adjusted to fit the item being carried. The 
front cross-bar does not move. 
To adjust cross-bar position: 
1. Loosen the thumbscrews at both 
ends of the rear cross-bar. 
2. Slide the cross-bar to the desired 
location. 
3. Tighten the thumbscrews at both 
ends of the cross-bar. 
Load luggage at the front cross-bar and adjust the rear cross-bar as 
necessary. 
² Do not exceed 90.7 kg (200 lb) of luggage if the weight is placed 
directly on the cross-bars. 
² Do not exceed 68 kg (150 lb) if the weight is resting directly on the 
roof. 
84
KEYS 
The key operates all locks on your 
vehicle. In case of loss, replacement 
keys are available from your dealer. 
You should always carry a second 
key with you in a safe place in case 
you require it in an emergency. 
Refer to SecuriLocky Passive 
Anti-Theft System for more 
information. 
POWER DOOR LOCKS 
If the door does not unlock when 
the U is pressed, see Power door 
disable feature in the Remote entry 
section in this chapter. 
Press U to unlock all doors and L to 
lock all doors. 
Locks and security 
U L 
Childproof door locks 
When these locks are set, the rear 
doors cannot be opened from the 
inside. The rear doors can be 
opened from the outside when the 
doors are unlocked. 
The childproof locks are located on 
rear edge of each rear door and 
must be set separately for each 
door. Setting the lock for one door 
will not automatically set the lock 
for both doors. 
Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock. Move control down 
to disengage childproof locks. 
85
Locks and security 
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM 
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of 
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device 
must accept any interference received, including interference that may 
cause undesired operation. 
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party 
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to 
operate the equipment. 
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to: 
² unlock the vehicle doors without a key. 
² lock all the vehicle doors without a key. 
² activate the personal alarm. 
The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in the LOCK 
position. 
This system will disable the power door lock controls. These will not 
work until the vehicle is disarmed. Refer to Power door locks in the 
Driver Controls chapter for more information. 
If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle, 
ensure ALL key fobs (remote entry transmitters) are brought to the 
dealership, to aid in troubleshooting. 
Unlocking the doors 
Press this control to unlock the 
driver door. The interior lamps and 
running board lamps will illuminate. 
The memory mirrors/seat will also 
be moved to position 1, 2 or 3 
depending upon which remote entry 
transmitter (1, 2 or 3) is used. 
Press the control a second time 
within three seconds to unlock all 
doors. 
86
Locks and security 
Locking the doors 
Press this control to lock all doors. 
The doors will lock and the lamps 
will flash. 
To confirm doors are closed and 
locked, press this control a second 
time within three seconds. The 
door(s) will lock again, the horn will 
chirp once and the lamps will flash. 
If any of the doors are open or ajar, 
the horn will make two quick chirps, 
reminding you to properly close the doors. 
Power door lock disable feature 
This feature will help protect your vehicle from unauthorized entry. 
The UNLOCK function on the power door switch will not operate with 
the ignition OFF and twenty seconds after the doors are closed and 
electronically locked by the key fob, key pad, or power door switch (if 
pressed while the door was open). 
The UNLOCK function will operate again after you unlock the vehicle 
using the key fob or key pad, turn the ignition to ON, or open the door 
from inside of the vehicle. 
87
Locks and security 
Deactivating/activating power door lock disable feature 
1. Turn the ignition key to ON, then 
press the UNLOCK button 3 times. 
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF, 
then press the UNLOCK button 3 
times. 
U L 
3. Turn the ignition key to ON, 
within five seconds press the LOCK 
button 2 times. 
The user should receive 2 horn 
chirps to indicate the system has been disabled or 2 chirps followed by 
a honk to indicate the system has been enabled. 
Pressing the power door LOCK button 2 times again will toggle the trim 
switch inhibit states. 
Turn ignition to OFF to exit programming. 
Sounding a panic alarm 
Press this control to activate the 
alarm. 
To deactivate the alarm, press the 
control again or turn the ignition to 
ACC or ON. 
Panic alarm will only operate with 
the ignition in the OFF position. 
Replacing the battery 
The remote transmitter is powered by one coin type three-volt lithium 
battery CR2032 or equivalent. Typical operating range will allow you to 
be up to 10 meters (33 feet) away from your vehicle. A decrease in 
operating range can be caused by: 
² weather conditions 
² nearby radio towers 
² structures around the vehicle 
² other vehicles parked next to the vehicle 
88
Locks and security 
To replace the battery: 
1. Twist a thin coin between the two 
halves of the transmitter near the 
key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE 
FRONT PART OF THE 
TRANSMITTER APART. 
2. Place the positive (+) side of new 
battery in the same orientation. 
Refer to the diagram inside the 
transmitter unit. 
3. Snap the two halves back 
together. 
Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to 
become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should 
operate normally after battery replacement. 
Replacing lost transmitters 
If a remote transmitter has been lost 
and you would like to remove it 
from the vehicle’s memory, or you 
would like to purchase additional 
remote transmitters and have them 
programmed to your vehicle: 
² Take all your vehicle’s 
transmitters to your dealer for 
programming, or 
² Perform the programming 
procedure yourself 
Programming remote transmitters 
It is necessary to have all (maximum of four — original and/or new) of 
your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure. 
89
Locks and security 
To program the transmitters yourself: 
² Place the key in the ignition and 
turn from 2 (LOCK) to 3 (OFF) 
and cycle between 3 (OFF) and 
4(ON) eight times in rapid 
succession (within 10 seconds) 
with the eighth turn ending in the 
4 (ON) position. The doors will 
lock/unlock to confirm that 
programming mode has been 
entered. 
² Within 20 seconds, program a 
3 
2 
1 
5 
4 
remote transmitter by pressing any button on a transmitter. The doors 
will lock/unlock to confirm that the remote transmitter has been 
programmed. (If more than 20 seconds pass before pressing a remote 
transmitter button, the programming mode will exit and the procedure 
will have to be repeated.) 
² Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters. 
The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has 
been programmed. 
² When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn 
the ignition to 3 (OFF). Again the doors will lock/unlock to confirm 
programming has been completed. 
Illuminated entry 
The illuminated entry system will turn on the interior lights when the 
remote transmitter unlock control is pressed. 
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if the 
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or if the remote transmitter 
lock control is pressed, or after 25 seconds of illumination. 
The inside lights will not turn off if: 
² they have been turned on with the dimmer control or 
² any door is open 
The battery save feature will turn off the interior lights 45 minutes after 
the last door is closed, even if the dimmer control is on. 
90
Locks and security 
Memory seat/mirrors/adjustable pedal feature 
The memory feature allows automatic positioning of the driver seat, side 
mirrors and adjustable pedals to three programmable positions. 
² To program position one, move the driver seat, both side mirrors, and 
adjustable pedals to the desired positions. Press the SET control. The 
SET control indicator light will briefly illuminate. While the light is 
illuminated, press control 1. 
² To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control 
2. 
² To program position three, repeat the previous procedure but press 
controls 1 and 2 simultaneously. 
The memory feature also allows you to recall previously stored positions 
with your remote transmitter(s). Up to three remote transmitters can be 
activated to utilize the memory recall positions. 
Press the memory feature control to move to the previously stored 
seat/mirror/adjustable pedal positions. 
Activating/deactivating the memory feature on your remote 
transmitter 
The memory feature from the remote transmitter can be turned off/on, 
however, the memory control buttons will continue to operate. Before 
following the procedure, make sure that the ignition is OFF and all doors 
and the liftgate window are closed. You must complete steps 1–7 within 
30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure 
needs to be repeated, you must wait 30 seconds. 
1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 
2. Press the power door unlock control three times. 
3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. 
4. Press the power door unlock control three times. 
5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp. 
6. Press the power door unlock control two times, then press the power 
lock control once. The horn will chirp twice if the memory feature was 
deactivated or three times (two short and one long chirp) if the memory 
feature was activated. 
7. Turn ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the 
procedure is complete. 
91
Locks and security 
Autolock (if equipped) 
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when: 
² all doors, liftgate and liftgate window are closed 
² the engine is running 
² you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion. 
Relock 
The autolock feature repeats when: 
² any door, except the drivers, is opened then closed while the engine is 
running and 
² you put the vehicle in motion. 
Deactivating/activating the autolock feature 
Before following the procedure, make sure that the ignition is OFF and 
all vehicle doors and the liftgate window are closed. 
You must complete steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will 
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must 
wait 30 seconds. 
1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 
2. Press the power door unlock control three times. 
3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. 
4. Press the power door unlock control three times. 
5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp. 
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will 
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long 
chirp) if autolock was activated. 
7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the 
procedure is complete. 
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 
With the keyless entry keypad, you can: 
² lock or unlock the vehicle doors without using the key. 
Your vehicle has a factory set 5 digit code that operates the keyless entry 
system. You can also program your own 5 digit personal entry code. The 
factory-set code is located: 
92
Locks and security 
² on the owner’s wallet card in the glove compartment 
² taped to the computer module 
² or at your dealer. 
When pressing the controls on the keyless entry keypad, press the 
middle of the controls to ensure a good activation. 
This system will disable the power door lock controls. These will not 
work until the vehicle is disarmed. Refer to Power door locks in the 
Driver Controls chapter for more information. 
Programming your own personal entry code 
To program your own code: 
1. Enter factory set code (keypad will illuminate when pressed). 
2. Press 1/2 control within five 
seconds of step 1. 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
3. Enter your personal 5 digit code. 
Enter each digit within five seconds 
of previous one. 
Do not set a code that includes five of the same number or presents 
them in sequential order. Thieves can easily figure out these types of 
codes. 
Your personal code does not replace the permanent code that the 
dealership gave you. You can use either code to unlock your vehicle. If a 
second personal code is entered, the module will erase it in favor of the 
new code. 
If you wish to erase your personal code, use the following instructions: 
1. Enter factory set code. 
2. Press 1/2 control within five 
seconds of step one. 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
3. Press 7/8 control and 9/0 control 
at the same time within five seconds 
of step 2. 
The system will now only respond to the factory set code. 
93
Anti-scan feature 
The keyless entry pad is disabled for 
1 minute after 7 unsuccessful 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
attempts at entering a valid key 
code. The keypad will flash during 
this 1 minute mode. However, the 7/8 and 9/0 controls will still lock the 
vehicle. 
Anti-scan will turned off after: 
² one minute of keypad inactivity 
² the keyfob UNLOCK button is pressed. 
² the ignition is turned to the ON position 
Unlocking the doors with the keyless entry system 
To unlock the driver door, enter 
either the factory set code or the 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
personal code (each digit must be 
pressed within five seconds of the 
prior digit). The interior lamps will 
also illuminate. 
To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or personal code (driver 
door unlocks) and press the 3/4 control within five seconds. 
Locking the doors with the keyless entry system 
It is not necessary to enter the 
factory or personal code prior to 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
locking all doors. To lock the doors: 
² Press the 7/8 control and the 9/0 
control at the same time. 
Activating/deactivating autolock with the keyless entry system 
Before following the activation or 
deactivation procedures, make sure 
that the anti-theft system (if 
equipped) is not armed, ignition is 
off, and all vehicle doors and liftgate window are closed. 
1. Enter 5 digit entry code 
2. Press and hold 7/8 control 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
Locks and security 
94
Locks and security 
3. Press and release 3/4 control while holding 7/8 control 
4. Release 7/8 control. 
The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short 
and one long chirp) if autolock was activated. 
To re-activate autolock, repeat steps 1–4. 
SECURILOCKY PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM 
SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization 
system. This system prevents the engine from being started unless a 
coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. 
The SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is not compatible with 
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may 
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. 
Automatic arming 
The vehicle is armed immediately 
after switching the ignition to the 3 
(OFF) position. The THEFT light in 
the instrument cluster will flash 
3 
every two seconds when the vehicle 
is armed. 
2 
1 
5 
4 
Automatic disarming 
Switching the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a coded key disarms 
the vehicle. The THEFT light will illuminate for three seconds and then 
go out. If the THEFT light stays on for an extended period of time or 
flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealership or a 
qualified technician. 
95
Locks and security 
Key information 
Your vehicle is supplied with two 
coded keys. Only a coded key will 
start your vehicle. Spare coded keys 
can be purchased from your 
dealership. Your dealership can 
program your key or you can “do it 
yourself”, refer to Programming 
spare keys. 
Large metallic objects, electronic 
devices on the key chain that can be 
used to purchase gasoline or similar 
items, or a second key on the same 
key ring as the coded key may 
cause vehicle starting issues. If 
present, you need to keep these 
objects from touching the coded 
key while starting the engine. These 
objects and devices cannot damage 
the coded key, but can cause a 
momentary NO—START condition if 
they are too close to the key during 
engine start. If a problem occurs, 
turn ignition OFF and restart the 
engine with all other objects on the 
key ring held away from the ignition key. Check to make sure the coded 
key is an approved Lincoln coded key. 
96
If your keys are lost or stolen you 
will need to do the following: 
² Use your spare key to start the 
vehicle, or 
² Have your vehicle towed to a 
Locks and security 
dealership or locksmith. The key 
codes will need to be erased from 
your vehicle and new key codes will need to be re-coded. 
Replacing coded keys can be very costly and you may want to store an 
extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to prevent 
an unforeseen inconvenience. 
The correct coded key must be used for your vehicle. The use of the 
wrong type of coded key may lead to a “NO-START” condition. 
If an unprogrammed key is used in the ignition it will cause a 
“NO START” condition. 
Programming spare keys 
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only 
SecuriLocky keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you 
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already 
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily 
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure. 
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must 
bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the spare coded key(s) 
programmed. 
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. 
97
1. Insert the first previously 
programmed coded key into the 
ignition and turn the ignition from 3 
4 
(OFF) to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition 
3 
in 4 (ON) for at least one second). 
5 
2. Turn ignition to 3 (OFF) then 2 
2 
(LOCK) and remove the first coded 
key from the ignition. 
3. Within five seconds of removing 
1 
the first coded key, insert the 
second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the 
ignition from 3 (OFF) to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition in 4 (ON) for at least 
one second but no more than five seconds). 
4. Turn the ignition to 3 (OFF) then 2 (LOCK) and remove the second 
coded key from the ignition. 
5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new 
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the 
ignition from 3 (OFF) to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition in 4 (ON) for at least 
one second). This step will program your new key to a coded key. 
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this 
procedure from step 1. 
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the 
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. 
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine 
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat steps 1 
through 6. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership to 
have the new spare key(s) programmed. 
Locks and security 
98
Seating and safety restraints 
SEATING 
Adjustable head restraints (if equipped) 
Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with head restraints which are 
vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit 
head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head 
restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your 
head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to 
raise and lower the head restraints. 
The head restraints can be moved 
up and down. 
Using the power lumbar support (if equipped) 
The power lumbar control is located 
on the outboard side of the seat. 
Press one side of the control to 
adjust firmness. 
Press the other side of the control to adjust softness. 
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped) 
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is 
moving. 
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring 
people in a collision or sudden stop. 
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap 
belt snug and low across the hips. 
99
Seating and safety restraints 
Reclining the seatback can reduce the effectiveness of the seat’s 
safety belt in the event of a collision. 
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. 
Press to raise or lower the front 
portion of the seat cushion. 
Press to raise or lower the rear 
portion of the seat cushion. 
Press the control to move the seat 
forward, backward, up or down. 
100
Seating and safety restraints 
Memory seats/rearview mirrors/adjustable pedals (if equipped) 
This system allows automatic 
positioning of the driver seat, 
outside rearview mirrors, and 
SET 
adjustable pedals to three 
programmable positions. 
The memory seat control is located 
on the driver door. 
1 2 
² To program position one, move 
the driver seat to the desired 
position using the seat controls. 
Press the SET control. The SET control indicator light will briefly 
illuminate. While the light is illuminated, press control 1. 
² To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control 
2. 
² To program position three, repeat the previous procedure but press 
controls 1 and 2 simultaneously. 
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in 
Park. A memory seat position may be programmed at any time. 
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote 
entry transmitter UNLOCK control. 
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to 
Remote entry system in the Locks and security chapter. 
Heated seats (if equipped) 
To operate the heated seats: 
² Push control to activate. 
² Push again to deactivate. 
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. 
101
Seating and safety restraints 
CLIMATE CONTROL SEATS (if equipped) 
To operate the climate control seats the engine must be running. 
² Slide the control to to heat 
the seatback and the seat 
cushion. 
² Slide the control to to cool 
the seatback and the seat 
cushion. 
5 3 
In heat mode: 
² Rotate the thumbwheel to select the desired heat level from 0 (OFF) 
to 5 (MAX). 
In cool mode: 
² Rotate the thumbwheel to select the desired cooling level from 0 
(OFF) to 5 (MAX). When setting 1 is selected, the seat(s) will provide 
vent cooling only (same temperature as cabin air). 
Allow five minutes for the temperature level to stabilize. 
The thumbwheel selection level numbers will illuminate when the system 
is turned on. 
If the climate control seat is not turned OFF (0), the seat will return to 
the selected temperature level each time the ignition is turned to ON. 
CLIMATE CONTROL SEATS air filter replacement (if equipped) 
The climate control seat system includes an air filter that has to be 
replaced periodically. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for 
more information. 
102
Seating and safety restraints 
² There is a filter located under 
both front seats. 
² It can be accessed from the 
second row seat. Move the front 
seat all the way forward and up 
to ease access. 
To remove climate control seat air 
filter: 
² Remove key from ignition. 
² Push on the outside rigid edge of 
the air filter at the center and 
rotate downward once tab is 
released. 
 
 
103
Seating and safety restraints 
² Remove filter. 
To install climate control seat air filter: 
² First, position the filter in it’s 
housing making sure that the far 
forward end is all the way up in 
the housing. Then push in on the 
center of the outside edge of the 
filter and rotate up into the 
housing until it clips into position. 
REAR SEATS 
Adjustable head restraints 
Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with head restraints which are 
vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit 
head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head 
restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your 
head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to 
raise and lower the head restraints. 
Push or pull the head rests to the 
desired position. 
104
Rear folding bench seat (if equipped) 
Folding down the rear seats 
Ensure that the headrest is in the down position and no objects such as 
books, purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row 
seats before folding them down. 
Move front passenger seat forward so that the second row seat head rest 
clears the front seat. 
1. Locate handle below the seat cushion near the bottom of the door side 
cushion that reads “FOLD FLAT OR RECLINE”. 
2. Lift the handle and push the seatback toward the front of the vehicle. 
3. Press the green control on the 
seatback to release the closeout 
panel. Rotate the panel to closeout 
the space in the floor. 
4. Once the second row seats are in 
the down position, the front seats 
may be readjusted. 
Returning the seat to upright 
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is 
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury 
during a sudden stop. 
Seating and safety restraints 
105
Seating and safety restraints 
1. Rotate the closeout panel onto 
the seatback and press the black 
control (adjacent to the green 
control) to lock. 
2. Locate and lift the handle that 
reads “FOLD FLAT OR RECLINE”. 
3. Pull on the seatback while lifting 
the handle to lift the seat into the 
upright position. 
Reclining the seatback 
Locate the lever at the bottom of 
the seatback that reads “FOLD 
FLAT OR RECLINE”. Pull the lever 
upwards to recline the seatback. 
Third row seat 
The third row seat is equipped with combination lap and shoulder belts 
in the outboard seating positions and a manual adjust tongue lap belt in 
the center seating position. For information on the proper operation of 
the safety restraints, refer to Safety Restraints in this chapter. 
The third row seat may be removed from the vehicle for additional cargo 
space. 
106
Seating and safety restraints 
Accessing the third row seat 
Your vehicle is equipped with an 
easy entry second row seat feature 
which allows ready access to the 
third row seat. You may enter the 
third row seat: 
² through the passenger side rear 
door if your vehicle has a second 
row bench seat 
² through either rear door if your 
vehicle has second row bucket 
seats 
Ensure that the second row seat is in the upright position in order to 
achieve optimum access to the third row. 
To minimize the risk of personal injury, the third row seat should not be 
left in the forward, stowed position while the vehicle is in motion. Please 
ensure that the seat is in the upright, fully latched position before 
putting the vehicle in motion. 
1. Locate and lift seat control “3RD ROW ENTRY” to release seatback 
and cushion to flip toward the front seat. 
2. After entering the seat, reverse this procedure; ensure that the latch 
tub and surrounding areas are clear. 
Folding down the third row seat 
Pull the seat release lever located 
on the lower right side of the 
seatback while pushing the seatback 
down into the seat cushion. The 
seatback will latch into place. 
Pull the seat release lever to return 
the seatback into the upright seating 
position. 
107
Seating and safety restraints 
Removing the third row seat 
From the rear of the vehicle, with 
the liftgate open: 
1. Disengage the lap/shoulder belt 
from the floor by inserting a key or 
small screwdriver through the hole 
in the boot of the detachable 
anchor. Then, press the release 
button to separate the detachable 
anchor from the anchor tongue. 
2. Before removing the seat, be sure 
that the detachable anchor tongue is 
stowed flat into the vehicle floor. 
3. Use the black plastic clip (located 
just above the detachable anchor) to 
stow the loose seat belt. 
108
Seating and safety restraints 
² Pull the seat release lever located 
on the lower right side of the 
seatback while pushing the 
seatback down into the seat 
cushion. 
² The seatback will latch into place. 
4. Lift the seat release bar located 
at the center of the seat near the 
floor to release the floor latches. 
5. While pulling up on the release 
bar, lift the seat up and out of the floor tubs and roll seat rearward. 
6. With assistance, lift the seat out of the vehicle. 
Installing the third row seat 
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is 
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury 
during a sudden stop. 
When reinstalling a rear seat in your vehicle it must be placed in 
its original position. Improper installation of the seat will prevent 
correct use of the safety belts and could increase the risk of injury. 
Refer to the warning label on the seat belt. 
109
Seating and safety restraints 
Before installing your third row seat, 
ensure that the detachable anchor 
tongues are stowed into the floor 
and the loose belts are stored out of 
the way. For proper latching, ensure 
that the floor tubs are clear of 
debris. 
From the rear of the vehicle, with 
the liftgate open: 
1. With assistance, lift the seat into the rear of the vehicle and position 
front rollers onto the track. By rolling the seat forward, guide the seat 
positioners over the front pins of the floor tubs. 
2. Guide the positioners around each pin and lower the seat. 
² When the rear of the seat is 10–13 cm (4–5 in) above the rear pins, 
let the seat drop. This will ensure that the seat will properly latch into 
the floor. 
3. Locate the seat belt anchor tongue in the plastic housing on the floor. 
4. Disconnect the detachable anchor from its stowage location and 
connect it to the anchor tongue (making sure that the label on the 
detachable anchor is pointing toward the outside of the vehicle (left 
side) and that the belts are not twisted or jammed). 
NOTE:Improper installation of the seat belt anchor will prevent correct 
use of the safety belt and could increase the risk or injury. 
5. Insert the seat detachable anchor into detachable anchor tongue until 
you hear a “click” and feel the latch engage. 
6. Push up on the seat to verify that it is latched into the floor. 
7. Verify that the safety belts can move freely on either side of the seat. 
110
Seating and safety restraints 
3rd row tip/stow feature 
The 3rd row seat has a tip/stow feature to increase cargo space without 
removing the seat from the vehicle. 
To put seat in tip/stow position: 
1. Pull the seat release lever located 
on the lower right side of the 
seatback while pushing the seatback 
down into the seat cushion. 
2. The seatback will latch into place. 
3. To release the rear floor latches 
of the 3rd row seat, lift the seat 
release bar located at the center of 
the seat near the floor to release the 
floor latches. 
4. Lift back of seat up and hold. 
5. Lift latch up and out of floor tub 
to upright position using the strap 
on the latch. 
111
Seating and safety restraints 
6. Pull down support bar and push 
into floor latch. 
To return seat to seating position: 
1. Hold seat and pull support bar from floor latch. 
2. Rotate support bar up under seat. 
3. Rotate floor latch down into floor tub. 
4. Lower the seat. When the rear of the seat is 10–13 cm (4–5 in) above 
the rear pins, let the seat drop. This will ensure that the seat will 
properly latch into the floor. 
SAFETY RESTRAINTS 
Safety restraints precautions 
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap 
belt snug and low across the hips. 
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they 
can be properly restrained. 
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the 
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from 
injury in a collision. 
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always 
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is 
provided. 
112
Seating and safety restraints 
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or 
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas 
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to 
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and 
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a 
safety belt properly. 
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely 
to die than a person wearing a safety belt. 
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt 
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that 
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the 
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 
2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside 
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. 
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back 
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. 
Combination lap and shoulder belts 
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to 
the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it 
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. 
² Front seats 
113
Seating and safety restraints 
² Rear seats (if equipped) 
2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the 
buckle. 
² Front seats 
² Rear seats (if equipped) 
114
Seating and safety restraints 
The front and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are 
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat 
outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes described below: 
Vehicle sensitive mode 
The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free 
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in 
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes 
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of 
approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will 
lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. 
The safety belt system can also be made to lock manually by quickly 
pulling on the shoulder belt. 
Automatic locking mode 
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will 
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. 
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. 
When to use the automatic locking mode 
² Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or 
outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children 12 years old and 
under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever 
possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for 
Children later in this chapter. 
How to use the automatic locking mode 
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 
² Front seats 
115
Seating and safety restraints 
² Rear seats (if equipped) 
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and 
pull downward until the entire belt 
is extracted. 
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking 
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking 
mode. 
How to disengage the automatic locking mode 
Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies 
and attaching hardware should be inspected by a qualified 
technician after any collision. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a 
collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or 
improper operation is noted. 
116
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract 
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the 
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. 
After any vehicle collision, the front passenger outboard seat belt 
system must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that 
the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still 
functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for 
proper function. 
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if 
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or 
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked 
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. 
Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could 
increase the risk of injury in collisions. 
Safety belt pretensioner 
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and 
front passenger seating positions. 
The safety belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing 
from the safety belt system. The safety belt pretensioner uses the same 
crash sensor system as the front air bag supplemental restraint system 
(SRS). When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap 
and shoulder belt is tightened. The driver and front passenger seat belt 
system (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be 
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in 
deployment of front air bags and safety belt pretensioners. Refer to the 
Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter. 
Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above 
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of 
a collision. 
Seating and safety restraints 
117
Seating and safety restraints 
Front and second row safety belt height adjustment 
Your vehicle has safety belt height 
adjustments for the driver, front 
passenger and second row outboard 
passengers. Adjust the height of the 
shoulder belt so the belt rests 
across the middle of your shoulder. 
To lower the shoulder belt height, 
push the button down and slide the 
height adjuster down. To raise the 
height of the shoulder belt, slide the 
height adjuster up. Pull down on the 
height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. 
Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests 
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety 
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and 
increase the risk of injury in a collision. 
Lap belts 
Adjusting the lap belt 
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the 
hips, not across the waist. 
118
Seating and safety restraints 
² 1st row and 3rd row (if equipped) center seating positions 
The lap belt does not adjust automatically. 
Insert the tongue into the correct 
buckle (the buckle closest to the 
direction the tongue is coming 
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the 
tongue at a right angle to the belt 
and pull across your lap until it 
reaches the buckle. To tighten the 
belt, pull the loose end of the belt 
through the tongue until it fits 
snugly across the hips. 
Shorten and fasten the belt when 
not in use. 
² 2nd row center seating position (if equipped) 
The lap belt will adjust automatically. To fasten, grasp the tongue, and 
with a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing to buckle the tongue 
into the correct buckle. If you did not pull out enough webbing to reach 
the buckle, allow the tongue to retract fully before trying to pull it out 
again. 
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime 
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a 
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. 
119
Seating and safety restraints 
Conditions of operation 
If... Then... 
The driver’s safety belt is not 
buckled before the ignition switch 
is turned to the ON position... 
The safety belt warning light 
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the 
warning chime sounds 4-8 
seconds. 
The driver’s safety belt is buckled 
while the indicator light is 
illuminated and the warning chime 
is sounding... 
The safety belt warning light and 
warning chime turn off. 
The driver’s safety belt is buckled 
before the ignition switch is turned 
to the ON position... 
The safety belt warning light and 
indicator chime remain off. 
BeltMinder 
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt 
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the 
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently 
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the 
instrument cluster. 
If... Then... 
The driver’s safety belt is not 
buckled approximately 5 seconds 
after the safety belt warning light 
has turned off... 
The BeltMinder feature is 
activated - the safety belt warning 
light illuminates and the warning 
chime sounds for 6 seconds every 
30 seconds, repeating for 
approximately 5 minutes or until 
safety belt is buckled. 
The driver’s safety belt is buckled 
while the safety belt indicator light 
is illuminated and the safety belt 
warning chime is sounding... 
The BeltMinder feature will not 
activate. 
The driver’s safety belt is buckled 
before the ignition switch is turned 
to the ON position... 
The BeltMinder feature will not 
activate. 
The purpose of the BeltMinder is to remind occasional wearers to wear 
safety belts all of the time. 
120
Seating and safety restraints 
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts: 
(All statistics based on U.S. data) 
Reasons given... Consider... 
“Crashes are rare 
events” 
36 700 crashes occur every day. The more we 
drive, the more we are exposed to “rare” events, 
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be 
seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime. 
“I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home. 
“Belts are 
uncomfortable” 
We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If 
you are uncomfortable - try different positions for 
the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback 
which should be as upright as possible; this can 
improve comfort. 
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder reminds 
us to take a few seconds to buckle up. 
“Seat belts don’t 
work” 
Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of 
death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars, 
and by 60% in light trucks. 
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle 
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around. 
“Belts wrinkle my 
clothes” 
Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more 
than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are 
unbelted. 
“The people I’m 
with don’t wear 
belts” 
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more 
often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people. 
Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate 
behavior they see. 
“I have an air bag” Air bags offer greater protection when used with 
safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to 
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers. 
“I’d rather be 
thrown clear” 
Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40 
times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help 
prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”. 
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt 
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of 
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt 
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below. 
121
Seating and safety restraints 
One time disable 
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an 
ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only. 
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature 
Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the 
deactivation/activation programming procedure. 
The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the 
following procedure: 
Before following the procedure, make sure that: 
² the parking brake is set 
² the gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) 
² the ignition switch is in the OFF position 
² all vehicle doors are closed 
² the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled 
² the parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped 
with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure.) 
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt 
Minder feature while driving the vehicle. 
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT 
START THE ENGINE) 
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2 
minutes) 
² Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will 
have to be repeated. 
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the 
safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder 
warning activation. 
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps. 
5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the 
safety belt unbuckled. 
² After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three 
seconds. 
122
Seating and safety restraints 
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, 
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. 
² This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable 
BeltMinder if it is currently disabled. 
7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety 
belt warning light four times per second for three seconds. 
8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety 
belt warning light four times per second for three seconds, followed by 
three seconds with the safety belt warning light off, then followed by 
flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three 
seconds again. 
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is 
complete. 
Safety belt extension assembly 
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm (8 
inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number 
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost. 
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety 
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on 
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too 
short for you when fully extended. Do not use extensions to change the 
fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. 
Safety belt maintenance 
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work 
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure 
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt 
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle 
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder 
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if 
equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), 
LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower anchors (if equipped), and 
attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor 
Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles 
involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor 
and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and 
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety 
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and 
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. 
123
Seating and safety restraints 
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt 
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe 
personal injuries in the event of a collision. 
Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts in the Cleaning 
chapter. 
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) 
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module 
which records information about the air bag and sensor systems. In the 
event of a collision this module may save information related to the 
collision including information about the air bag system and impact 
severity. This information will assist Ford Motor Company in the 
servicing vehicle and helping to better understand real world collisions 
and further improve the safety of future vehicles. 
124
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions 
The supplemental restraint system 
is designed to work with the safety 
belt to help protect the driver and 
right front passenger from certain 
upper body injuries. 
Air bags DO NOT inflate slowly or 
gently and the risk of injury from a 
deploying air bag is greatest close to 
the trim covering the air bag 
module. 
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always 
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is 
provided. 
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back 
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) 
recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) 
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module. 
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air 
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. 
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the air bag: 
² Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the 
pedals comfortably. 
² Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright 
position. 
Seating and safety restraints 
125
Seating and safety restraints 
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing 
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those 
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing 
serious injury. 
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag 
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or 
Lincoln Mercury dealer. 
Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame, 
bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the 
performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not 
modify the front end of the vehicle. 
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the air bag 
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body 
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation 
of additional equipment. 
126
Seating and safety restraints 
Children and air bags 
For additional important safety 
information, read all information on 
safety restraints in this guide. 
Children must always be properly 
restrained. Accident statistics 
suggest that children are safer when 
properly restrained in the rear 
seating positions than in the front 
seating position. Failure to follow 
these instructions may increase the 
risk of injury in a collision. 
Air bags can kill or injure a 
child in a child seat. 
NEVER place a rear-facing child 
seat in front of an active air bag. If 
you must use a forward-facing 
child seat in the front seat, move 
the seat all the way back. 
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work? 
The air bag SRS is designed to 
activate when the vehicle sustains 
longitudinal deceleration sufficient 
to cause the sensors to close an 
electrical circuit that initiates air 
bag inflation. 
The fact that the air bags did not 
inflate in a collision does not mean 
that something is wrong with the 
system. Rather, it means the forces 
were not of the type sufficient to 
cause activation. Air bags are designed to inflate in frontal and 
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless 
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration. 
127
Seating and safety restraints 
The air bags inflate and deflate 
rapidly upon activation. After air bag 
deployment, it is normal to notice a 
smoke-like, powdery residue or 
smell the burnt propellant. This may 
consist of cornstarch, talcum 
powder (to lubricate the bag) or 
sodium compounds (e.g., baking 
soda) that result from the 
combustion process that inflates the 
air bag. Small amounts of sodium 
hydroxide may be present which 
may irritate the skin and eyes, but 
none of the residue is toxic. 
While the system is designed to help 
reduce serious injuries, contact with 
a deploying air bag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary 
hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable 
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, 
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who 
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time 
of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be 
properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while 
maintaining vehicle control. 
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not 
touch them after inflation. 
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function 
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not 
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a 
collision. 
The SRS consists of: 
² driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and 
air bags), 
² one or more impact and safing sensors and diagnostic monitor (RCM), 
² a readiness light and tone 
² the electrical wiring which connects the components. 
128
Seating and safety restraints 
The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits 
and the supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the 
impact sensors, the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the 
air bag back up power and the air bag ignitors). 
Determining if the system is operational 
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to 
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section 
in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is 
not required. 
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: 
² The readiness light will either 
flash or stay lit. 
² The readiness light will not 
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on. 
² A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat 
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired. 
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced 
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless 
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a 
collision. 
Side air bag system (if equipped) 
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag 
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front 
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying air bag. Failure 
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in 
the event of a collision. 
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat 
covers may prevent the deployment of the side air bags and 
increase the risk of injury in an accident. 
Do not lean your head on the door. The side air bag could injure 
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback. 
129
Seating and safety restraints 
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag 
supplemental restraint system, its fuses or the seat cover on a 
seat containing an air bag. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. 
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always 
wear their safety belts even when an air bag SRS is provided. 
How does the side air bag system work? 
The side air bag system consists of 
the following: 
² An inflatable nylon bag (air bag) 
with a gas generator concealed 
behind the outboard bolster of 
the driver and front passenger 
seatbacks. 
² A special seat cover designed to 
allow airbag deployment. 
² The same warning light, 
electronic control and diagnostic 
unit as used for the front air 
bags. 
² Two crash sensors located under 
the outboard side of the front 
seats, attached to the floor. 
Side air bags, in combination with seat belts, can help reduce the risk of 
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision. 
The side air bags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the 
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air bag on the side affected 
by the collision will be inflated, even if the respective seat is not 
occupied. The air bag was designed to inflate between the door panel 
and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in 
side impact collisions. 
The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral 
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit 
that initiates air bag inflation. 
130
The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that 
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were 
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side air bags are designed 
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or 
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral 
deceleration. 
Several air bag system 
components get hot after 
inflation. Do not touch them after 
inflation. 
If the side air bag has 
deployed, the air bag will 
not function again. The side 
air bag system (including the 
seat) must be inspected and 
serviced by a qualified 
technician in accordance with 
the vehicle service manual. If 
the air bag is not replaced, the 
unrepaired area will increase the 
risk of injury in a collision. 
Determining if the system is operational 
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to 
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness 
section in the Instrumentation chapter. Routine maintenance of the side 
air bag is not required. 
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: 
² The readiness light (same light as for front air bag system) will either 
flash or stay lit. 
² The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is 
turned on. 
Seating and safety restraints 
131
Seating and safety restraints 
² A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat 
periodically until the problem and light are repaired. 
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced 
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless 
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a 
collision. 
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles 
(including pretensioners) 
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local 
dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by 
qualified personnel. 
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN 
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety 
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system 
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags. 
Important child restraint precautions 
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S. 
and Canada. If small children ride in your vehicle (generally children who 
are four years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less), you 
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check your 
local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the 
safety of children in your vehicle. 
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the 
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from 
injury in a collision. 
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or 
child restraint you might use. 
When possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of 
your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when 
properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating 
position. 
Children and safety belts 
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. 
132
Seating and safety restraints 
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your 
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts. 
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that 
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle. 
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can 
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or 
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child 
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt 
fit. 
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in 
your vehicle. 
To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children who have 
outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning 
booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety standards. Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child 
and provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that encourages safer 
seating posture and better fit of lap and shoulder belts on the child. 
A belt-positioning booster seat should be used if the shoulder belt rests 
in front of the child’s face or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly 
on both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all the 
way back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang over the edge of 
the seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the special needs of your child 
with your pediatrician. 
133
Seating and safety restraints 
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN 
Child and infant or child safety seats 
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the 
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the 
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the 
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or 
collision. 
When installing a child safety seat: 
² Review and follow the information 
presented in the Air Bag 
Supplemental Restraint System 
(SRS) section in this chapter. 
² Use the correct safety belt buckle 
for that seating position (the 
buckle closest to the direction the 
tongue is coming from). 
² Insert the belt tongue into the 
proper buckle until you hear a 
snap and feel it latch. Make sure 
the tongue is securely fastened in 
the buckle. 
² Keep the buckle release button 
pointing up and away from the 
safety seat, with the tongue 
between the child seat and the 
release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. 
² Place seat back in upright position. 
134
Seating and safety restraints 
² Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic 
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating 
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter. 
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether 
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable 
of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether 
straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps. in this 
chapter. 
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included 
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install 
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden 
stop or collision. 
Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt 
seating positions 
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a 
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must 
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the 
way back. 
1. Position the child safety seat in a 
seat with a combination lap and 
shoulder belt. 
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear 
seat whenever possible. 
135
Seating and safety restraints 
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt 
and then grasp the shoulder belt 
and lap belt together. 
3. While holding the shoulder and 
lap belt portions together, route the 
tongue through the child seat 
according to the child seat 
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure 
the belt webbing is not twisted. 
4. Insert the belt tongue into the 
proper buckle (the buckle closest to 
the direction the tongue is coming 
from) for that seating position until 
you hear a snap and feel the latch 
engage. Make sure the tongue is 
latched securely by pulling on it. 
136
Seating and safety restraints 
5. To put the retractor in the 
automatic locking mode, grasp the 
shoulder portion of the belt and pull 
downward until all of the belt is 
extracted and a click is heard. 
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it 
is in the automatic locking mode. 
7. Pull the lap belt portion across 
the child seat toward the buckle and 
pull up on the shoulder belt while 
pushing down with your knee on the 
child seat. 
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to 
remove any slack in the belt. 
9. Before placing the child in the 
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward 
and back to make sure the seat is 
securely held in place. To check 
this, grab the seat at the belt path 
and attempt to move it side to side 
and forward and back. There should 
be no more than one inch of 
movement for proper installation. 
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is 
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt 
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps 
two through nine. 
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. 
137
Seating and safety restraints 
Installing child safety seat in the second row center seating 
position with an automatic locking retractor 
1. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position. 
2. In a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing from the retractor to 
route the tongue through the child seat. 
3. While holding the webbing to prevent it from retracting, route the 
webbing through the child seat according to the child seat 
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 
4. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle for that seating position until 
you hear and feel the buckle engage. Make sure the buckle is latched 
securely by pulling on the webbing. 
5. If you have not pulled out enough webbing to reach, allow the 
webbing to fully retract before attempting to pull it out again and repeat 
steps 2 through 4. 
6. Pull the webbing through the child seat toward the buckle while 
pushing down with your knee on the child seat. 
7. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. It will 
make a clicking noise while doing this. 
8. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward and 
back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. 
9. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each 
use. 
Installing child safety seat in the third row center seating position 
(if equipped) 
1. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position. 
2. Route the tongue end through the child seat according to the child 
seat manufacturers instructions. If the tongue will not reach the buckle, 
lengthen the amount of belt by turning the tongue at a right angle to the 
belt and pulling on it until it reaches the buckle. Be sure the belt 
webbing is not twisted. 
3. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle for that seating position 
(buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you 
hear and feel the buckle engage. To tighten the belt, pull the loose end 
of the belt through the tongue until all the slack is removed from the 
belt. Make sure the buckle is latched securely by pulling on the webbing. 
138
Seating and safety restraints 
4. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward and 
back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. 
5. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each 
use. 
Attaching safety seats with tether straps 
Most forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes 
over the back of the set and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether straps 
are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the 
manufacturer of your child safety seat for information about ordering a 
tether strap. 
Tether anchorage hardware 
All second row and one third row seating position have a fabric strap 
installed near the bottom of the rear face of the seatback. These straps 
have a loop at the top, and are to be used for child seat tether 
anchorages. 
A tethered seat can be installed in the front passenger seat. Put the 
tether strap over the seatback and attach it to an anchor bracket. 
Anchor brackets can be bolted to the rear edge of the front passenger 
seat cushion. The bolt holes are in the bottom of the rear edge of the 
front passenger seat cushion frame. The anchor bracket must be 
installed using the instructions provided with the kit. 
Tether anchorage hardware kits (part number 613D74) including 
instructions, may be obtained at no charge from any Ford or 
Lincoln/Mercury dealer. 
Tighten the anchor according to specifications. Otherwise, the 
safety seat may not be properly secured and the child may be 
injured in a sudden stop or collision. 
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps 
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which 
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether 
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact 
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a 
tether strap. 
139
Seating and safety restraints 
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap 
anchors located behind the seats as described below. 
The tether anchors in your vehicle are straps on the seatback. 
The tether strap anchors in your 
vehicle are in the following positions 
(shown from top view): 
Attach the tether strap only 
to the appropriate tether 
anchor as shown. The tether strap 
may not work properly if attached 
somewhere other than the correct 
tether anchor. 
1. Position the child safety seat on 
the seat cushion. 
2. Route the child safety seat tether 
strap over the back of the seat. 
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. (Shown 
with the seats folded down.) 
140
² You may need to pull the 
Seating and safety restraints 
seatback forward to access the 
tether anchors. Make sure the 
seat is locked in the upright 
position before installing the child 
seat. Refer to the Folding Down 
The Rear Seats section in this 
chapter for information on how to 
operate the rear seats. 
4. Clip the tether strap to the 
anchor as shown. 
If the tether strap is clipped 
incorrectly, the child safety 
seat may not be retained properly 
in the event of a collision. 
5. Refer to the Installing child 
safety seats in combination lap 
and shoulder belt seating 
positions section of this chapter for 
further instructions to secure the 
child safety seat. 
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the 
manufacturer’s instructions. 
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child 
being injured in a collision greatly increases. 
141
STARTING 
Positions of the ignition 
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical 
accessories such as the radio to 
3 
operate while the engine is not 
running. 
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, 
2 
automatic transmission gearshift 
lever and allows key removal. 
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all 
1 
accessories without locking the 
steering wheel. 
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key 
position when driving. 
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine 
starts. 
Preparing to start your vehicle 
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This 
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard 
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio 
noise. 
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator 
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have 
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the 
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. 
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high 
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk 
of fire or other damage. 
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry 
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine 
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 
5 
4 
Driving 
142
Driving 
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed 
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door 
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in 
this chapter for more instructions. 
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer 
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell 
exhaust fumes. 
Important safety precautions 
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute 
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the 
engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have 
the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 
minutes at the higher engine RPM. 
Before starting the vehicle: 
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For 
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the 
Seating and safety restraints chapter. 
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off. 
3. Make sure the gearshift is in P 
(Park). 
143
Driving 
4. Make sure the parking brake is 
set. 
5. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without 
turning the key to 5 (START). 
4 
If there is difficulty in turning the 
3 
key, firmly rotate the steering wheel 
left and right until the key turns 
freely. This condition may occur 
2 
when: 
² front wheels are turned 
1 
² front wheel is against the curb 
² steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle 
5 
L 
L 
H 
00 H 
NAVIGATOR 
DOOR 
AJAR 
THEFT 
20 
40 
60 80 
40 
60 
20 
F MPH km/h 
RPMX1000 
P RNDD 2 
SELECT 
RESET 
4X4 
LOW 
RANGE 
H 
E C 
LOW 
FUEL 
BRAKE 
CK 
SUSP 
SERVICE 
ENGINE 
SOON 
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a 
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced. 
² If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate. 
144
Starting the engine 
Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the 
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. 
1. Turn the key to 5 (START) 
without pressing the accelerator 
pedal and release as soon as the 
engine starts. The key will return to 
4 (ON). 
2. If the temperature is above –12° 
C (10° F) and the engine does not 
start within five seconds on the first 
try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 
seconds and try again. 
3. If the temperature is below -12° C (10° F) and the engine does not 
start in 15 seconds on the first try, turn the key OFF and wait 10 
seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press 
the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and hold. Turn the key to 
START position. 
4. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator 
pedal gradually as the engine speeds up. 
5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake and release the parking 
brake. 
Using the engine block heater (if equipped) 
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves 
starting, warms up the engine faster and allows the heater-defroster 
system to respond quickly. Use of an engine block heater is strongly 
recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -23° C 
(-10° F) or below. 
For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting 
the vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not harm 
the engine, so the heater can be plugged in the night before starting the 
vehicle. 
To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with 
ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) 
adapters. 
3 
2 
1 
5 
4 
Driving 
145
Driving 
Guarding against exhaust fumes 
Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is present in exhaust 
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. 
If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, 
have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle immediately. Do 
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful and 
could kill you. 
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: 
² the vehicle is raised for service 
² the sound of the exhaust system changes 
² the vehicle has been damaged in a collision 
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and 
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to 
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and 
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known 
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. 
Important ventilating information 
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in an open area for 
long periods of time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch). 
Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) to bring in fresh air. 
Improve vehicle ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, 
leaves and other debris. 
BRAKES 
Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled 
maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance. 
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a 
performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal 
operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent 
squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are 
usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning; 
however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be 
146
Driving 
aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture, 
road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or 
“continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings 
may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service 
technician. 
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
On vehicles equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), a noise 
from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be 
observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise 
while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or 
snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s 
anti-lock brake system. The ABS performs a self-check after you start 
the engine and begin to drive away. A brief mechanical noise may be 
heard during this test. This is normal. If a malfunction is found, the ABS 
warning light will come on. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or 
shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be 
inspected by a qualified service technician. 
The ABS operates by detecting the 
onset of wheel lockup during brake 
applications and compensates for 
this tendency. The wheels are 
prevented from locking even when 
the brakes are firmly applied. The 
accompanying illustration depicts 
the advantage of an ABS equipped 
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS 
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking 
traction. 
Using ABS 
² In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four-wheel 
ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheel 
ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain full 
steering control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient 
space, will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a 
controlled stop. 
² The anti-lock system does not decrease the time necessary to apply 
the brakes or always reduce stopping distance. Always leave enough 
room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop. 
147
² We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking 
technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks. 
ABS warning lamp ABS 
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates 
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not 
illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the 
ABS needs to be serviced. 
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock 
brake system is disabled and normal 
BRAKE 
braking is still effective unless the 
! 
brake warning light also remains 
illuminated with parking brake 
released. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle 
serviced immediately.) 
Parking brake with auto-release 
Apply the parking brake whenever 
the vehicle is parked. To set the 
parking brake, press the parking 
brake pedal down until the pedal 
stops. 
Driving 
148
The BRAKE warning lamp in the 
instrument cluster illuminates and 
remains illuminated (when the 
ignition is turned ON) until the 
parking brake is released. 
BRAKE 
! 
Driving 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the 
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle. 
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop 
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the 
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the 
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. 
Your vehicle has an automatic parking brake release. To release the 
parking brake: 
1. Turn the ignition to the ON position. 
2. Press the brake pedal. 
3. Move the gearshift out of the P (Park) position (the parking brake will 
release automatically when you shift into reverse). The brake pedal must 
remain pressed while the gearshift is moved. 
If the parking brake fails to release 
after completing this procedure, use 
the manual parking brake release 
lever. 
Pull the release lever to release the 
HOOD 
brake. Driving with the parking 
brake on will cause the brakes to 
BRAKE 
wear out quickly and reduce fuel 
economy. 
149
Driving 
STEERING 
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy 
from the engine to help steer the vehicle. 
To prevent damage to the power steering pump: 
² Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left 
for more than a few seconds when the engine is running. 
² Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level 
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir). 
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned 
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. 
If the steering wanders or pulls, the condition could be caused by any of 
the following: 
² underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s) 
² uneven vehicle loading 
² high crown in center of road 
² high crosswinds 
² wheels out of alignment 
² loose or worn suspension components 
Speed sensitive steering 
Your vehicle is equipped with speed sensitive, variable assist power 
steering (VAPS). At high speeds, steering assist will increase to improve 
low speed maneuverability. 
If the amount of effort required to steer your vehicle changes while 
driving at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system 
checked by your dealer or a qualified service technician. 
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 
The air suspension system is designed to improve ride, handling and 
general vehicle performance for static, on and off-road driving conditions. 
² The load leveling feature of the air suspension automatically keeps the 
vehicle at a constant level if a load is added or removed from the 
vehicle. 
150
² The height adjustment feature automatically controls the vehicle 
height over a range of approximately 5 cm (2 inches) based on vehicle 
speed, ignition position and selection of two or four-wheel drive 
modes. 
² The air suspension automatically puts the vehicle at its lowest height 
when ignition is OFF to provide easy entry and exit. Whenever a door 
is opened (including the liftgate) the system memorizes and maintains 
the height of the vehicle until all doors are closed or until vehicle 
exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph). 
² The air suspension system raises the vehicle to its normal ride 
position when the ignition is turned on, all doors are closed and the 
transmission is shifted into gear. 
² In 4WD Low the air suspension system will not move to its lowest 
height. In 4WD Low, the air suspension system raises the vehicle 
above the normal ride height at speeds below 40 km/h (25 mph) to 
improve ground clearance. In 4WD Low, do not exceed 56 km/h (35 
mph). 
² When the vehicle is in motion, the air suspension system will adjust 
the vehicle’s height according to ground clearance and speed to 
maximize ride comfort. 
² It is normal to occasionally hear a buzz or clicking from the vehicle’s 
air suspension system when the ignition is turned off. The system 
stays energized for 40 minutes after the ignition is turned off to 
compensate for any load changes made after the vehicle is parked. 
The air suspension shut-off switch is 
located behind an access panel 
underneath the passenger side 
instrument panel. 
On vehicles equipped with 
Air Suspension, turn OFF 
the Air Suspension switch prior to 
jacking, hoisting or towing your 
vehicle. 
Normal vehicle operation does not 
require any action by the driver. 
OFF 
AIR SUSPENSION 
SWITCH 
INTERRUPTEUR DE 
LA SUSPENSION 
PNEUMATIQUE 
Driving 
151
Driving 
Check air suspension indicator light 
The warning and indicator light CK SUSP illuminates when the air 
suspension switch is turned off or an air suspension system fault has 
been detected. 
If the light is illuminated while driving and the air suspension system 
switch is not turned off, safely pull off the road at your earliest 
convenience. Turn the ignition switch from 4 (On) to 3 (Off) and 4 (On) 
again. If the warning light illuminates again, turn the air suspension 
switch off and have the vehicle serviced by a dealer or qualified service 
technician. 
If the vehicle is loaded beyond the recommended maximum payload, the 
CK SUSP light may illuminate. To correct this condition, remove or 
redistribute the payload according to the recommended requirements 
and follow the procedure outlined above. 
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED) 
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when 
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the 
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. 
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a 
Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in 
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving 
and should not be noticeable to the driver. 
To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the 
ground, such as when changing a tire. 
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE 
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than 
other types of vehicles. 
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely 
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. 
Your vehicle has special design and equipment features to make it 
capable of performing in a wide variety of circumstances. These special 
design features, such as larger tires and increased ground clearance, give 
the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. 
152
Driving 
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and 
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a 
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not 
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more 
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under 
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt 
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in 
an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. 
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle 
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as 
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when 
driving a heavily loaded vehicle. 
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most 
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, 
hauling people and cargo may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. 
Use extra caution while becoming familiar with your vehicle. Know the 
capabilities and limitations of both you as a driver and your vehicle. 
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION 
Brake-shift interlock 
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents 
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is 
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed. 
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in 
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed: 
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the 
key. 
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift 
to N (Neutral). 
3. Start the vehicle. 
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever, 
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not 
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside 
emergencies chapter. 
153
Driving 
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps 
are working. 
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by 
shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a 
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. 
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating 
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. 
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage 
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may 
overheat. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is 
latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave 
your vehicle. 
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp 
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. 
See your dealer or a qualified service technician. 
Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission 
Your vehicle’s automatic transmission is equipped with a special shift 
strategy that insures maximum heater performance during cold weather 
operation. 
When ambient temperature is –5° C (23° F) or below and the engine 
coolant temperature is below 38° C (100° F), light throttle upshifts may 
be slightly delayed. Once the engine coolant temperature reaches 71° C 
(160° F) the normal shift strategy will resume. This is normal operation 
and will not affect the function or the durability of the transmission. 
If the normal shift strategy does not resume once the engine 
coolant temperature reaches the normal operating temperature, 
or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function 
normally, see your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon 
as possible. 
Understanding gearshift positions 
To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal, 
then move gearshift lever out of P (Park). 
154
Driving 
Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever 
from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake 
pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. 
P (Park) 
Always come to a complete stop 
before shifting into P (Park). Make 
sure the gearshift lever is securely 
latched in P (Park). This position 
locks the transmission and prevents 
the rear wheels from turning. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift 
lever is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you 
leave your vehicle. 
R (Reverse) 
With the gearshift lever in R 
(Reverse), the vehicle will move 
backward. Always come to a 
complete stop before shifting into 
and out of R (Reverse). 
N (Neutral) 
With the gearshift lever in N 
(Neutral), the vehicle can be started 
and is free to roll. Hold the brake 
pedal down while in this gear. 
(Overdrive) 
The normal driving position for the 
best fuel economy. Transmission 
operates in gears one through four. 
(Overdrive) can be deactivated 
by pressing the transmission control 
switch (TCS) on the end of the 
gearshift lever. 
OVERDRIVE OFF 
155
Driving 
The transmission control indicator 
light (TCIL) (the word OFF) on the 
end of the gearshift lever will 
illuminate. 
Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission 
control switch (TCS) on the end of the gearshift lever with the gearshift 
in the position. The TCIL (the word OFF) will illuminate on the 
gearshift lever. Transmission operates in gears one through three. 
(Drive) provides more engine braking than (Overdrive) and is useful 
when: 
² driving with a heavy load. 
² towing a trailer up or down steep hills. 
² additional engine downhill braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer 
to Driving while you tow in the Trailer towing section. 
OVERDRIVE 
To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control switch 
(TCS). The TCIL (the word OFF) will no longer be illuminated. 
Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically 
return to normal overdrive mode. 
Every time the vehicle is shut off and restarted, you must press the 
transmission control switch to cancel overdrive operation if driving in 
overdrive is not desired. 
2 (Second) 
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on 
slippery roads or to provide 
additional engine braking on 
downgrades. 
1 (First) 
Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum 
engine braking on steep 
downgrades. Upshifts can be made 
by shifting to 2 (Second) or to 
(Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at 
higher speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower gear, and will 
shift to 1 (Low) after vehicle decelerates to the proper speed. 
156
Driving 
Forced Downshifts 
To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when 
passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The 
transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or first 
gear. 
Shift strategy (4R100 automatic transmission) 
To account for customer driving habits and conditions, your 4R100 
automatic transmission electronically controls the shift quality by using 
an adaptive learning strategy. The adaptive learning strategy is 
maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected 
or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive 
strategy. Optimal shifting will resume within a few hundred kilometers 
(miles) of operation. 
If the shift quality does not improve within a few hundred 
kilometers (miles) of operation, or if the downshifts and other 
throttle conditions do not function normally, see your dealer or a 
qualified service technician as soon as possible. 
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 
The reverse sensing system (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of 
obstacles near the rear bumper when the reverse gear is selected. 
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the 
limitations on the reverse sensing system described below. 
Reverse sensing is only an assist for some (generally large and fixed) 
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking speeds” of 
approximately 4.8 km/h (3 mph) or less. The weather may also affect 
the function of RSS. RSS may have reduced performance, or be 
activated in inclement weather. It is the driver’s responsibility for 
ensuring that their path is clear when operating the vehicle. 
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in 
reverse and when using the reverse sensing system. 
157
Driving 
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or 
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to 
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging 
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly 
those close to the ground. 
The RSS will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while the 
vehicle slowly moves in reverse at speeds less than 4.8 km/h (3 mph). 
The RSS is not effective at speeds greater than 4.8 km/h (3 mph) and 
may not detect certain angular or moving objects. 
The reverse sensing system detects 
obstacles within approximately 1.8 
meters (5.9 ft.) of the rear bumper 
with a decreased coverage area at 
the outer corners of the bumper, 
(refer to the figures for approximate 
zone coverage areas). As you move 
closer to the obstacle, the rate of 
the tone increases. When the 
distance to the obstacle is less than 
25.0 cm (10 in.), the tone will sound 
continuously. If the system detects a 
stationary or receding object further 
than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the side 
of the vehicle, the tone will sound 
for only three seconds. Once the 
system detects an object 
approaching, the tone will sound 
again. 
158
Driving 
The reverse sensing system is 
automatically enabled when the gear 
OFF 
selector is placed in R (Reverse) 
and the ignition is ON. A reverse 
sensing control allows the driver to 
disable the reverse sensing system only when the ignition is ON, and the 
gear selector is in R (Reverse). 
The OFF indicator remains illuminated when the system is disabled. The 
system defaults to ON every time the reverse gear is selected. Press the 
control to disable or enable the system. 
The indicator will remain illuminated to indicate a failure of the reverse 
sensing system. 
Always keep the sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free 
from dirt, snow and ice (do not clean the sensors with sharp 
objects). These elements may cause the system to operate 
inaccurately. 
If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving 
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing 
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. 
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) 
For important information regarding safe operation of this type 
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter. 
When Four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four 
wheels through a transfer case. 4WD power can be selected when 
additional driving power is desired. 
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and the 
instrument panel control is moved to 4WD Low while the vehicle 
is moving, the system will not engage and no damage will occur to 
the 4WD system. Before 4WD Low can be engaged, the vehicle 
must be at a complete stop with the brake pedal depressed and 
the transmission in N (Neutral). 
4H or 4L operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing 
so could result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, 
damage to the transfer case, increased tire wear, decreased fuel 
economy and difficulty turning. 
159
Driving 
Control-Trac automatic four-wheel drive system (if equipped) 
Your 4x4 features the heavy-duty Control-Trac system which includes a 
computer-operated transfer case. This unique system is interactive with 
the road, continually monitoring and adjusting torque delivery to the 
front and rear wheels to optimize vehicle control. 
Positions of the Control-Trac system 
The Control-Trac A4WD system 
functions in three modes: 
² A4WD position delivers power to 
the rear axle. If the rear wheels 
lose traction, power will be 
automatically delivered to the 
front axle to maintain traction 
throughout the slippery condition. 
² 4H position provides 
mechanically locked four-wheel 
drive power delivery to front and rear axles. 
4H 
A4WD 4L 
² 4L position provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive when above 
average power at reduced speeds is required. 
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for 
cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than 
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under 
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in these 
vehicles. 
160
Using the Control-Trac system 
Shifting from A4WD to 4H 
Move the 4WD control from A4WD 
to 4H at any forward speed up to 88 
km/h (55 mph). 
At temperatures below 0°C (32°F), 
shifts from A4WD to 4H should not 
be performed above 72 km/h (45 
mph). 
Shifting from 4H to 4L (and 4L to 4H) 
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop. 
2. Depress the brake. 
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral). 
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4H 
(or 4L) position. 
Shifting to A4WD 
Move the 4WD control back to 
A4WD at a stop or at speeds up to 
88 km/h (55 mph). 
4H 
Driving 
A4WD 4L 
4H 
A4WD 4L 
4H 
A4WD 4L 
161
Driving 
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles 
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and 
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat 
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. 
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles 
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your 
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without 
getting hung up or damaging underbody components. 
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle 
differently than an ordinary passenger car. 
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. 
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel 
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not 
grip the spokes. 
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as 
rocks and stumps. 
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before 
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain 
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four 
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. 
Basic operating principles 
² Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads (except models equipped 
with Auto 4WD). This may damage the drivelines and axles. 
² Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering 
characteristics of your vehicle. 
² Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by 
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice. 
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement 
² If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but 
avoid severe brake application, Ease the vehicle back onto the 
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering 
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface. 
² It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow 
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may loose 
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too 
sharply or abruptly. 
162
Driving 
² It often may be less risky to strike small inanimate objects, such as 
highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than 
attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the 
vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your 
safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. 
If your vehicle gets stuck 
If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and 
reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly 
on the accelerator in each gear. 
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage 
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may 
overheat. 
Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may 
fail and injure a passenger or bystander. 
Emergency maneuvers 
² In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn 
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e., 
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid 
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, 
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or 
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are 
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking. Use all 
available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of 
travel. 
² In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not 
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. 
² If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from 
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle 
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or barking). Again, 
avoid these abrupt inputs. 
Parking 
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) 
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of 
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic 
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not 
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in N (Neutral) 
163
Driving 
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition 
when leaving the vehicle. 
4WD Systems (if equipped) 
4WD (when you select the 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power 
itself. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road 
conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle can’t. 
Power is supplied to all four wheels 
through a transfer case. On 4WD 
vehicles, the transfer case allows 
you to select 4WD when necessary. 
Information on transfer case 
operation and shifting procedures 
can be found in the Driving 
chapter. Information on transfer 
case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and specifications 
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information 
before you operate your vehicle. 
Normal characteristics 
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while 
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting 
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the 
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern. 
Sand 
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid 
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower 
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly 
and avoid spinning the wheels. 
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make 
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible. 
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you 
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may 
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back 
out the way you came if you proceed with caution. 
164
Mud and water 
If you must drive through high 
water, drive slowly. Traction or 
brake capability may be limited. 
When driving through water, 
determine the depth; avoid water 
higher than the bottom of the hubs 
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If 
the ignition system gets wet, the 
vehicle may stall. 
Driving 
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the 
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving 
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. 
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you 
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As 
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid 
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of 
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. 
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water, 
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. 
Water intrusion into the transmission may damage the 
transmission. 
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should 
be replaced. 
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts 
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an 
imbalance that could damage drive components. 
“Tread Lightly” is an educational 
program designed to increase public 
awareness of land-use regulations 
and responsibilities in our nations 
wilderness areas. Ford joins the U.S. 
Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you 
to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by 
“treading lightly.” 
165
Driving 
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain 
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up 
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up 
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep 
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and 
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand 
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without 
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse 
over a hill without the aid of an observer. 
When climbing a steep slope or hill, 
start in a lower gear rather than 
downshifting to a lower gear from a 
higher gear once the ascent has 
started. This reduces strain on the 
engine and the possibility of stalling. 
If you do stall out, do not try to 
turn around because you might roll 
over. It is better to back down to a 
safe location. 
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much 
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of 
vehicle control. 
Descend a hill in the same gear you 
would use to climb up the hill to 
avoid excessive brake application 
and brake overheating. Do not 
descend in neutral, disengage 
overdrive or manually shift to a 
lower gear. When descending a 
steep hill, avoid sudden hard 
braking as you could lose control. 
When you brake hard, the front 
wheels can’t turn and if they aren’t 
turning, you won’t be able to steer. 
The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Rapid 
pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still 
maintain steering control. 
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not 
“pump” the brakes. 
166
Driving 
Driving on snow and ice 
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but 
can skid like any other vehicle. 
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the 
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. 
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on 
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting 
from a full stop. 
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate 
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any 
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do 
not become overconfident as to road conditions. 
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles 
for stopping as well as drive slower than usual and consider using one of 
the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the 
wheels. Use a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a 
steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue 
to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you 
lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze 
technique. If your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock 
Brake System (ABS), apply the brake steadily. Do not “pump” the 
brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional 
information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system. 
Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also 
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and 
swing around during braking. 
Tires, Replacement Requirements 
4WD vehicles are equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride 
and handling capability. 
Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel other than that originally 
provided by Ford because it can affect the safety and performance of 
your vehicle, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or roll over and 
serious injury. Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the 
same size, type, tread design, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you 
have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford or 
Lincoln/Mercury dealer. 
167
Driving 
If you nevertheless decide to equip your 4WD for off-road use with tires 
larger than what Ford recommends, you should not use these tires for 
highway driving. 
If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford, it may 
adversely affect vehicle handling and could cause steering, suspension, 
axle or transfer case failure. 
Do not use”aftermarket lift kits” or other suspension modifications, 
whether or not they are used with larger tires and wheels. 
These “aftermarket lift kits” could adversely affect the vehicle’s handling 
characteristics, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or roll over 
and serious injury. 
Tires can be damaged during off-road use. For your safety, tires that are 
damaged should not be used for highway driving because they are more 
likely to blow out or fail. 
You should carefully observe the recommended tire inflation pressure 
found on the safety compliance certification label attached to the left 
front door lock facing or door latch post pillar. Failure to follow tire 
pressure recommendations can adversely affect the way your vehicle 
handles. Do not exceed the Ford recommended pressure even if it is less 
than the maximum pressure allowed for the tire. 
Each day before you drive, check 
your tires. If one looks lower than 
the others, use a tire gauge to check 
pressure of all tires, and adjust if 
required. Check tire pressure with a 
tire gauge every few weeks 
(including spare). Safe operation 
requires tires that are neither 
underinflated nor overloaded. 
Periodically inspect the tire treads and remove stones, nails, glass or 
other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes 
or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary 
repairs. 
Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If internal 
damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected 
in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. 
168
Driving 
Maintenance and Modifications 
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed 
and tested to provide both reasonably safe, predictable performance 
whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this 
reason, Ford strongly recommends that you do not make modifications 
such as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or 
by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory 
equipment. 
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make 
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control. 
Ford recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a 
high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box cover). 
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase 
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities 
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of 
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to 
heavy off-road usage. 
DRIVING THROUGH WATER 
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is 
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition 
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your 
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine. 
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very 
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the 
hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). 
Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop 
the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by 
moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake 
pedal. 
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is 
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause 
internal transmission damage. 
169
Driving 
VEHICLE LOADING 
Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms: 
² Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard 
equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or 
aftermarket equipment. 
² Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants 
and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight 
rating minus base curb weight. 
² GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload 
weight. The GVW is not a limit or a specification. 
² GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum permissable total 
weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo. 
The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety 
Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. 
² GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle 
system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the 
Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. 
² GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the 
towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer. 
² GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum permissable 
combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) 
and the loaded trailer 
² Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the 
vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is 
determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each engine/ 
transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer towing 
and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. 
² Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded 
vehicle (including occupants and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is 
determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing 
vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. 
² Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range that the trailer must 
fall within that ranges from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. 
Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when 
figuring the total weight. 
170
Driving 
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the 
certification label. 
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the 
originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR 
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do 
not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. 
The Safety Certification Label, found on the driver’s door pillar, lists 
several important vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any 
additional equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are adding weight 
to the front of your vehicle, (potentially including weight added to the 
cab), the weight added should not exceed the front axle reserve capacity 
(FARC). Additional frontal weight may be added to the front axle reserve 
capacity provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e. restrict the 
number of occupants or amount of cargo carried). 
Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment being 
carried is within the weight limitations that have been established for 
your vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and front and rear gross 
axle weight rating limits. Under no circumstance should these limitations 
be exceeded. 
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in 
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury. 
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and 
utility-type vehicles 
For important information regarding safe operation of this type 
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in 
this chapter. 
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle 
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as 
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when 
driving a heavily loaded vehicle. 
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most 
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, 
hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. 
171
Driving 
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow 
1. Use the appropriate maximum gross combined weight rating (GCWR) 
chart to find the maximum GCWR for your type engine and rear axle 
ratio. 
2. Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle without 
cargo. To obtain correct weights, try taking your vehicle to a shipping 
company or an inspection station for trucks. 
3. Subtract your loaded vehicle weight from the maximum GCWR on the 
following charts. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow 
and must fall below the maximum shown under maximum trailer weight 
on the chart. 
TRAILER TOWING 
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, 
transmission, axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to 
maximize vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment 
while towing. 
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing: 
² Stay within your vehicle’s load limits. 
² Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to 
tow in this chapter. 
² Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving 
while you tow in this chapter. 
² Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the 
severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide. 
² Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 800 km 
(500 miles). 
² Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the 
proper installation and adjustment specifications. 
Your vehicle is pre-wired for trailer towing. An electrical connector is 
provided under the instrument panel for installing a customer-supplied 
electric brake controller. Another electrical connector is provided at the 
hitch. This connector provides power to the trailer for taillamps, stop 
and turn lamps, back up lamps, battery charge, electric brakes (when a 
customer provided controller is installed) and ground. The kit included 
with your vehicle provides you with adaptors to attach the brake 
controller and convert the hitch connector for Class I trailer usage. 
172
Driving 
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer weights 
Engine 
Rear 
axle 
ratio 
Maximum 
GCWR - kg 
(lbs.) 
Trailer weight range 
(0-maximum) - kg 
(lbs.) 
4x2 with 17 inch wheels 
5.4L-4V 3.73 
6 577 
(14 500) 
0-4 037 
(0-8 900) 
4x4 with 17 inch wheels 
5.4L-4V 3.73 
6 350 
(14 000) 
0-3 674 
(0-8 100) 
Maximum frontal area of trailer is 5.6 square meters (60 square feet) 
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance 
Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer 
to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue 
load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight. 
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer 
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in 
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of control 
and personal injury. 
Preparing to tow 
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer, and make sure it is 
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer 
dealer if you require assistance. 
Hitches 
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the 
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the 
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue. 
Load equalizing hitch 
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the 
following procedure: 
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and 
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it 
can level. 
173
Driving 
2. Turn the air suspension (if equipped) control to OFF. 
3. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers 
at the center of the vehicle. 
4. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that 
the front bumper height is within 0–13 mm (0.5 in) of the reference 
point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher 
than in Step 3. 
5. Turn the air suspension (if equipped) control to ON. 
Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle 
is lower or higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function 
of the load equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling. 
Safety chains 
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers 
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the 
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners. 
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency 
gives to you. 
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. 
Trailer brakes 
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe 
if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The 
trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations. 
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your 
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough 
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. 
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the 
GVWR not GCWR. 
Trailer lamps 
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your 
trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or 
trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking 
up trailer lamps. 
174
Driving 
Driving while you tow 
When towing a trailer: 
² Ensure that you turn off your speed control. The speed control may 
shut off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. 
² Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer. 
² Use a lower gear when towing up or down steep hills. This will 
eliminate excessive downshifting and upshifting for optimum fuel 
economy and transmission cooling. 
² Anticipate stops and brake gradually. 
Exceeding the GCWR rating may cause internal transmission 
damage and void your warranty coverage. 
Servicing after towing 
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more 
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for 
more information. 
Trailer towing tips 
² Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to 
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make 
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles. 
² Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. 
² If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do 
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become 
less effective. 
² The trailer tongue weight should be 10% of the loaded trailer weight. 
² After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your 
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts. 
² When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, place 
the gearshift in P (Park) and increase idle speed. This aids engine 
cooling and air conditioner efficiency. 
² Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must 
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels. 
175
Driving 
Launching or retrieving a boat 
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval: 
² do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of 
the rear bumper and 
² do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the 
bottom edge of the rear bumper. 
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle 
components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions, reliability and 
causing internal transmission damage. 
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in 
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed 
unless a leak is suspected or repair required. 
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the 
water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed 
from the water. 
RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND) 
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a 
motorhome. Follow these guidelines if you have the need for recreational 
towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. These guidelines 
are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged. 
2WD vehicles (with automatic transmissions) 
² Place the transmission in N (Neutral) 
² Maximum speed is 56 km (35 mph) 
² Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles) 
If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km (35 mph) must be 
exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed before the vehicle is 
towed. 
Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified 
technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation. 
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause 
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal 
transmission components. 
4WD vehicles electronic shift transfer case (with automatic 
transmissions) 
4x4 vehicles with electronic shift on the fly cannot be towed with any 
wheels on the ground. 
176
Roadside emergencies 
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE 
To fully assist if you should have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company 
offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is 
separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: 
² 24–hours, seven days a week 
² for the Basic warranty period (Canada) or New Vehicle Limited 
Warranty period (U.S.) of three years or 60 000 km (36 000 miles), 
whichever comes first on Ford and Mercury vehicles, and four years or 
80 000 km (50 000 miles) on Lincoln vehicles 
Roadside assistance will cover: 
² changing a flat tire 
² jump-starts 
² lock-out assistance 
² limited fuel delivery* 
² towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company 
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 25 kms (15.5 miles) of the 
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement). 
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the 
mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound 
towing or repossession). 
* Canadian customers refer to your Roadside Assistance supplement 
for exact fuel amounts. 
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE 
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your 
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the 
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is 
mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is 
found in the Roadside Assistance book in the glove compartment. 
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance, 
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. 
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 
1–800–665–2006. 
177
Roadside emergencies 
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor 
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement 
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call 
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. 
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call 
1–800–665–2006. 
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY 
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance 
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting 
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. 
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you 
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside 
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact 
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca. 
HAZARD FLASHER 
Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown, 
approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the 
ignition is off. 
² The hazard lights control is 
located on top of the steering 
column. 
² Depress hazard lights control to 
activate all hazard flashers 
simultaneously. 
² Depress control again to turn the 
flashers off. 
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH FUEL 
RESET 
The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric 
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. 
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump 
shut-off switch may have been activated. 
178
The fuel pump shut-off switch is 
located in the passenger’s foot well, 
by the kick panel. 
Roadside emergencies 
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch. 
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 
2. Check the fuel system for leaks. 
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by 
pushing in on the reset button. 
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and 
return the key to the OFF position. 
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system. 
179
Roadside emergencies 
FUSES AND RELAYS 
Fuses 
If electrical components in the 
vehicle are not working, a fuse may 
have blown. Blown fuses are 
identified by a broken wire within 
the fuse. Check the appropriate 
fuses before replacing any electrical 
components. 
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage 
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire 
damage and could start a fire. 
Standard fuse amperage rating and color 
COLOR 
Fuse 
rating 
Mini 
fuses 
Standard 
fuses 
Maxi 
fuses 
15 
Cartridge 
maxi 
fuses 
Fuse link 
cartridge 
2A Grey Grey — — — 
3A Violet Violet — — — 
4A Pink Pink — — — 
5A Tan Tan — — — 
7.5A Brown Brown — — — 
10A Red Red — — — 
15A Blue Blue — — — 
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue 
25A Natural Natural — — — 
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 
40A — — Orange Green Green 
50A — — Red Red Red 
60A — — Blue — Yellow 
70A — — Tan — Brown 
80A — — Natural — Black 
180
Passenger compartment fuse panel 
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by 
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. 
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel 
cover. 
The fuses are coded as follows. 
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Passenger Compartment Fuse 
Panel Description 
1 25A Audio 
2 5A Clock, Overhead Trip Computer, 
Electronic Automatic 
Temperature Control (EATC), 
Powertrain Control Module 
(PCM), Cluster, Navigation 
3 20A Cigar Lighter, OBD-II Scan Tool 
Connector 
FUSE1 12 22 
2 13 23 
6 17 27 
7 18 28 
8 19 29 
9 30 
20 
11 21 31 
10 
RELAY 
5 
RELAY 
4 
3 14 24 
4 15 25 
RELAY 
5 16 26 
3 
RELAY 
2 
RELAY 
1 
Roadside emergencies 
181
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Passenger Compartment Fuse 
Panel Description 
4 7.5A Remote Entry Module, Mirrors, 
Memory Module, Adjustable 
Pedals, Drivers Seat, Power Fold 
Mirrors 
5 15A Speed Control Module, Reverse 
Lamp, Daytime Running Lamp 
Relay, Reverse Sensing System, 
Autolock, E/C Mirror, Navigation 
6 5A Cluster, Overhead Trip Computer, 
Compass, Steering Sensor, Brake 
Shift Interlock Solenoid, Air 
Suspension Module, GEM Module, 
Heated Mirror, Rear Defroster, 
Reverse Sensing System, 
Automatic Park Brake Release 
7 5A Aux A/C Blower Relay, Console 
Blower 
8 5A Remote Entry Module, Cell 
Phone, Clock, GEM Module, 
Navigation 
9 — Not Used 
10 — Not Used 
11 30A Front Washer Pump Relay, Wiper 
Run/Park Relay, Wiper Hi/LO 
Relay, Windshield Wiper Motor, 
Rear Washer Pump Relay 
12 15A Air Suspension Switch 
13 20A Stop Lamp Switch (Lamps), 
Turn/Hazard Flasher, Speed 
Control Module 
Roadside emergencies 
182
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Roadside emergencies 
Passenger Compartment Fuse 
Panel Description 
14 15A Rear Wipers, Running Board 
Lamps, Battery Saver Relay, 
Interior Lamp Relay, Accessory 
Delay Relay (Power Windows, 
Moonroof, Flip Windows, Audio), 
Homelink 
15 5A Stop Lamp Switch, (Speed 
Control, Brake Shift Interlock, 
ABS, PCM Module Inputs), GEM 
Module, Autolock, Air Suspension 
Module 
16 20A Headlamps (Hi Beams), Cluster 
(Hi Beam Indicator) 
17 10A Heated Mirrors/Rear Window 
Defroster Indicator 
18 5A Instrument Illumination (Dimmer 
Switch Power), Clock (Dimmer), 
Navigation Screen 
19 — Not Used 
20 5A Audio, Air Suspension Module, 
Memory Module, GEM Module 
21 15A Starter Relay, Fuse 20, Digital 
Transmission Range Selector 
22 10A Air Bag Module, Intelligent 
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation 
Module 
23 10A Electrochromic Mirror, Aux A/C, 
Heated Seats, Trailer Tow Battery 
Charge, Turn/Hazard Flasher, 
Console Blower Door Actuator, 
4x4 Clutch Relay, 4 Wheel 
Anti-Lock Brake System (4WABS) 
Module 
183
Roadside emergencies 
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Passenger Compartment Fuse 
Panel Description 
24 10A EATC Module, EATC 
Blower/Flasher Relay, Climate 
Control Selector Switch , Feeds 
fuse 7 
25 — Not Used 
26 10A Right Side Low Beam Headlamp 
27 5A Foglamp Relay and Foglamp 
Indicator 
28 10A Left Side Low Beam Headlamp 
29 5A Autolamp Module, Transmission 
Overdrive Control Switch 
30 30A Passive Anti Theft Transceiver, 
Cluster, Ignition Coils, Powertrain 
Control Module Relay 
31 10A Rear Integrated Control Panel 
(Audio), CD Player, Cell Phone 
Relay 1 — Interior Lamp Relay 
Relay 2 — Battery Saver Relay 
Relay 3 — Rear Window Defroster Relay 
Relay 4 — One Touch Down Window Relay 
Relay 5 — ACC Delay Relay 
Power distribution box 
The power distribution box is 
located in the engine compartment. 
The power distribution box contains 
high-current fuses that protect your 
vehicle’s main electrical systems 
from overloads. 
184
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current 
fuses. 
refilling fluid reservoirs. 
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to 
the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or 
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the 
Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter. 
The high-current fuses are coded as follows: 
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Power Distribution Box 
Description 
1 20A * Power Point 
2 30A* Powertrain Control Module 
3 30A* Headlamps/Autolamps 
4 20A* Console Powerpoint 
5 20A* Trailer Tow Backup/Park Lamps 
6 15A* Parklamps/Autolamps, Feeds 
Passenger Compartment Fuse 18 
7 20A* Horn 
MAXI 
FUSE 
115 
FUSE 24 
FULL 
RELAY 303 
HALF 
RELAY 208 
MAXI 
FUSE 
116 
MAXI 
FUSE 
117 
MAXI 
FUSE 
118 
MAXI 
FUSE 
111 
MAXI 
FUSE 
112 
MAXI 
FUSE 
113 
MAXI 
FUSE 
114 
MAXI 
FUSE 
107 
MAXI 
FUSE 
108 
MAXI 
FUSE 
109 
MAXI 
FUSE 
110 
MAXI 
FUSE 
103 
MAXI 
FUSE 
104 
MAXI 
FUSE 
105 
MAXI 
FUSE 
106 
MAXI 
FUSE 
101 
MAXI 
FUSE 
102 
CB601 CB602 
FUSE 21 FUSE 22 
FUSE 19 FUSE 20 
FUSE 17 FUSE 18 
FUSE 23 
FULL 
RELAY 302 
R 401 D 501 
FUSE 15 FUSE 16 
FUSE 13 FUSE 14 
FUSE 11 FUSE 12 
FUSE 9 FUSE 10 
FUSE 7 FUSE 8 
FUSE 5 FUSE 6 
FUSE 3 FUSE 4 
FUSE 1 FUSE 2 
D 503 
D 502 
FULL 
RELAY 301 HALF 
RELAY 
207 
FULL 
RELAY 304 
HALF 
RELAY 
201 
HALF 
RELAY 
202 
HALF 
RELAY 209 
HALF 
RELAY 205 
HALF 
RELAY 206 
HALF 
RELAY 
203 
HALF 
RELAY 
204 
Roadside emergencies 
185
Roadside emergencies 
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Power Distribution Box 
Description 
8 30A* Power Door Locks 
9 15A* Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), 
Fog Lamps 
10 20A* Fuel Pump 
11 20A* Alternator Field 
12 10A* Rear Wipers 
13 15A* A/C Clutch 
14 — Not Used 
15 10A* Running Board Lamps 
16 — Not Used 
17 10A* Delayed Accessory (Audio, Flip 
Windows) 
18 15A* Powertrain Control Module, Fuel 
Injectors, Fuel Pump, Mass Air 
Flow Sensor 
19 10A* Trailer Tow Stop and Right Turn 
Lamp 
20 10A* Trailer Tow Stop and Left Turn 
Lamp 
21 — Not Used 
22 — Not Used 
23 15A* HEGO Sensors, Canister Vent, 
Transmission, CMS Sensor 
24 — Not Used 
101 30A** Trailer Tow Battery Charge 
102 50A** Four Wheel Antilock Brake 
Module 
103 50A** Junction Box Battery Feed 
104 30A** 4x4 Shift Motor  Clutch 
105 40A** Climate Control Front Blower 
106 — Not Used 
186
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Roadside emergencies 
Power Distribution Box 
Description 
107 30A** Passenger Power Seat, Passenger 
Seat Lumbar 
108 30A** Trailer Tow Electric Brake 
109 50A** Air Suspension Compressor 
110 30A** Heated Seats/CCS 
111 40A** Ignition Switch Battery Feed (Run 
and Start Circuits) 
112 30A** Memory (Drivers Seat, Adjustable 
Pedals, Mirrors), Drivers Seat 
Lumbar 
113 40A** Ignition Switch Battery Feed (Run 
and Accessory Circuits) 
114 30A** Climate Control Auxilary Blower 
115 — Not Used 
116 40A** Rear Window Defroster, Heated 
Mirrors 
117 — Not Used 
118 — Not Used 
201 — Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay 
202 — Front Wiper Run/Park Relay 
203 — Trailer Tow Backup Lamp Relay 
204 — A/C Clutch Relay 
205 — Rear Wiper Down 
206 — Fog Lamp Relay 
207 — Front Washer Pump Relay 
208 — Rear Washer Pump Relay 
209 — Rear Wiper Up Relay 
301 — Fuel Pump Relay 
302 — Trailer Tow Battery Charge Relay 
303 — Front Wiper Hi/Lo Relay 
304 — Powertrain Control Module Relay 
401 — Not Used 
187
Roadside emergencies 
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Power Distribution Box 
Description 
501 — Powertrain Control Module Diode 
502 — A/C Clutch Diode 
503 — Automatic Park Brake Release 
Diode 
601 30A Delayed Accessory (Power 
Windows, Flip Windows, Radio, 
Moonroof) 
602 — Not Used 
*Mini fuses **Maxi fuses 
Relays 
Relays are located in the power distribution box and should be replaced 
by qualified technicians. 
CHANGING THE TIRES 
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. 
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly 
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. 
Spare tire information 
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire that may be used as a spare or 
a regular tire. The spare is identical to the other tires on your vehicle, 
although the wheel trim may not match. 
Location of the spare tire and tools 
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following 
locations: 
Item Location 
Spare tire Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear 
bumper 
Jack, wheel nut wrench, 
instructions 
Behind the access panel located on the 
right rear quarter panel interior trim 
Jack handle On top of the radiator support at the front 
of the engine compartment 
188
Roadside emergencies 
Removing the jack handle 
1. Open the hood. 
2. Unsnap the end of the handle that is retained by the clip on the top of 
the windshield washer bottle. 
3. Unsnap the shaft of the handle from the two retaining clips attached 
to the top of the radiator shroud. 
Removing the jack and tools 
1. Locate the access panel on the right rear quarter panel interior trim. 
Lift the two panel retaining clips and remove the panel. 
2. Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench and instructions from their retaining 
bracket. 
3. Remove the jack by turning the thumbwheel counterclockwise to 
relieve tension against the stowage bracket. 
4. If equipped with a two piece lug wrench, assemble the lug wrench as 
shown in the illustration. 
² To assemble, screw the parts 
together. To disassemble, 
unscrew. 
Removing the spare tire 
1. Open the liftgate. 
2. Insert the straight end of the jack 
handle into the rear access hole 
located just above the rear bumper. 
Forward motion will stop and 
resistance to turning will be felt 
when properly engaged. 
3. Turn the handle counterclockwise 
until tire is lowered to the ground 
and the cable is slightly slack. 
4. Remove the retainer from the spare tire. 
189
Roadside emergencies 
Stowing the spare tire 
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the outboard side facing up. 
2. Install the retainer through the 
wheel center and slide the wheel 
under the vehicle. 
3. Turn the spare handle clockwise 
until the tire is raised to its original 
position underneath the vehicle. The 
spare handle ratchets when the tire 
is raised to the stowed position. It 
will not allow you to overtighten. 
Tire change procedure 
To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be 
sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the 
wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to 
the tire being changed. 
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be 
seriously injured. 
On vehicles equipped with Air Suspension, turn OFF the Air 
Suspension switch prior to jacking, hoisting or towing your 
vehicle. 
Refer to the instruction sheet (located behind the interior trim access 
panel with the jack) for detailed tire change instructions. 
190
1. Park on a level surface, activate 
hazard flashers and set the parking 
brake. 
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park) 
and turn engine OFF. 
3. Block the diagonally opposite 
wheel. 
4. Obtain the spare tire and jack 
from their storage locations. 
5. Use the tip of the lug wrench to 
remove any wheel trim. 
6. Loosen each wheel lug nut 
one-half turn counterclockwise but 
do not remove them until the wheel 
is raised off the ground. 
Roadside emergencies 
191
7. Turn OFF the air suspension 
switch. 
8. Position the jack according to the 
following guides and turn the jack 
handle clockwise until the wheel is 
completely off the ground. 
When one of the rear 
wheels is off the ground, 
the transmission alone will not 
prevent the vehicle from moving 
or slipping off the jack, even if the 
transmission is in P (Park). To 
prevent the vehicle from moving 
when you change the tire, be sure 
that the parking brake is set and 
the diagonally opposite wheel is 
blocked. If the vehicle slips off the 
jack, someone could be seriously 
injured. 
² Front (4x2) 
OFF 
AIR SUSPENSION 
SWITCH 
INTERRUPTEUR DE 
LA SUSPENSION 
PNEUMATIQUE 
Roadside emergencies 
192
² Front (4x4) 
² Rear 
To lessen the risk of 
personal injury, do not put 
any part of your body under the 
vehicle while changing a tire. Do 
not start the engine when your 
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is 
only meant for changing the tire. 
Roadside emergencies 
² Never use the front or rear 
differential as a jacking point. 
9. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. 
10. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem 
is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against 
the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been 
lowered. 
193
Roadside emergencies 
11. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 
12. Remove the jack and fully 
1 
tighten the lug nuts in the order 
shown. 
13. Stow the flat tire. Refer to 
Stowing the spare tire. 
14. Stow the jack and lug wrench. 
Make sure the jack is fastened so it 
does not rattle when you drive. 
15. Unblock the wheels. 
16. Turn on the air suspension switch. 
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 
3 4 
5 2 
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, 
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or 
vehicle damage. 
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes, and 
clothing, if contacted. 
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic 
transmissions do not have push-start capability; also, the 
catalytic conveter may become damaged. 
Preparing your vehicle 
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the 
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the 
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and 
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the 
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its 
optimum shift feel. 
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle. 
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could 
damage the vehicle’s electrical system. 
194
Roadside emergencies 
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle 
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on 
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving 
parts. 
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before 
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level. 
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical 
surges. Turn all other accessories off. 
Connecting the jumper cables 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of 
the discharged battery. 
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the 
assisting (boosting) battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) 
terminal of the assisting battery. 
195
+ 
– 
Roadside emergencies 
+ 
– 
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the 
assisting battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed 
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the 
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker 
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. 
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) 
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an 
explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of 
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts. 
196
Roadside emergencies 
Jump starting 
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at 
moderately increased speed. 
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an 
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. 
Removing the jumper cables 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were 
connected. 
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface. 
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the 
assisting (boosting) battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the 
booster vehicle’s battery. 
197
+ 
– 
Roadside emergencies 
+ 
– 
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster 
vehicle’s battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the 
disabled vehicle’s battery. 
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables 
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can 
relearn its idle conditions. 
198
WRECKER TOWING 
Roadside emergencies 
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing 
service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center. 
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed 
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not 
approved a slingbelt towing procedure. 
If equipped with air suspension, the air suspension control must be 
turned to the OFF position. 
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels 
on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground. 
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a 
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the 
ground. 
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle 
damage may occur. 
Ford Motor Company provides a towing manual for all authorized tow 
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for 
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 
199
Customer assistance 
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED 
At home 
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to 
service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the Ford dealer 
where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are needed. 
However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor 
Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs. 
Certain warranty repairs require special training though, so not all 
dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. That means that 
depending on the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to be 
taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership can not assist you, 
then contact the Customer Relationship Center. 
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you 
are receiving, follow these steps: 
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your 
selling/servicing dealership. 
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales 
Manager or Service Manager at the dealership. 
3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level, 
please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. 
Away from home 
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when 
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership 
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the 
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to 
help you. In the United States: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Relationship Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) 
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 
200
Customer assistance 
In Canada: 
Customer Relationship Centre 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited 
P.O. Box 2000 
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) 
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle 
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could 
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford 
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help 
you. 
In the United States: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Relationship Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
1-800-521-4140 
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 
In Canada: 
Customer Relationship Centre 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited 
P.O. Box 2000 
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) 
In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please 
have the following information available when contacting a Customer 
Relationship Center: 
² Your telephone number (home and business). 
² The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located. 
² The year and make of your vehicle. 
² The date of vehicle purchase. 
² The current odometer reading. 
² The vehicle identification number (VIN). 
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish 
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.). 
201
Customer assistance 
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing 
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also 
allowed a final repair attempt in some states. 
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the 
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss 
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing 
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This 
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state 
created rights or other rights which are independent of the 
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. 
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN 
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by 
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP 
is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company 
or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in 
Canada). It provides the following: 
² Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you 
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain 
maintenance and wear items). 
² Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper 
Warranty expires. 
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln 
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in 
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored 
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement 
benefits for towing and rental coverage. 
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection 
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of 
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of 
Canada dealers. 
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the 
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Please contact 
your dealer for further information. Since this information is subject to 
change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended 
Service Plan coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at 
www.ford-esp.com. 
202
Customer assistance 
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY) 
The Dispute Settlement Board is: 
² an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes 
² available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company 
vehicles 
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford 
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify 
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without 
incurring obligations per applicable state law. 
What kinds of cases does the Board review? 
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as 
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light 
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle 
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving: 
² a non-Ford product 
² a non-Ford dealership 
² sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated 
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as 
designed 
² a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a 
service or product concern is being reviewed 
² items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including 
maintenance and wear items) 
² alleged personal injury/property damage claims 
² cases currently in litigation 
² vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes 
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to 
review commercial vehicles) 
² vehicles with non-U.S. warranties 
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility 
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle. 
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique 
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin 
purchasers/lessees. 
203
Customer assistance 
Board membership 
The Board consists of: 
² three consumer representatives 
² a Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative 
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by 
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen 
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for 
their business leadership qualities. 
What the Board needs 
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the 
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application 
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return 
receipt requested. 
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you 
will receive an acknowledgment indicating: 
² The file number assigned to your application. 
² The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator. 
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be 
asked to submit statements. 
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information: 
² Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders 
relevant to the case. 
² The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed 
on your vehicle ownership license. 
² The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s). 
² The current mileage. 
² The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle. 
² A brief description of your unresolved concern. 
² A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor 
Company. 
² The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the 
dealership(s). 
² A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern. 
204
Customer assistance 
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not 
qualify for Board review. 
Oral presentations 
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question 
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation 
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the 
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation 
may be requested by the Board as well. 
Making a decision 
Board members review all available information related to each 
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial 
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party. 
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that 
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board 
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to 
consider some cases. 
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a 
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of 
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but 
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to 
them under state or federal law. 
To Request a DSB Brochure/Application 
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the 
Board at the following address/phone number: 
Dispute Settlement Board 
P.O. Box 5120 
Southfield, MI 48086–5120 
1–800–428–3718 
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center 
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952 
or by writing to the Center at the following address: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Relationship Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
205
Customer assistance 
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM 
(CANADA ONLY) 
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and 
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been 
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party 
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor 
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). 
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy 
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a 
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is 
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal 
proceedings. 
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct 
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal 
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the 
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve 
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s 
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada. 
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more 
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial 
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. 
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA 
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the 
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you 
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. 
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock 
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or 
owner relations/customer relationship office. 
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may 
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause 
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of 
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper 
fuel. 
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty 
importing your vehicle back into the U.S. 
206
Customer assistance 
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in 
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the 
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call: 
FORD MOTOR COMPANY 
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS 
1555 Fairlane Drive 
Fairlane Business Park #3 
Allen Park, Michigan 48101 
U.S.A. 
Telephone: (313) 594-4857 
FAX: (313) 390-0804 
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford 
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct 
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office. 
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of 
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and 
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market 
Operations. 
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE 
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: 
HELM, INCORPORATED 
P.O. Box 07150 
Detroit, Michigan 48207 
Or call: 
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356 
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST 
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card holders only.) 
207
Customer assistance 
Obtaining a French owner’s guide 
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. 
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) 
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer 
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the 
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of 
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the 
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and 
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or 
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer 
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund 
or replacement vehicle. 
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer 
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its 
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership 
of a new vehicle or the first 29 000 km (18 000 miles), whichever occurs 
first: 
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity 
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a 
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of 
the vehicle) OR 
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of 
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time) 
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the 
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the 
following address: 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
Mail Drop 3NE-B 
Dearborn, MI 48126 
208
Customer assistance 
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) 
If you believe that your vehicle has 
a defect which could cause a crash, 
or could cause injury or death, you 
should immediately inform the 
National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration (NHTSA) in addition 
to notifying Ford Motor Company. 
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and 
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a 
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved 
in individual problems between you, your dealer or Ford Motor Company. 
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free 
at 1–800–424–9393 (202–366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write 
to: 
NHTSA 
U.S. Department of Transportation 
400 Seventh Street 
Washington, D.C. 20590 
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from 
the Hotline. 
209
Cleaning 
WASHING THE EXTERIOR OF YOUR VEHICLE 
Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to 
the touch” or during exposure to 
strong, direct sunlight. It is 
recommended that you wash your 
vehicle regularly with cool or 
lukewarm water and a neutral Ph 
shampoo, such as Detail Wash 
(ZC-3–A), which is available from 
your authorized Ford, Lincoln or 
Mercury dealer. Always use a clean 
sponge or carwash mitt with plenty 
of water for best results. Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry 
cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting. 
Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish 
washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot 
painted surfaces. 
It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during winter 
months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and do cause 
damage to the vehicle. 
Items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits 
should be washed and sponged off as soon as possible. Deposits not 
removed promptly can cause damage to the vehicle’s paintwork and trim 
over time. 
Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before 
entering a car wash. 
PROTECTING THE PAINT FINISH OF YOUR VEHICLE 
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle on a regular basis will 
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage. 
A typical paint sealant lasts approximately six months to a year, 
depending on local weather conditions and the cleaning soap that is used 
in washing the vehicle. 
Do not use a wax that beads excessively. 
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body 
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof 
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield 
cowl area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time. 
210
Cleaning 
REPAIRING PAINT CHIPS 
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar 
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips. 
Minor scratches or paint damage from road debris may be repaired using 
the Ultra Touch Prep and Finishing Kit (F7AZ-19K507–BA), which is 
available at your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. This kit 
contains: 
² Lacquer Touch-Up Paint (ALBZ-19500–XXXXA) 
² Exterior Acrylic Spray Lacquer (ALAZ-19500–XXXXA) 
Please note that the part numbers (shown as XXXX above) will vary with 
your vehicle’s specific coloring. Carefully observe the application 
instructions on the products. 
CLEANING THE WHEEL RIMS AND COVERS 
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint 
finish. 
Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your 
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, 
in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could 
wear away the clearcoat finish over time. 
Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel 
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents for 
soiled wheel rims and covers. 
Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers. 
Clean wheel rims and covers with Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is 
available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. Spray 
cleaner on cool wheel rims or covers and allow to set for 2–5 minutes. 
Agitate the area with a sponge and rinse off with plenty of water. 
Use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA), 
available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer, in order 
to remove tar and grease from wheel rims and covers. 
CLEANING THE ENGINE 
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt 
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: 
² The engine must be cool to the touch before spraying with water. 
211
Cleaning 
² Never spray a hot engine with cold water, as damage to the 
engine block or engine components may occur. 
² Use caution when using a self-serve power washer (1000psi maximum 
pressure) to clean the engine, as the high-pressure fluid could 
penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. 
² Never apply anything to any exposed belts in the engine 
compartment, including the belt dressing. 
For general cleaning of the engine and engine compartment, spray 
Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (F4AZ-19A536–A) on all parts that 
require cleaning and pressure rinse the area with cool water. 
² Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning 
the engine. 
² Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the 
running engine may cause internal damage. 
WASHING NON-PAINTED PLASTIC EXTERIOR PARTS 
Use Detail Wash (ZC-3–A) for routine cleaning. 
If tar or grease spots are present, clean with Extra Strength Tar and 
Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA). 
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products 
are available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. 
WASHING THE EXTERIOR LAMPS 
In order to avoid scratching the plastic lamps, do not use dry 
paper towels, non-approved chemical solvents or abrasive 
cleaners. 
212
Use a soft cloth and a solution of Triple Clean (EOAZ-19526–AA), mixed 
properly with water, in order to remove bug residue. If tar or grease 
spots are present, clean with Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal 
(B7A-19520–AA). 
CLEANING THE WINDSHIELD, WIPER BLADES AND REAR 
WINDOW 
If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear 
window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot 
wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other 
organic contamination. 
Do not clean the windshield or rear window glass with abrasives, 
as they may cause scratches. 
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean the 
windshield, rear window or the wiper blades as damage may 
occur. 
Clean the outside of the windshield or rear window with a non-abrasive 
cleaner such as Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507–AA), 
available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. If after 
cleaning the glass surface, the water sheets from the glass (e.g., does not 
bead), then the window is clean. 
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned 
regularly. Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol 
or windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when 
they appear worn or do not function properly. 
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth. 
Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of 
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver 
from undesirable windshield reflection. 
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning 
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of 
the air bag system. 
Cleaning 
213
Cleaning 
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS 
Wipe the cluster area with a soft, damp cotton towel. Dry the area with a 
clean, dry towel. 
CLEANING SEATS EQUIPPED WITH SIDE AIR BAGS 
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. In order to remove 
stains and soil, clean with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner 
(E8AZ-19523–AA). 
Never saturate the seat covers with any cleaning solution. 
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning 
the seat where the side air bag is mounted. Such products could 
contaminate the side air bag system and affect performance of the side 
air bag in a collision. The air bag may not function correctly and not 
provide injury reduction benefits. 
CLEANING THE INTERIOR FABRIC, CARPETS AND CLOTH SEATS 
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Remove light stains 
and soil with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA). 
Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution. 
Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which 
can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardent 
abilities of the seat materials. 
If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with 
Spot and Stain Remover (F3AZ-19521–WA). Follow up by recleaning the 
area with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA). 
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) 
All Ford, Lincoln and Mercury vehicles with leather seating surfaces have 
a clear, protective coating over the leather. 
To clean the leather seats, simply use a soft cloth with Deluxe Leather 
and Vinyl Cleaner (F2AZ-19521–WA). Dry the area with a soft cloth. 
214
Cleaning 
It is recommended that you use the Deluxe Leather Care Kit 
(F8AZ-19G253–AA), available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or 
Mercury dealer. The mild cleaner and special pad available in the kit 
cleans the leather and maintains its natural beauty. For best results, 
follow the instructions printed on the cleaner label. Regular cleaning of 
your leather upholstery helps maintain its resiliency and color. 
Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, 
solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or 
oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may 
cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating. 
CLEANING WOOD-TONE TRIM 
Wipe stains with a clean, soft cloth and Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner 
(E4AZ-19C507–AA). Dry the area by wiping with a dry, soft, clean cloth. 
CLEANING THE INSIDE WINDOWS 
Use Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507–AA) for the inside 
windows if they become fogged. 
To clean, use two lint-free, soft towels, folded into a pad-shape. Mist the 
glass completely with cleaner, and use one of the towels to evenly agitate 
the surface. Use the other towel to remove the residue. 
CLEANING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) 
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner. 
Remove fresh spots immediately. Clean the seat with a damp cloth, using 
a mild soap and water solution, if necessary. 
CLEANING AND MAINTAINING THE SAFETY BELTS 
Clean the safety belts with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner 
(E8AZ-19523–AA), available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or 
Mercury dealer. 
Do not use bleach, dye or any other solvent to clean the belts, as 
these actions may weaken the belt webbing. 
UNDERBODY 
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and 
door drain holes free from packed dirt. 
215
Cleaning 
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS 
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available 
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products 
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they 
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your 
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or 
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following or 
products of equivalent quality: 
Ford Custom Clearcoat Polish* 
Ford Custom Silicone Gloss Polish 
Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada) 
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) 
Ford Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) 
Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in 
Canada) 
Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Ford Custom Bright Metal Cleaner 
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate 
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) 
Ford Spot and Stain Remover* 
Ford Super Premium Tire and Trim Dressing 
Ford Triple Clean 
Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Ford Engine Shampoo and Degreaser 
* May be sold with the Motorcraft name 
216
Maintenance and specifications 
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS 
To help you service your vehicle: 
² We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy 
location. 
² We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking 
routine service easy. 
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide 
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to find out 
which parts and services are covered. 
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts 
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to 
provide the best performance in your vehicle. 
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. 
² Do not work on a hot engine. 
² When the engine is running, make sure that loose clothing, jewelry or 
long hair does not get caught up in moving parts. 
² Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed 
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. 
² Keep all lit cigarettes, open flames and other lit material away from 
the battery and all fuel related parts. 
If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle 
conditions before your vehicle will drive properly, as explained in Battery 
in this chapter. 
217
Working with the engine off 
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P 
(Park). 
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 
Working with the engine on 
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P 
(Park). 
2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not 
remove it while the engine is running. 
OPENING THE HOOD 
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood 
release handle located under the 
bottom left corner of the instrument 
panel. 
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and 
release the auxiliary latch located 
under the front of the hood, just 
above the passenger side headlamp. 
Slide the yellow handle to release 
the auxiliary latch. 
3. Lift the hood until the lift 
cylinders hold it open. 
BRAKE 
HOOD 
Maintenance and specifications 
218
Maintenance and specifications 
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 
5.4L 4V V8 engine 
1 2 3 4 5 6 
10 9 
1. Battery 
2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick 
3. Engine oil filler cap 
4. Power steering fluid reservoir 
5. Engine oil dipstick 
6. Brake fluid reservoir 
7. Power distribution box 
8. Air filter assembly 
9. Engine coolant reservoir 
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 
8 
7 
219
Maintenance and specifications 
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID 
Washer fluid 
Check the washer fluid whenever 
you stop for fuel. The reservoir is 
highlighted with a symbol. 
If the level is low, add enough fluid 
to fill the reservoir. In very cold 
weather, do not fill the reservoir all 
the way. 
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification ESR-M17P5–A. 
Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. 
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the 
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. 
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used 
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the 
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. 
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer 
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system 
components. 
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate 
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the 
windshield. 
ENGINE OIL 
Checking the engine oil 
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals 
for checking the engine oil. 
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. 
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the 
oil pan. 
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P 
(Park). 
220
Maintenance and specifications 
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 
5. Locate and carefully remove the 
engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 
MIN MAX 
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it 
again. 
² If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is 
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL. 
² If the oil level is below the MIN 
mark, add enough oil to raise the 
level within the MIN-MAX range. 
² Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil 
must be removed from the engine by a service technician. 
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated. 
221
Maintenance and specifications 
Adding engine oil 
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine 
oil in this chapter. 
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified 
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap 
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the 
MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated. 
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated. 
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the 
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed. 
Engine oil and filter recommendations 
Look for this certification 
trademark. 
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended. 
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American 
Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft or an equivalent oil meeting 
Ford specification WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum 
fuel economy and durability performance meeting all 
requirements for your vehicle’s engine. 
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine 
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, 
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty. 
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule 
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. 
222
Maintenance and specifications 
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for 
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used 
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up 
engine noises or knock may be experienced. 
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or 
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application. 
BATTERY 
Your vehicle is equipped with a 
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery 
which normally does not require 
additional water during its life of 
service. 
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the 
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for 
the service interval schedules. 
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”. 
Do not overfill the battery cells. 
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water 
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high 
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery 
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the 
charging system checked. 
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled 
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. 
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and 
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to 
the battery terminals. 
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables 
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the 
acid with a solution of baking soda and water. 
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the 
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the 
223
Maintenance and specifications 
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and 
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel. 
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause 
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted 
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, 
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper 
ventilation. 
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the 
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, 
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. 
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite 
corners. 
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric 
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes 
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of 
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush 
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt 
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. 
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and 
lead compunds. Wash hands after handling. 
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been 
disconnected see “Shift strategy” in the driving section. 
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, 
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When 
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must 
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and 
performance. To begin this process: 
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the 
engine. 
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 
224
Maintenance and specifications 
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 
6. With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A/C on, put the 
vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process. 
² The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to 
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. 
² If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle 
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle 
trim is eventually relearned. 
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, 
the clock must be reset once the battery is reconnected. 
² Always dispose of automotive 
batteries in a responsible manner. 
Follow your local authorized 
standards for disposal. Call your 
local authorized recycling center 
to find out more about recycling 
automotive batteries. 
LEAD 
RETURN 
RECYCLE 
ENGINE COOLANT 
Checking engine coolant 
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the 
mileage intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant 
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and water, which 
equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). Coolant concentration 
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the 
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant 
should be maintained at the “cold full” of “cold fill range” level in the 
coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions 
in the Adding Engine Coolant section. 
225
Maintenance and specifications 
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water 
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above 
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A 
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following: 
² Freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F). 
² Boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F). 
² Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion. 
² Enables calibrated gauges to work properly. 
When the engine is cold, check the 
level of the engine coolant in the 
reservoir. 
COLD FILL 
RANGE 
² The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold 
fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon 
application). 
² Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval 
schedules. 
² Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your 
vehicle in this chapter. 
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval, 
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is 
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding 
engine coolant in this chapter. 
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine 
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified 
function and vehicle location. 
226
Maintenance and specifications 
Adding engine coolant 
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant 
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the 
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. 
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and 
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you 
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. 
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid 
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could 
make it difficult to see through the windshield. 
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with either green-colored 
Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification 
ESE-M97B44–A or yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine 
Coolant meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1. To determine your 
vehicle’s coolant type (color), check your coolant reservoir. 
² Add Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored), 
VC-4–A (U.S.) or CXC-10 (Canada) or Motorcraft Premium 
Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A, depending on 
the type of coolant originally equipped in your vehicle. If you 
are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle requires, check your 
coolant reservoir or contact your local dealer. 
² Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such 
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or 
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D 
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange 
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your 
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection. 
² A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case 
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the 
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of 
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone 
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, 
overheating or freezing. 
227
Maintenance and specifications 
² Do not use alcohol, methanol or brine or any engine coolants 
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol 
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or 
freezing. 
² Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These 
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine 
coolant. 
² Do not mix with recycled coolant unless from a Ford-approved 
recycling process (see Use of Recycled Engine Coolant section). 
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap 
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery 
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and 
water to the “cold full” level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant 
degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the 
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow 
system, follow these steps to add engine coolant. 
To avoid personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before 
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is 
under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the 
cap is loosened slightly. 
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool. 
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant 
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle). 
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release. 
3. Step back while the pressure releases. 
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the 
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap. 
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see 
above), to within the “cold fill range” or the “cold full” level on the 
reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the 
radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full. 
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly 
installed to prevent coolant loss.) 
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration see 
Checking Engine Coolant section). If the concentration is not 50/50 
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the 
228
Maintenance and specifications 
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50 
coolant concentration. 
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant 
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If 
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and 
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level. 
If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per 
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling 
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant 
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. 
Recycled engine coolant 
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant 
produced by Ford-approved processes in vehicles originally equipped 
with Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored). However, not 
all coolant recycling processes produce coolant that meets Ford 
specification ESE-M97B44–A. Use of such coolant may harm the engine 
and cooling system components. 
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine 
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold 
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet 
available. 
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate 
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling 
and disposing of automotive fluids. 
Coolant refill capacity 
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer 
to Refill capacities in this chapter. 
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant 
in this chapter. 
229
Maintenance and specifications 
Severe climates 
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]): 
² It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration 
above 50%. 
² NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. 
² Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will 
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
² Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the 
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate 
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the 
winter months. 
If you drive in extremely hot climates: 
² It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration 
above 40%. 
² NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. 
² Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will 
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
² Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will 
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
² Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the 
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate 
protection at the temperatures in which you drive. 
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50 
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system 
and engine protection. 
What you should know about fail-safe cooling 
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to 
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred. 
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load 
and terrain. 
230
Maintenance and specifications 
How fail-safe cooling works 
If the engine begins to overheat: 
² The engine coolant temperature 
gauge will move to the red (hot) 
area. 
² The and the symbol 
will illuminate. 
² The Service Engine Soon 
indicator light will illuminate. 
H 
C 
If the engine reaches a preset 
over-temperature condition, the engine will automatically switch to 
alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air 
pump and cools the engine. 
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However: 
² The engine power will be limited. 
² The air conditioning system will be disabled. 
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature: 
² The engine will completely shut down. 
² Steering and braking effort will increase. 
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take 
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine 
damage. 
When fail-safe mode is activated 
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the 
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed 
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is 
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine 
damage, therefore: 
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. 
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility. 
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. 
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low. 
231
Maintenance and specifications 
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is 
running or hot. 
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility. 
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem 
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a 
service facility as soon as possible. 
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS 
Important safety precautions 
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank 
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. 
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is 
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops 
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may 
spray out and injure you or others. 
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or 
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause 
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible 
personal injury. 
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or 
mishandled. 
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. 
232
Maintenance and specifications 
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: 
² Extinguish all smoking materials 
and any open flames before 
fueling your vehicle. 
² Always turn off the vehicle before 
fueling. 
² Automotive fuels can be harmful 
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as 
gasoline is highly toxic and if 
swallowed can cause death or 
permanent injury. If fuel is 
swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are 
immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for 
hours. 
² Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind 
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, 
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious 
illness and permanent injury. 
² Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, 
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and 
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could 
lead to permanent injury. 
² Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is 
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated 
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or 
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. 
² Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of 
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, 
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive 
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is 
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and 
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse 
reaction. 
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow 
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while 
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. 
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes. 
233
Maintenance and specifications 
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static 
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an 
ungrounded fuel container. 
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an 
ungrounded fuel container: 
² Place approved fuel container on the ground. 
² DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the 
cargo area). 
² Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while 
filling. 
² DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill 
position. 
Fuel Filler Cap 
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off 
feature. 
When fueling your vehicle: 
1. Turn the engine off. 
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it 
stops. 
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the 
filler pipe. 
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. 
If the “Service Engine Soon/Check Engine” indicator comes on and stays 
on after you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly 
installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap 
properly and reinstall it. 
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler 
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may 
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the 
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used. 
234
Maintenance and specifications 
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is 
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops 
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may 
spray out and injure you or others. 
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or 
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause 
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible 
personal injury. 
Choosing the right fuel 
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law 
and could damage your vehicle. 
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system 
components. 
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic 
compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT. 
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was 
not designed may not be covered by your warranty. 
Octane recommendations 
Your vehicle is designed to use 
“Premium” unleaded gasoline with 
an (R+M)/2 octane rating of 91 or 
91 higher for optimum performance. 
(R+M)/2 METHOD 
The use of gasolines with lower 
octane ratings may degrade performance. We do not recommend the use 
of gasolines labeled as “Premium” in high altitude areas that are sold 
with octane ratings of less than 91. 
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if 
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel 
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified 
service technician to prevent any engine damage. 
Fuel quality 
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability 
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded 
235
Maintenance and specifications 
gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly 
in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become 
more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified 
service technician. 
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel 
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane 
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system. 
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your 
fuel may not be covered by your warranty. 
Many of the world’s automakers 
issued the World-wide Fuel Charter 
that recommends gasoline 
specifications to provide improved 
performance and emission control 
system protection for your vehicle. 
Gasolines that meet the World-wide 
Fuel Charter should be used when 
available. Ask your fuel supplier 
about gasolines that meet the 
World-wide Fuel Charter. In Canada, 
look for fuels that display the Auto Makers’ Choicey logo. 
Cleaner air 
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to 
improve air quality. 
Running out of fuel 
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse 
affect on powertrain components. 
If you have run out of fuel: 
² You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after 
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to 
the engine. 
² Your “Service Engine Soon” indicator may come on. For more 
information on the “Service Engine Soon” indicator, refer to the 
Instrument Cluster chapter. 
236
Fuel Filter 
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service 
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate 
intervals for changing the fuel filter. 
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The 
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system 
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used. 
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY 
Measuring techniques 
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the 
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as 
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are 
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend 
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 600 km (1 000 
miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate 
measurement after 3 000 km–5 000 km (2 000 miles-3 000 miles). 
Filling the tank 
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to 
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities 
section of this chapter. 
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the 
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the 
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates 
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel 
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. 
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should 
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your 
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be 
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the 
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. 
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: 
² Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling, 
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running. 
² Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time 
the tank is filled. 
Maintenance and specifications 
237
Maintenance and specifications 
² Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling. 
² Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating. 
² Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand. 
² Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the 
same direction each time you fill up. 
² Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time. 
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent. 
Calculating fuel economy 
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading 
(in kilometers or miles). 
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters 
or gallons). 
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record 
the current odometer reading. 
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer 
reading. 
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel 
economy: 
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers 
traveled. 
Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used. 
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city 
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel 
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records 
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel 
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy. 
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits 
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change 
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy. 
Habits 
² Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel. 
² Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel 
economy. 
238
Maintenance and specifications 
² Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste 
fuel. 
² Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. 
² Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy. 
² Slow down gradually. 
² Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15% 
less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]). 
² Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy. 
² Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy. 
² You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if 
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs. 
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel 
economy. 
² Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may 
reduce fuel economy. 
² Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel 
economy. 
² Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. 
Maintenance 
² Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size. 
² Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel 
economy. 
² Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in 
this chapter. 
² Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the 
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks 
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide. 
Conditions 
² Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy 
at any speed. 
² Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately 
0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried). 
239
Maintenance and specifications 
² Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug 
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may 
reduce fuel economy. 
² Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. 
² Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 
12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving. 
² Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to 
driving on hilly terrain. 
² Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top 
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. 
² Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than 
two-wheel-drive operation. 
² Close windows for high speed driving. 
EPA window sticker 
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your 
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA 
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons 
with other vehicles. 
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window 
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG) 
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy 
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions. 
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a 
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with 
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic 
converter and other emission control components continue to work 
properly: 
² Use only the specified fuel listed. 
² Avoid running out of fuel. 
² Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at 
high speeds. 
² Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed 
according to the specified schedule. 
240
Maintenance and specifications 
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance 
guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its 
emissions system. 
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for 
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting 
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine 
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. 
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry 
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine 
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 
Illumination of the “Check Engine” light, charging system warning light 
or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or 
loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is 
not working properly. 
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially 
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. 
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By 
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, 
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not 
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent 
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on 
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the 
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up 
specifications. 
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty 
information. 
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing 
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of 
the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Check Engine/Service Engine 
Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and 
chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not 
pass the I/M test with the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on. 
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, 
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test” 
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a 
241
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as 
described below: 
² First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway. 
² Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with 
at least four idle periods. 
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the 
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The 
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, 
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. 
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID 
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance 
guide for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use 
only Ford Premium Power Steering Fluid. 
1. Start the engine and let it run 
until it reaches normal operating 
temperature (the engine coolant 
temperature gauge indicator will be 
near the center of the normal area 
between H and C). 
2. While the engine idles, turn the 
steering wheel left and right several 
times. 
3. Turn the engine off. 
4. Check the fluid level in the 
reservoir. It should be between the 
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add 
fluid if the level is in this range. 
MAX 
MIN 
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in 
small amounts, continuously 
checking the level until it reaches 
the range between the MIN and 
MAX lines. Be sure to put the cap 
back on the reservoir. 
MAX 
MIN 
Maintenance and specifications 
242
Maintenance and specifications 
BRAKE FLUID 
Checking and adding brake fluid 
Brake fluid should be checked and 
refilled as needed. Refer to the 
scheduled maintenance guide for 
the service interval schedules. 
1. Clean the reservoir cap before 
removal to prevent dirt or water 
from entering the reservoir. 
2. Visually inspect the fluid level. 
3. If necessary, add brake fluid from 
a clean un-opened container until 
the level reaches MAX. Do not fill 
above this line. 
4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid 
certified to meet Ford specification ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to Lubricant 
specifications in this chapter. 
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes 
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if 
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. 
Seek medical attention immediately. 
If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause 
permanent damage to your brakes. 
Do not let the fluid level in the reservoir for the master cylinder 
fall below the MIN mark. If master cylinder runs dry, this may 
cause the brakes to fail. 
MAX 
MIN 
243
Maintenance and specifications 
TRANSMISSION FLUID 
Checking automatic transmission fluid 
Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for 
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid. 
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not 
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you 
notice some sign of fluid leakage. 
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an 
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating 
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been 
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot 
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking. 
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating 
temperature. 
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal, 
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear 
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running. 
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If 
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment 
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. 
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube. 
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in 
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient 
temperature. 
Low fluid level 
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid 
level is at the bottom of the dipstick 
and the ambient temperature is 
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 
above 10°C (50°F). 
244
Maintenance and specifications 
Correct fluid level 
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating 
temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal 
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20 
miles) of driving. 
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is 
above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill 
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating 
temperature. 
The transmission fluid should be in 
this range if at normal operating 
temperature (66°C-77°C 
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 
[150°F-170°F]). 
The transmission fluid should be in 
this range if at ambient temperature 
(10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]). 
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 
High fluid level 
Fluid levels above the safe range 
may result in transmission failure. 
An overfill condition of transmission 
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 
fluid may cause shift and/or 
engagement concerns and/or possible damage. 
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. 
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels 
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of 
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the 
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter. 
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause 
internal transmission component damage. 
If necessary, add fluid in 250 mL (1/2 pint) increments through the filler 
tube until the level is correct. 
245
Maintenance and specifications 
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid 
should be removed by a qualified 
technician. 
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 
An overfill condition of 
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns 
and/or possible damage. 
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE 
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require 
lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for maintenance 
intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints 
equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary. 
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE 
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals 
for changing the air filter element. 
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter 
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft Part Numbers. 
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not 
remove it while the engine is running. 
Changing the air filter element 
1. Loosen the clamp that secures 
the air inlet tube to the engine air 
filter cover and disconnect the tube 
from the cover. 
246
Maintenance and specifications 
2. Loosen the clamp that secures 
the air filter cover to the air filter 
housing and carefully separate the 
cover from housing. 
3. Remove the air filter element 
from the air filter housing. 
4. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter 
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause 
filter damage and allow unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly 
seated. 
5. Replace the air filter cover and secure the clamp. 
6. Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp. 
247
Maintenance and specifications 
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING 
New vehicles are fitted with tires 
that have a rating on them called 
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality 
grades can be found where 
applicable on the tire sidewall 
between tread shoulder and 
maximum section width. For 
example: 
² Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A 
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United 
States Department of Transportation has set. 
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger 
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, 
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim 
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in 
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). 
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. 
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following 
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. 
Treadwear 
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of 
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified 
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one 
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire 
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual 
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the 
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and 
differences in road characteristics and climate. 
Traction AA A B C 
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The 
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured 
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of 
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction 
performance. 
248
Maintenance and specifications 
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on 
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include 
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. 
Temperature A B C 
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the 
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat 
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory 
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire 
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to 
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance 
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle 
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of 
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by 
law. 
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that 
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, 
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in 
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 
SERVICING YOUR TIRES 
Checking the tire pressure 
² Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. 
² Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been 
parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km (3 
miles). 
² Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the 
Certification Label. Tire pressure information can also be found on the 
Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door. 
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail 
suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. 
249
Maintenance and specifications 
Tire rotation 
Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear 
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate 
them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that 
the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. 
² Four tire rotation 
Replacing the tires 
Replace the tires when the wear 
band is visible through the tire 
treads. 
When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or 
bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the 
Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed 
rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations 
recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions, 
your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. 
Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, 
load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”, etc.), 
as originally offered by Ford. 
250
Maintenance and specifications 
Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger 
size tires. 
Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the 
handling of the vehicle and make it easier for the driver to lose 
control and roll over. 
Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also 
affect the accuracy of your speedometer. 
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS 
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you 
currently have on your vehicle. 
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in 
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow 
tires and chains. 
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: 
² Use only cable type chains offered by Ford as an accessory or 
equivalent. SAE class “S” or other conventional link type chains may 
contact and cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house and/or body. 
² Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any 
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. 
² Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your 
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove 
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. 
² If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. 
² Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use 
tire chains on dry roads. 
² The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle 
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when 
using snow tires and chains. 
² Do not exceed 48 km/h (30 mph) with tire chains on your vehicle. 
251
Maintenance and specifications 
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 
Component 5.4L 4V V8 engine 
Air filter element FA-1634 
Battery (standard) BXT-65-650 
Fuel filter FG-986B 
Oil filter FL-820-S 
PCV valve EV-233 
Spark plugs* AWSF-32P 
* Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark 
plug gap information. 
252
Maintenance and specifications 
REFILL CAPACITIES 
Fluid Ford Part 
Name 
Application Capacity 
Brake fluid High 
Performance 
DOT 3 Motor 
Vehicle Brake 
Fluid 
All Fill to line on 
reservoir 
Engine oil 
(includes filter 
change) 
Motorcraft SAE 
5W-20 Super 
Premium Motor 
Oil 
All 5.7L 
(6.0 quarts) 
Fuel tank N/A All 113.6L 
(30 gallons) 
Power steering 
fluid 
Motorcraft 
MERCON t ATF 
All Fill to line on 
reservoir 
Transmission 
fluid 1 
Motorcraft 
MERCONtATF 
4 x 2 vehicles 15.0L 
(15.9 quarts) 2 
4 x 4 vehicles 15.5L 
(16.4 quarts) 2 
Transfer case 
fluid 
Motorcraft 
MERCONtATF 
4 x 4 vehicles 1.9L 
(2.0 quarts) 
Engine coolant 3 Motorcraft 
Premium Engine 
Coolant 
(green-colored) 
or Motorcraft 
Premium Gold 
Engine Coolant 
(yellow-colored) 
without aux rear 
heat 
24.1L 
(25.5 quarts) 
with aux rear 
heat 
26.4L 
(27.9 quarts) 
Front axle 
lubricant 
Motorcraft SAE 
75W-90 
Premium 4x4 
Front Axle 
Lubricant 
4 x 4 vehicles 1.8-2.0L 
(3.5-3.7 pints) 
Rear axle 
lubricant 4 
Motorcraft SAE 
75W-140 
Synthetic Rear 
Axle Lubricant 
All 2.9-3.1L 
(5.5-5.8 pints) 
253
Maintenance and specifications 
Fluid Ford Part 
Name 
Application Capacity 
Windshield 
washer fluid 
Ultra-Clear 
Windshield 
Washer 
Concentrate 
All 4.1L 
(4.5 quarts) 
1Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission 
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick 
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the 
correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine 
the correct service interval. 
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as 
MERCONt and MERCONt V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used 
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCONt type 
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that 
require the MERCONt V type fluid. 
MERCONt and MERCONt V type fluids are not interchangeable. 
DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Use of a transmission 
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCONt and MERCONt V) in 
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCONt may 
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the 
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. 
2Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary 
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount 
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on 
the dipstick’s normal operating range. 
3Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. 
4Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and 
is considered lubricated for life. These lubricants are not to be checked 
or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the axle has 
been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time 
the axle has been submerged in water. Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive 
Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546–A or equivalent meeting Ford 
specification EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. 
Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 6 mm to 
14 mm (1/4 inch to 9/16 inch) below the bottom of the filler hole. 
254
Maintenance and specifications 
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS 
Item 
Ford part 
name 
Ford part 
number 
Ford 
specification 
Hinges, latches, 
striker plates 
and rotors, seat 
tracks, fuel filler 
door hinge and 
spring 
Multi-Purpose 
Grease 
DOAZ-19584-AA 
or 
F5AZ-19G209-AA 
ESB-M1C93-B or 
ESR-M1C159-A 
Lock cylinders Penetrating and 
Lock Lubricant 
Motorcraft XL-1 ESB-M2C75-B 
Brake fluid High 
Performance 
DOT 3 Motor 
Vehicle Brake 
Fluid 
C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A 
and DOT 3 
Driveshaft, slip 
spline, double 
Cardan joint 
center ball 
Premium Long 
Life Grease 
XG-1-C or 
XG-1-K 
ESA-M1C75–B 
Engine coolant Motorcraft 
Premium Engine 
Coolant 
(green-colored) 
VC-4–A (US) or 
CXC-10 
(Canada) 
ESE-M97B44-A 
Motorcraft 
Premium Gold 
Engin Coolant 
(yellow-colored) 
VC-7–A WSS-M97B51-A1 
Engine oil Motorcraft SAE 
5W-20 Super 
Premium Motor 
Oil 
XO-5W-20-QSP WSS-M2C153-H 
with API 
Certification 
Mark 
255
Maintenance and specifications 
Item 
Ford part 
name 
Ford part 
number 
Ford 
specification 
4x4 front wheel 
bearings, 4x4 
spindle needle 
bearings, spindle 
thrust bearings 
 front drive 
axle u-joint/slip 
spline 
High 
Temperature 
4x4 Front Axle 
 Wheel Bearing 
Grease 
E8TZ-19590-A ESA-M1C198-A 
Automatic 
transmission 1 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt ATF 
XT-2-QDX MERCONt 
Power steering 
fluid 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt ATF 
XT-2-QDX MERCONt 
Rear axle 2 Motorcraft SAE 
75W-140 High 
Performance 
Synthetic Rear 
Axle Lube 
F1TZ-19580-B WSL-M2C192-A 
Front axle 
(4X4) 
Motorcraft SAE 
75W-90 
Premium 4x4 
Front Axle 
Lubricant 
XY-75W90-TQL WSP-M2C201-A 
Transfer case 
(4X4) 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt ATF 
XT-2-QDX MERCONt 
Windshield 
washer fluid 
Ultra-clear 
Windshield 
Washer 
Concentrate 
C9AZ-19550-AC ESR-M17P5-A 
1Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission 
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick 
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the 
correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine 
the correct service interval. 
256
Maintenance and specifications 
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as 
MERCONt and MERCONt V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used 
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCONt type 
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that 
require the MERCONt V type fluid. 
MERCONt and MERCONt V type fluids are not interchangeable. 
DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Use of a transmission 
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCONt and MERCONt V) in 
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCONt may 
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the 
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. 
2Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or 
equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill 
of Ford Traction-Lok rear axles. 
ENGINE DATA 
Engine 5.4L 4V V8 engine 
Cubic inches 330 
Required fuel 91 octane 
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 
Spark plug gap 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-0.056 inch) 
Ignition system Coil on plug 
Compression ratio 9.5:1 
257
Maintenance and specifications 
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS 
Vehicle dimensions 4x2 mm (in) 4x4 mm (in) 
(1) Overall length 5 202.0 
(204.8) 
5 202.0 
(204.8) 
(2) Vehicle width 2 027.0 
(79.8)1 
2 027.0 
(79.8)1 
(3) Overall height2 1 907.0 
(75.1) 
1 940.0 
(76.4) 
(4) Wheelbase 3 026.0 
(119.1) 
3 022.0 
(119.0) 
(5) Track - Front 1 661.0 
(65.4) 
1 661.0 
(65.4) 
(5) Track - Rear 1 663.0 
(65.5) 
1 663.0 
(65.5) 
1 Vehicle width, including mirrors: 2 293.0 mm (90.3 in) 
2 Vehicle equipped with 16” tires and base suspension 
258
Maintenance and specifications 
4 
1 
3 
5 
2 
259
Maintenance and specifications 
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE 
Certification label 
The National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration Regulations require 
that a Certification label be affixed 
to a vehicle and prescribe where the 
Certification label may be located. 
The Certification label is located on 
the front door latch pillar on the 
driver’s side. 
Vehicle identification number 
The vehicle identification number is 
attached to a metal tag and is 
located on the driver side 
instrument panel. (Please note that 
in the graphic XXXX is 
representative of your vehicle 
identification number.) 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
Engine number 
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification 
number) is stamped on the engine block and transmission. 
260
Accessories 
FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE 
A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your 
vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln, Mercury or Ford of 
Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically 
engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to 
complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In 
addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets 
or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford 
Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford 
accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or 
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component 
damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for 
whichever provides you the greatest benefit: 
² 12 months or 20 000 km (12 000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or 
² The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. 
This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your 
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of 
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 60 000 km (36 000 
miles) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a 
copy of the warranty. 
Not all accessories are available for all models. 
Vehicle Security 
Styled wheel protector locks 
Vehicle security systems 
Comfort and convenience 
Battery warmer 
Cabin air filter 
Cargo nets 
Cargo organizer 
Cargo storage box 
Cargo tray 
Engine block heater 
Tire step 
261
Accessories 
Travel equipment 
Daytime running lights (DRL) 
Heavy-duty battery 
Raised cross bars 
Raised cross bar adaptors 
Rear mount bike rack 
Seatback organizer 
Soft luggage carrier 
Towing mirrors (removable and permanent) 
Trailer hitch bars and balls 
Trailer hitch mounted bike carrier 
Trailer hitch wiring adaptor 
Protection and appearance equipment 
Air bag anti-theft locks 
Bike carrier 
Cargo liners, interior 
Carpet floor mats 
Door edge guards 
Flat splash guards 
Front end covers (full) 
Hood deflector 
Instrument panel trim (woodgrain) 
Kayak/canoe carrier 
Load warrior carrier basket 
Locking gas cap 
Luggage basket 
Molded splash guards 
Molded vinyl floor mats 
Moonroof deflector 
Rear air deflectors 
262
Side window air deflectors 
Ski/snowboard adaptor 
Snow traction cables 
Truck cover 
Underbody security lighting 
Universal floor mats 
Wheels 
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in 
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: 
² When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your 
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of 
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety 
compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight 
information. 
² The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio 
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile 
communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and 
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such 
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC 
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service 
technician. 
² Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your 
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive 
use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may 
cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be 
damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be 
damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your 
vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and 
other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily 
affect your vehicle’s operation.) 
² Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage 
that may result from the use of such equipment. 
Accessories 
263
A 
Accessory delay ..........................67 
Air bag supplemental 
restraint system ........124–125, 129 
and child safety seats ............127 
description ......................125, 129 
disposal ....................................132 
driver air bag ..................127, 130 
indicator light ...........12, 129, 131 
operation .........................127, 130 
passenger air bag ...........127, 130 
side air bag ..............................129 
Air cleaner filter ...............246, 252 
Air conditioning ..........................37 
auxiliary heater and air 
conditioner ................................43 
rear seat controls .....................42 
Air suspension ...........................150 
description ..............................150 
warning light .............................12 
Ambulance packages ....................7 
Antifreeze 
(see Engine coolant) ................225 
Anti-lock brake system 
(see Brakes) ..............................147 
Anti-theft system 
warning light .............................13 
Automatic transmission 
driving an automatic 
overdrive .................................154 
fluid, adding ............................244 
fluid, checking ........................244 
fluid, refill capacities ..............253 
fluid, specification ..................257 
Auxiliary power point .................65 
Axle 
lubricant specifications ..255, 257 
refill capacities ........................253 
traction lok ..............................152 
B 
Battery .......................................223 
acid, treating emergencies .....223 
charging system 
warning light .............................12 
jumping a disabled battery ....194 
maintenance-free ....................223 
replacement, specifications ...252 
servicing ..................................223 
voltage gauge ............................16 
Belt minder ...............................120 
Brakes ........................................146 
anti-lock ...................................147 
anti-lock brake system 
(ABS) warning light .........11, 148 
brake warning light ..................11 
fluid, checking and adding ....243 
fluid, refill capacities ..............253 
fluid, specifications .........255, 257 
lubricant specifications ..255, 257 
parking ....................................148 
pedals (see Power 
adjustable foot pedals) ............70 
shift interlock ..........................153 
Break-in period .............................5 
C 
Capacities for refilling fluids ....253 
Cassette tape player ...................18 
CD changer .................................32 
Cellular telephone (see your 
Cellular Phone Guide) ................82 
Index 
264
Certification Label ....................260 
Child safety restraints ..............132 
child safety belts ....................132 
Child safety seats ......................134 
attaching with tether straps ..139 
in front seat ............................135 
in rear seat ......................135, 138 
Cleaning your vehicle 
engine compartment ..............211 
exterior ....................................215 
instrument cluster lens ..........214 
instrument panel ....................213 
interior .............................214–215 
plastic parts ............................212 
safety belts ..............................215 
washing ....................................210 
waxing .....................................210 
wheels ......................................211 
windows ..................................215 
wiper blades ............................213 
woodtone trim ........................215 
Clock ......................................23, 65 
Compass, electronic ..............62, 68 
calibration .................................63 
set zone adjustment .................63 
Console ........................................82 
overhead ........................60–61, 64 
rear ............................................83 
Controls 
power seat .................................99 
steering column ........................75 
Coolant 
checking and adding ..............225 
refill capacities ................229, 253 
specifications ..................255, 257 
Cruise control 
(see Speed control) ....................71 
Customer Assistance ................177 
Index 
Ford accessories 
for your vehicle ......................216 
Ford Extended 
Service Plan ............................202 
Getting assistance outside 
the U.S. and Canada ..............206 
Getting roadside assistance ...177 
Getting the 
service you need ....................200 
Ordering additional 
owner’s literature ...................207 
The Dispute 
Settlement Board ...................203 
Utilizing the Mediation/ 
Arbitration Program ...............206 
D 
Daytime running lamps 
(see Lamps) ................................48 
Defrost 
rear window ..............................46 
Dipstick 
automatic 
transmission fluid ...................244 
engine oil .................................220 
Doors 
door ajar warning .....................13 
lubricant specifications ..........255 
Driveline universal joint 
and slip yoke .............................246 
Driving under special 
conditions ..........................163, 166 
sand .........................................164 
snow and ice ...........................167 
through water .................165, 169 
265
E 
Emergencies, roadside 
jump-starting ..........................194 
Emission control system ..........240 
Engine ................................257–258 
check engine/ 
service engine soon light .........10 
cleaning ...................................211 
coolant .....................................225 
fail-safe coolant ......................230 
idle speed control ...................223 
lubrication 
specifications ..................255, 257 
refill capacities ........................253 
service points ..........................219 
starting after a collision .........178 
Engine block heater .................145 
Engine oil ..................................220 
change oil soon warning, 
message center .......................220 
checking and adding ..............220 
dipstick ....................................220 
filter, specifications ........222, 252 
recommendations ...................222 
refill capacities ........................253 
specifications ..................255, 257 
Exhaust fumes ..........................146 
F 
Fail safe cooling ........................230 
Floor mats ...................................83 
Fluid capacities .........................253 
Foglamps .....................................47 
Four-Wheel Drive 
vehicles ................................14, 159 
control trac .............................160 
description ..............................160 
driving off road .......................162 
electronic shift ........................161 
indicator light ...........................14 
preparing to 
drive your vehicle ...................152 
Fuel ............................................232 
calculating fuel economy .......237 
cap ...........................................234 
capacity ...................................253 
choosing the right fuel ...........235 
comparisons with EPA fuel 
economy estimates .................240 
detergent in fuel .....................236 
filling your vehicle 
with fuel ..................232, 234, 237 
filter, specifications ........237, 252 
fuel pump shut-off switch .....178 
gauge .........................................16 
improving fuel economy ........237 
low fuel warning light ..............12 
octane rating ...........235, 257–258 
quality ......................................235 
running out of fuel .................236 
safety information relating 
to automotive fuels ................232 
Fuses ..................................180–181 
G 
Garage door opener ..............61, 76 
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............234 
Gas mileage 
(see Fuel economy) .................237 
Gauges .........................................15 
battery voltage gauge ...............16 
engine coolant 
temperature gauge ...................15 
engine oil pressure gauge ........16 
fuel gauge ..................................16 
Index 
266
odometer ...................................17 
speedometer .............................17 
tachometer ................................17 
trip odometer ............................17 
GAWR 
(Gross Axle Weight Rating) .....170 
calculating ...............................172 
definition .................................170 
driving with a heavy load ......170 
location ....................................170 
GVWR (Gross 
Vehicle Weight Rating) .............170 
calculating .......................170, 172 
definition .................................170 
driving with a heavy load ......170 
location ....................................170 
H 
Hazard flashers .........................178 
Head restraints ...................99, 104 
Headlamps ...................................47 
aiming ..................................49–50 
autolamp system .......................47 
bulb specifications ....................52 
daytime running lights .............48 
flash to pass ..............................48 
high beam ...........................13, 48 
replacing bulbs .........................53 
turning on and off ....................47 
warning chime ..........................14 
Heating ........................................37 
HomeLink universal 
transceiver (see 
Garage door opener) ............76–79 
Hood ..........................................218 
Index 
I 
Ignition .......................142, 257–258 
Infant seats 
(see Safety seats) .....................134 
Inspection/ 
maintenance (I/M) testing .......241 
Instrument panel 
cleaning ...................................213 
cluster ................................10, 214 
lighting up 
panel and interior .....................48 
J 
Jack ............................................188 
positioning ...............................188 
storage .....................................188 
Jump-starting your vehicle ......194 
K 
Keyless entry system 
autolock .....................................92 
locking and unlocking doors ....94 
programming entry code .........93 
Keys .......................................95–97 
key in ignition chime ...............14 
positions of the ignition .........142 
L 
Lamps 
autolamp system .......................47 
bulb replacement 
specifications chart ..................52 
cargo lamps ...............................48 
daytime running light ...............48 
fog lamps ...................................47 
headlamps .................................47 
267
headlamps, flash to pass ..........48 
instrument panel, dimming .....48 
interior lamps .....................51, 53 
replacing bulbs ...................52–57 
Lane change indicator 
(see Turn signal) ........................51 
Liftgate ........................................83 
Lights, warning and indicator ....10 
air bag ........................................12 
air suspension .........................152 
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ....11, 148 
anti-theft ...................................13 
brake ..........................................11 
charging system ........................12 
check coolant ............................13 
door ajar ....................................13 
engine oil pressure ...................13 
high beam .................................13 
low fuel ......................................12 
low washer fluid .......................12 
safety belt .................................11 
service engine soon ..................10 
turn signal indicator .................13 
Load limits .................................170 
GAWR ......................................170 
GVWR ......................................170 
trailer towing ..........................170 
Loading instructions .................171 
Locks 
autolock .....................................92 
childproof ..................................85 
doors ..........................................85 
Lubricant specifications ...255, 257 
Lumbar support, seats ...............99 
M 
Message center .....................62, 80 
english/metric button ...............80 
menu button .............................80 
Mirrors .........................................60 
automatic dimming 
rearview mirror .........................68 
fold away ...................................70 
heated ........................................69 
programmable memory ............91 
side view mirrors 
(power) ...............................68, 70 
Moon roof ....................................62 
Motorcraft parts ................237, 252 
N 
Navigation system .......................82 
O 
Octane rating ............................235 
Odometer .....................................17 
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................220 
Overdrive .....................................81 
P 
Panic alarm feature, remote 
entry system ................................88 
Parking brake ............................148 
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....252 
Pedals (see Power 
adjustable foot pedals) ...............70 
Power distribution box 
(see Fuses) ...............................184 
Power door locks ..................85, 92 
Power steering ..........................150 
fluid, checking and adding ....242 
fluid, refill capacity ................253 
Index 
268
fluid, specifications .........255, 257 
Preparing to 
drive your vehicle .....................152 
R 
Rear window defroster ...............46 
Relays ................................180, 188 
Remote entry system ...........86, 88 
illuminated entry ......................90 
locking/unlocking doors .....85–87 
panic alarm ...............................88 
replacement/additional 
transmitters ...............................89 
replacing the batteries .............88 
Reverse sensing system ...........157 
Roof rack .....................................84 
S 
Safety belts 
(see Safety restraints) ...............14 
112–113, 115–116, 118 
Safety defects, reporting ..........209 
Safety 
restraints ...........112–113, 115–118 
belt minder .............................120 
cleaning the 
safety belts ......................123, 215 
extension assembly ................123 
for adults .................113, 115–116 
for children .............................132 
lap belt ....................................118 
warning light 
and chime ............11, 14, 119–120 
Safety seats for children ..........134 
Seat belts 
(see Safety restraints) .............112 
Index 
Seats ............................................99 
child safety seats ....................134 
cleaning ...................................214 
climate control ........................102 
memory seat .....................91, 101 
SecuriLock passive 
anti-theft system ...................95–97 
Servicing your vehicle ..............217 
Snowplowing .................................7 
Spark plugs, 
specifications .............252, 257–258 
Special notice 
ambulance conversions ..............7 
utility-type vehicles ....................7 
Specification chart, 
lubricants ...........................255, 257 
Speed control ..............................71 
Speedometer ...............................17 
Starting your vehicle .......142–143, 
145 
jump starting ..........................194 
Steering 
speed sensitive .......................150 
Steering wheel 
controls ..........................60, 71, 75 
tilting .........................................60 
T 
Tachometer .................................17 
Tires ...........................188, 248–249 
changing ..........................188, 190 
checking the pressure ............249 
replacing ..................................250 
rotating ....................................250 
snow tires and chains ............251 
tire grades ...............................249 
269
treadwear ................................248 
Towing .......................................172 
recreational towing .................176 
trailer towing ..........................172 
wrecker ....................................199 
Traction-lok rear axle ...............152 
Transmission .............................153 
fluid, checking and adding 
(automatic) .............................244 
fluid, refill capacities ..............253 
lubricant specifications ..255, 257 
Trip odometer .............................17 
Turn signal ............................13, 51 
V 
Vehicle dimensions ...................258 
Vehicle Identification Number 
(VIN) ..........................................260 
Vehicle loading ..........................170 
Ventilating your vehicle ...........146 
W 
Warning chimes ...........................14 
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10 
Washer fluid ..............................220 
Water, Driving through .............169 
Windows 
power .........................................66 
rear wiper/washer .....................58 
Windshield washer fluid and 
wipers 
checking and adding fluid .....220 
checking and cleaning ..............59 
liftgate reservoir .....................220 
operation ...................................58 
replacing wiper blades .............59 
Wrecker towing .........................199 
Index 
270
271
272

More Related Content

PDF
02 expedition
PDF
02 ls
PDF
02 town car
PDF
02 sable
PDF
02 windstar
PDF
02 escape
PDF
02 villager
PDF
02 ranger
02 expedition
02 ls
02 town car
02 sable
02 windstar
02 escape
02 villager
02 ranger

What's hot (20)

PDF
02 excursion
PDF
03 excursion
PDF
03 marauder
PDF
03 ranger
PDF
03 escape
PDF
02 taurus
PDF
02 grand marquis
PDF
01 taurus
PDF
03 navigator
PDF
02 cougar
PDF
02 crown victoria
PDF
03 expedition
PDF
03 taurus
PDF
03 sable
PDF
02 continental
PDF
02 mustang
PDF
03 mountaneer
PDF
03 f series 650 750
PDF
02 escort
PDF
03 escort
02 excursion
03 excursion
03 marauder
03 ranger
03 escape
02 taurus
02 grand marquis
01 taurus
03 navigator
02 cougar
02 crown victoria
03 expedition
03 taurus
03 sable
02 continental
02 mustang
03 mountaneer
03 f series 650 750
02 escort
03 escort
Ad

Similar to 02 navigator (13)

PDF
03 ls
PDF
02 f series 650 750
PDF
00 f series 150
PDF
02 thunderbird
PDF
00 f series 250 350 450 550 lihgt super duty
PDF
03 explorer sport
PDF
01 explorer sport trac
PDF
03 focus
PDF
01 expedition
PDF
01 ranger
PDF
00 econoline e150 250-350-450
PDF
02 econoline e150 250-350-450
PDF
01 escape
03 ls
02 f series 650 750
00 f series 150
02 thunderbird
00 f series 250 350 450 550 lihgt super duty
03 explorer sport
01 explorer sport trac
03 focus
01 expedition
01 ranger
00 econoline e150 250-350-450
02 econoline e150 250-350-450
01 escape
Ad

More from rukford (20)

PDF
6.0 l dies
PDF
тнвдбошденсолука1
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru бесприборная диагностика неисправностей легковых автомобилей
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник по диагностике неисправностей автомобиля
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru техобслуживание, мелкий ремонт и покраска автомобиля свои...
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика2008
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru советы автомеханика техобслуживание, диагностика, ремонт
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика
PDF
97continental
PDF
Vnx.su аэростар 1986—1997 руководство по ремонту и схемы
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru eec iv-usa
PDF
Ford
PDF
дигностика двигателя. коды неисправностей. руководство 2003
PDF
97aerostar
PDF
97aspire
PDF
Vnx.su escort-i-orion-90-99
PDF
Vnx.su escort-90-pl
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru escort zetec-1-8-16-v
PDF
Vnx.su scorpio 1994-1998
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru systema upravleniy
6.0 l dies
тнвдбошденсолука1
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru бесприборная диагностика неисправностей легковых автомобилей
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник по диагностике неисправностей автомобиля
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru техобслуживание, мелкий ремонт и покраска автомобиля свои...
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика2008
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru советы автомеханика техобслуживание, диагностика, ремонт
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика
97continental
Vnx.su аэростар 1986—1997 руководство по ремонту и схемы
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru eec iv-usa
Ford
дигностика двигателя. коды неисправностей. руководство 2003
97aerostar
97aspire
Vnx.su escort-i-orion-90-99
Vnx.su escort-90-pl
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru escort zetec-1-8-16-v
Vnx.su scorpio 1994-1998
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru systema upravleniy

02 navigator

  • 1. Table of contents Introduction 4 Congratulations 4 Safety and environment protection 5 Symbol glossary 8 Instrument cluster 10 Warning and control lights 10 Gauges 15 Entertainment systems 18 AM/FM stereo cassette (CD changer compatible) 18 Rear seat controls 29 CD changer 32 Climate controls 37 Electronic automatic temperature control 37 Lights 47 Headlamps 47 Bulb replacement 52 Driver controls 58 Steering wheel adjustment 60 Power windows 66 Mirrors 68 Locks and security 85 Keys 85 Locks 85 Anti-theft system 86 1
  • 2. Table of contents Seating and safety restraints 99 Seating 99 Safety restraints 112 Air bags 124 Child restraints 132 Driving 142 Starting 142 Brakes 146 Transmission operation 153 Vehicle loading 170 Trailer towing 172 Recreational towing 176 Roadside emergencies 177 Hazard flasher switch 178 Fuses and relays 180 Changing tires 188 Jump starting 194 Wrecker towing 199 Customer assistance 200 The dispute settlement board 203 Utilizing the mediation/arbitration 206 Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada 206 Ordering additional owner’s literature 207 Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 209 Cleaning 210 Cleaning your vehicle 210 Underbody preservation 215 2
  • 3. Table of contents Maintenance and specifications 217 Hood 218 Engine compartment 219 Engine oil 220 Battery 223 Fuel information 232 Air filter(s) 246 Part numbers 252 Refill capacities 253 Lubricant specifications 255 Engine data 257 Vehicle dimensions 258 Accessories 261 Index 264 All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation. Copyright © 2001 Ford Motor Company 3
  • 4. Introduction The following warning may be required by California law: CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it. For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website: In the United States: www.ford.com In Canada: www.ford.ca In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx In Australia: www.ford.com.au Additional owner information is given in separate publications. This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available. Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle. 4
  • 5. Introduction Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter. SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed. Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol, it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind. Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol. BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE There are no particular guidelines for breaking-in your vehicle. During the first 1 600 km (1 000 miles) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is recommended to give the moving parts a chance to break in. 5
  • 6. Introduction SPECIAL NOTICES Emission warranty The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide. Special instructions For your safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. By operating other electronic equipment (e.g. mobile telephone without exterior aerial) electromagnetic fields can occur which can cause malfunctions of the vehicle electronics. Therefore you should observe the instructions of the equipment manufacturers. Please read the section Air bag in the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. Rear facing child or baby seats should NEVER be used in front of a passenger side air bag. 6
  • 7. Using your vehicle with a snowplow Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing. Using your vehicle as an ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. Introduction Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package. Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. 7
  • 8. These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front Air Bag-Side Child Seat Child Seat Installation Warning Child Seat Tether Anchorage Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System Brake Fluid - Non-Petroleum Based Traction Control Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe Windshield Defrost/Demist Rear Window Defrost/Demist Power Windows Front/Rear Power Window Lockout Introduction 8
  • 9. Vehicle Symbol Glossary Child Safety Door Lock/Unlock Introduction Interior Luggage Compartment Release Symbol Panic Alarm Engine Oil Engine Coolant Engine Coolant Temperature Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking, Flames, or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid Level MAX MIN Emission System Engine Air Filter Passenger Compartment Air Filter Jack Check fuel cap Low tire warning 9
  • 10. WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES L L H 00 H NAVIGATOR DOOR AJAR THEFT 20 40 60 80 40 60 20 F MPH km/h RPMX1000 P RNDD 2 SELECT RESET 4X4 LOW RANGE H E C LOW FUEL BRAKE CK SUSP SERVICE ENGINE SOON Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions. Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the respective system inspected immediately. Service engine soon Illuminates briefly to ensure the SERVICE system is functional. If it comes on ENGINE after the engine is started, one of SOON the engine’s emission control systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will usually be drivable and will not require towing. Light turns on solid: Temporary malfunctions may cause the light to illuminate. Examples are: 1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely tightened. These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with high quality fuel of the recommended octane and/or properly installing and securely tightening the fuel cap. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the light should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup Instrument cluster 10
  • 11. Instrument cluster followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required. If the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Light is blinking: Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. Brake system warning Illuminates if the parking brake is engaged. Also momentarily BRAKE illuminates at start up to ensure the ! circuit is functional. If the brake warning lamp does not illuminate at these times, or illuminates after releasing the parking brake, seek service immediately. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) Momentarily illuminates at start up to ensure the circuit is functional. If ABS the light does not illuminate, remains on or continues to flash, the ABS needs to be serviced (refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information). With the ABS light on, the ABS is disabled and normal braking is still functional. Safety belt Illuminates to remind you to fasten your safety belts. For more information, refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. 11
  • 12. Air bag readiness Illuminates to confirm that the air bags (front or side) are operational. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to flash or remains on, have the system serviced immediately. Charging system Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. Check air suspension Illuminates momentarily when the ignition is turned to the ON position and the engine is OFF. The light also illuminates when the air suspension switch is turned OFF or the air suspension system requires servicing. For information on the air suspension system, refer to the Driving chapter. Low fuel Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at, or near, empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter for more information). Low washer fluid Illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is low. CK SUSP LOW FUEL Instrument cluster 12
  • 13. Instrument cluster Oil pressure/Engine coolant Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is above the normal range or the engine oil pressure is below normal range. Check the engine oil and coolant level refer to Adding engine oil and Adding coolant in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. Turn signals Illuminates when the turn signals or the hazard lights are turned on. If the lights stay on continuously or flash faster, check for a burned-out bulb. High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on. Door ajar Illuminates when any door is open (or not fully closed). DOOR AJAR SecuriLockY anti-theft system Illuminates when the anti-theft alarm system is armed. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to flash THEFT or remains on, have the system serviced. Refer to SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system in the Locks and Security chapter. 13
  • 14. Four wheel drive low (if equipped) Illuminates when four-wheel drive LOW low is is engaged. If the light continues to flash have the system RANGE serviced. Four wheel drive indicator (if equipped) Illuminates when the four-wheel 4x4 drive is engaged. If the light continues to flash have the system serviced. Safety belt warning chime Sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belts. BeltMinder chime Sounds intermittently to remind you to fasten your safety belts. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning chime Sounds when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system (front or side airbags) has been detected. Have the supplemental restraint system inspected immediately. Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the key is removed from the ignition and the driver’s door is opened. Key-in-ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition and the driver’s door is opened. Instrument cluster 14
  • 15. GAUGES L H Instrument cluster 00 H NAVIGATOR DOOR AJAR THEFT 20 40 60 80 40 60 20 F MPH km/h RPMX1000 P RNDD 2 SELECT RESET 4X4 LOW RANGE H E C LOW FUEL SERVICE ENGINE SOON Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates the temperature of the engine coolant. At normal operating temperature, the needle remains within the normal area (the area between the “H” and “C”). If it enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine immediately and let the engine cool. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Steam and scalding liquid from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. L BRAKE CK SUSP C H This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level the gauge indication will not be accurate. If the gauge enters the red section, the oil pressure/engine coolant and Check Engine/Service Engine Soon indicators illuminate, refer to What you should know about fail-safe cooling in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. 15
  • 16. Engine oil pressure gauge Indicates engine oil pressure. At normal operating temperature, the needle will be in the normal range (the area between the “L” and “H”); if the needle goes below the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and switch off the engine immediately. Check the oil level. Add oil if needed (refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and specifications chapter). If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician. Battery voltage gauge Indicates battery voltage. If the pointer moves and stays outside the normal operating range (as indicated by the arrows), have the vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as possible. Fuel gauge Displays approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. When refueling the vehicle from empty indication, the amount of fuel that can be added will be less than the advertised capacity due to the reserve fuel. L H L H E F FUEL DOOR Instrument cluster 16
  • 17. Instrument cluster A minimum of 22.2 L (six gallons) must be added or removed from the fuel tank in order for the gauge to instantaneously update. If less than six gallons is the change, the gauge will take between five to twenty minutes to update. Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed. Odometer Registers the total kilometers (miles) of the vehicle. 20 Trip odometer Registers the kilometers (miles) of individual journeys. Press and release the reset button until a “T” appears in the display (this represents the trip mode). Press and hold the button for three seconds to reset. Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine. 40 60 80 MPH km/h 40 60 20 00 P RNDD 2 SELECT RESET NAVIGATOR RPMX1000 17
  • 18. PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE (CD CHANGER COMPATIBLE) SEL SEEK TUNE SCAN AUTO VOL PUSH ON REW 1 FF 2 SIDE 1.2 3 4 COMP 5 SHUFF 6 ALPINET AUDIO SYSTEM WITH AM/FM STEREO CASSETTE (CD CHANGER COMPATIBLE) BAL FADE MUTE AM FM EJ BASS TREB CD TAPE RDS VOL PUSH ON BASS TREB BAL FADE SEL CD TAPE EJ RDS DSP MUTE SEEK TUNE SCAN AUTO AM FM REW 1 FF 2 SIDE 1-2 3 4 COMP 5 SHUFF 6 Entertainment systems 18
  • 19. Entertainment systems Your audio system is equipped with selective lighting, a unique lighting strategy. This lighting feature is operable when the headlamps are illuminated. During the operation of any selected mode, lighting for the individual function controls will either illuminate or turn off. Those controls which have a function for the specific mode of operation selected will be lit, while the controls which have no function for that mode will be turned off. The Alpine Audio System is equipped with a delayed accessory feature. This feature enables the audio playing media to continue playing up to 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off, or until a door is opened. Volume/power control Press the control to turn the audio system on or off. Turn the control to raise or lower volume. VOL PUSH ON VOL PUSH ON If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. Speed sensitive volume (if equipped) With this feature, radio volume automatically changes slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise. The recommended level for speed sensitive volume is from level 1 through level 3. Level 0 turns the speed sensitive volume off and level 7 is the maximum setting. 19
  • 20. With the radio on, press and hold the volume control for five seconds, until the display reads SPEED VOL, then press: ² to increase volume compensation ² to decrease or shut off the volume compensation Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s bass output. Press the BASS control. Use the SEL control to increase or decrease the amount of bass. Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s treble output. Press the TREB control. Use the SEL control to increase or decrease the amount of treble. Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers. Press the BAL control. Use the SEL control to adjust the sound between the speakers. VOL PUSH ON SEL SEL BASS TREB SEL BASS TREB SEL BAL FADE Entertainment systems 20
  • 21. Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers. Press the FADE control. Use the SEL control to adjust the sound between the front and rear speakers. Entertainment systems SEL BAL FADE Seek function The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode (if equipped). Seek function in radio mode ² Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. SEEK ² Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. Seek function in tape mode ² Press to listen to the previous selection on the tape or return to the beginning of the current selection. SEEK ² Press to listen to the next selection on the tape. Seek function for CD changer ² Press to seek to the previous SEEK track of the current disc. If a selection has been playing for three seconds or more and you press , the CD changer will replay that selection from the beginning. ² Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will automatically replay. Scan function The scan function works in radio, tape or CD mode (if equipped). SCAN 21
  • 22. Entertainment systems Scan function in radio mode Press the SCAN control to activate scan mode and to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to disengage scan mode. Scan function in tape mode Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the tape. The tape will scan in a forward direction. At the end of the tape’s first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the tape. To stop on a particular selection, press the SCAN control again. Scan function in CD mode Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the CD. The CD will scan in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first track at the end of the CD. To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. AM/FM select The AM/FM select control works in radio, tape and CD modes (if AM FM equipped). AM/FM select in radio mode The AM/FM control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the control to toggle between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. AM/FM select in tape mode Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play. AM/FM select in CD mode Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play. Radio station memory preset The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 22
  • 23. Entertainment systems Setting memory preset stations 1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. 2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station. 3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected. REW 1 FF 2 SIDE 1.2 3 4 COMP 5 SHUFF 6 Autoset memory preset Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips when you travel between cities with different radio stations. Starting autoset memory preset 1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls. 2. Press the AUTO control. 3. When the first six strong stations AUTO are filled, the station stored in memory preset control 1 will start playing. If there are less than six strong stations available on the frequency band, the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong station available. To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set memory stations, press the control again. Setting the clock with radio data system (RDS) feature Press the RDS control until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is RDS DSP displayed. 23
  • 24. Entertainment systems Use the SEL control to manually set the time. ² Press to increase hours/minutes. ² Press to decrease SEL hours/minutes. Tune adjust The tune control works in radio or CD mode (if equipped). Tune adjust in radio mode ² Press to move to the next TUNE frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold the control to move through the frequencies quickly. ² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. Tune adjust for CD changer ² Press to select the previous TUNE disc in the CD changer. (Play will begin on the first track of the disc unless the CD changer is in shuffle mode.) Refer to Shuffle feature for more information. Hold the control to continue reversing through the discs. ² Press to select the next disc in the CD changer. Hold the control to fast-forward through the remaining discs. Tape/CD select ² To begin tape play (with a tape CD TAPE loaded into the audio system) while in the radio or CD mode, press the TAPE control. Press the button during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast forward function. 24
  • 25. ² To begin CD play (if equipped Entertainment systems with CD changer), ensure that the CDs are loaded. Press the CD control. The first track of the disc will begin playing. After that, CD play will begin where it stopped last. Do not insert any promotional (odd shaped or sized) discs, or discs with removable labels into the CD player as jamming may occur. Rewind The rewind control works in tape and CD modes. ² In tape mode, radio play will continue until rewind is stopped (with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached. ² In CD mode, pressing the REW control for less than three seconds results in slow rewind. Pressing the control for more than three seconds results in fast rewind. Fast forward The fast forward control works in tape and CD modes (if equipped). ² In the tape mode, tape direction will automatically reverse when the end of the tape is reached. ² In CD mode, pressing the control for less than three seconds results in slow forward action. Pressing the control for more than three seconds results in fast forward action. Tape direction select Press SIDE 1–2 to play the alternate side of a tape. Eject function Press the control to stop and eject a tape. CD TAPE REW 1 FF 2 SIDE 1-2 3 EJ 25
  • 26. DolbyT noise reduction Dolbyt noise reduction operates only in tape mode. Dolbyt noise reduction reduces the amount of 4 hiss and static during tape playback. Press the control to activate (and deactivate) Dolbyt noise reduction. The Dolbyt noise reduction system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyt and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolbyt Labratories Licensing Corporation. Compression feature Compression adjust brings soft and loud CD passages together for a COMP more consistent listening level. 5 Press the COMP control to activate and deactivate compression adjust. The effect of the feature varies with the music content. Shuffle feature The shuffle feature operates in CD mode and plays all tracks on the SHUFF current disc in random order. If 6 equipped with the CD changer, the shuffle feature continues to the next disc after all tracks are played. Press the SHUFFLE control to start this feature. Random order play will continue until the SHUFFLE control is pressed again. Mute mode Press the control to mute the playing media. Press the control again to return to the playing media. MUTE Entertainment systems 26
  • 27. Entertainment systems Radio data system (RDS) feature This feature allows your audio system to receive station identification or program type from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend FM radio broadcasters to use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired. Press the RDS control until RDS ON or RDS OFF appears in the display. Use the SEL control to enable (ON) or disable (OFF) the feature. With the RDS activated, press the SEL control to scroll through the following selections: Traffic ² Press the RDS control until TRAFFIC is displayed. ² Use the SEL control to select ON or OFF. With the feature on, use the SEEK or SCAN control to find a radio station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is broadcasting RDS data). Traffic information is not available in most U.S. markets. Program type ² Press the RDS control until the FIND program type is displayed. RDS SEL RDS SEL RDS 27
  • 28. ² Use the SEL control to select the program type. With the feature on, use the SEEK or SCAN control to find the desired program type from the following selections: ² Classic ² Country ² Info ² Jazz ² Oldies ² R & B ² Religious ² Rock ² Soft ² Top 40 Show ² With RDS activated, press the RDS control until SHOW is displayed. ² Use the SEL control to select TYPE (the display shows the program type), NAME (the display shows the call letters of the station) or NONE. SEL RDS SEL Digital signal processing (if equipped) The digital signal processing (DSP) feature allows you to change the RDS DSP signal mode to suit your listening tastes. These effects will change the sound quality and may need to be adjusted based upon the program material to suit your listening needs. Press the control to turn the feature on or off. Entertainment systems 28
  • 29. Use the SEL control to select the desired signal mode (the selected mode will appear in the display). The following signal modes can be selected: ² JAZZ CLUB—jazz club with clearly reflected sounds. Entertainment systems ² HALL—rectangular concert hall capacity of about 2 000 ² CHURCH—church with a high vault. ² STADIUM—outdoor stadium with a capacity of about 30 000. ² NEWS—“voice-only” type of sound with a limited audio band. Press the DSP control until one of the following appears: ² ALL SEATS ² DRIVER SEAT ² REAR SEATS Use the SELECT control to change the equalization to the desired mode. REAR SEAT CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) The Personal Audio System, allows front and middle seat passengers to listen to different media sources (radio, cassette or CD) simultaneously. However, the front and middle-seat passengers cannot listen to two different radio stations at the same time. SEL RDS DSP SEL - VOLUME + MODE SEEK MEMORY 29
  • 30. REW 1 FF 2 SIDE 1.2 3 4 To turn on the rear seat controls, press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 at the same time. The will appear in the display. Pressing 3 and 5 at the same time again will turn the rear seat controls off. If there is a discrepancy between the rear seat and the front audio controls, (such as both trying to listen to the same playing media), the front audio system will receive the desired selection. To activate the Personal Audio System, press the speaker/headphone control. Press the MODE control to change audio sources (for headphone mode only). Use the SEEK, VOLUME and MEMORY controls to make adjustments to the playing media. ADJUSTING THE VOLUME Press the + control to increase volume. Press the - control to decrease volume. COMP 5 SHUFF 6 - VOLUME + MODE SEEK MEMORY - VOLUME + MODE SEEK MEMORY Entertainment systems 30
  • 31. Entertainment systems From the rear seat controls, volume control can be set no higher than the current radio setting unless the speakers are turned off. Refer to Turning the rear speakers on and off. TURNING THE REAR SPEAKERS ON AND OFF Press to turn the rear speakers on or off. - VOLUME + MODE SEEK MEMORY USING HEADPHONES/PERSONAL AUDIO SYSTEM Plug a 3.5 mm headphone (not included) into the jack. Press the speaker on/off control to operate the headphones. DUAL PLAY illuminates in the radio display and the fade control is disabled. The rear speakers will cut out once the speaker on/off control is pressed. The front speaker will remain playing for the front passengers. Press the control again to deactivate the headphones (Personal Audio System). SINGLE PLAY illuminates in the radio display and the fade control is enabled. For the Personal Audio System to be enabled, the rear seat controls must be active and illuminated in the radio display. MODE SELECT Push the MODE control to toggle between AM, FM1, FM2, tape, CD or - VOLUME + MODE CD changer (if equipped). If in the Personal Audio System mode, SHARED illuminates in the radio SEEK MEMORY display when the front and rear modes are set to the same media. 31
  • 32. Entertainment systems MEMORY PRESET CONTROL Push the MEMORY control successively to allow rear seat passengers to scroll through the 6 memory presets in AM, FM1 or FM2. Push the MEMORY control in CD changer mode (if equipped) to advance to the next disc. SEEK FUNCTION ² In radio mode, press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. ² In radio mode, press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. ² In tape mode, use the SEEK function to access the next or previous selection. ² In CD mode (if equipped), use - VOLUME + MODE SEEK MEMORY - VOLUME + MODE SEEK MEMORY the SEEK function to access the next or previous selection. CD CHANGER (IF EQUIPPED) Your CD changer is located in the center console. Slide the door to access the CD changer magazine. 32
  • 33. Press to eject the magazine. 1. Pull the lever to remove a CD tray from the magazine. 2. Insert one disc into each CD tray of the magazine (up to 6 discs). Ensure that the label side is facing up. If you pull too hard on the disc holder, the disc holder may come completely out of the magazine. If this happens, reinsert the disc holder back into the magazine. 3. Insert each CD tray, with the disc loaded, all the way into the CD magazine. Entertainment systems 33
  • 34. Entertainment systems 4. Insert the CD magazine into the changer. 5. Slide the door to the left to close. Use only compact discs containing this mark. The magazine does not need to be full for the changer to operate. Radio power must be turned on to play the CDs in the changer. The magazine may be stored in the glove compartment when not being used. The CD magazine may be inserted or ejected with the radio power off. Keep the CD changer door closed. Coins and foreign objects will damage the CD player and void your audio system warranty. Do not insert any promotional (odd shaped or sized) discs, or discs with removable labels into the CD player as jamming may occur. TROUBLESHOOTING THE CD CHANGER (IF EQUIPPED) The laser beam used in the compact disc player is harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the case. If sound skips: ² You may be traveling on a rough road, playing badly scratched discs or the disc may be dirty. Skipping will not scratch the discs or damage the player. 34
  • 35. If your changer does not work, it may be that: ² A disc is already loaded where you want to insert a disc. ² The disc is inserted with the label surface downward. ² The disc is dusty or defective. ² A disc with format and dimensions not within industry standards is inserted. CLEANING COMPACT DISCS Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion. CD AND CD CHANGER CARE ² Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface. ² Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time. ² Do not insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine. Do not insert any promotional (odd shaped or sized) discs, or discs with removable labels into the CD player as jamming may occur. CLEANING CASSETTE PLAYER (IF EQUIPPED) Clean the tape player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 to 12 hours of play in order to maintain the best sound and operation. CASSETTE AND CASSETTE PLAYER CARE ² Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less. ² Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high humidity, extreme heat or extreme cold. Allow tapes that may have been exposed to extreme temperatures to reach a moderate temperature before playing. ² Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole and turning the hub. ² Remove loose labels before inserting tapes. ² Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being played. Entertainment systems 35
  • 36. Entertainment systems RADIO FREQUENCY INFORMATION The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) establish the frequencies AM and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. Allowable frequencies are: AM 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz FM 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz Not all frequencies are used in a given area. RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS Three factors can affect radio reception: ² Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is. The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km (24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their strength/volume relative to other stations. ² Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems. Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal. ² Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station frequency is displayed. The audio system automatically switches to single channel reception if it will improve the reception of a station normally received in stereo. AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTIES AND SERVICE Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified technician. 36
  • 37. Climate controls ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC) SYSTEM The EATC system will maintain a selected temperature and automatically control airflow. You can override automatic operation with any of the override controls, the fan speed control or the steering wheel controls (if equipped). Turning the EATC on Press AUTOMATIC, any of the override controls or the fan speed control. The EATC will only operate when the vehicle is running. Turning the EATC system off Press OFF. The outside temperature function will continue to operate until the ignition is turned off. OFF F AUTO OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF LO HI OFF F AUTO OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF LO HI OFF AUTOMATIC FLR • DEF DEF HI LO Automatic operation Press AUTOMATIC and select the desired temperature. The selected temperature and the word AUTO will appear in the display window. The EATC system will either heat or cool to achieve the selected temperature. The system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location and if outside air or recirculated air is required. Fan speed remains automatic unless the fan speed thumbwheel is turned or the steering wheel fan speed control (if equipped) is pressed. When in AUTOMATIC and weather conditions require heat, air will be sent to the floor. However, if the engine is not warm enough to provide 37
  • 38. Climate controls heat, the fan will be at a low speed and the air will be directed to the windshield. In approximately 31⁄2 minutes or less, the fan speed will start to increase and the airflow location will change to the floor area. If unusual conditions exist (i.e.-window fogging, etc.), the manual override controls allow you to select airflow locations and the fan control allows you to adjust fan speed as necessary. Temperature selection The display window indicates the °F selected temperature, function (AUTO or one of the override AUTO controls) and manual control of fan speed ( ) if automatic fan speed is not desired. To control the temperature, select any temperature between 18°C (65°F) and 29°C (85°F) by pressing the blue (cooler) or red (warmer) buttons. OUTSIDE TEMP MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR For continuous maximum cooling, push the blue button until 16°C (60°F) is shown in the display window. The EATC will continue maximum cooling (disregarding the displayed temperature) until a warmer temperature is selected by pressing the red control. For continuous maximum heating, push the red button until 32°C (90°F) is shown in the display window. The EATC will continue maximum heating (disregarding the displayed temperature) until a cooler temperature is selected by pressing the blue control. 38
  • 39. Climate controls Temperature conversion Press MAX A/C and DEF at the same time (for one second) to OFF switch between Fahrenheit and AUTO OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC Celsius. The English/Metric (E/M) control on the trip computer and message center (if equipped) will not change temperature display. Fan speed ( ) When AUTOMATIC is pressed, fan speed is adjusted automatically for existing conditions. You can override fan speed at any time. To control fan speed manually, use the thumbwheel to cancel automatic fan speed operation. Rotate the thumbwheel or press the steering wheel controls (if equipped) up for higher fan speed or down for lower fan speed. The display will show to indicate manual fan operation. MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF LO To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTOMATIC. Manual override controls The manual override controls allow you to determine where airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTOMATIC. HI °F AUTO OFF F AUTO OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF LO HI The air conditioning compressor can operate in all modes except FLOOR and VENT. It will also operate only when required when AUTOMATIC has been selected. However, the air conditioning will only function if the outside temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher. Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you have stopped the vehicle. 39
  • 40. Climate controls ² MAX A/C-Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. The temperature will display 16°C (60°F). To exit, press AUTOMATIC or any other override controls. MAX A/C is louder than normal A/C but more economical and will cool the inside of the vehicle faster. Airflow is from the instrument panel registers. This mode can also be used to prevent undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. ² VENT-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers. However, the air cannot be cooled below the outside temperature because the air conditioning does not operate in this mode. ² PNL²FLR-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. The air will be heated or cooled based on the temperature selection. For added customer comfort, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the instrument panel registers. ² FLOOR-Distributes outside air through the floor ducts. However, the air cannot be cooled below the outside temperature because the air conditioning does not operate in this mode. ² FLR²DEF-Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. The air will be heated or cooled based on the temperature selection. For added customer comfort, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the windshield defroster ducts. If the temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. ² DEF -Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. If the outside air temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. ² OFF-Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. For short periods of time only, use this mode to reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. 40
  • 41. Displaying outside temperature Press OUTSIDE TEMP to display the outside air temperature. It will be displayed until OUTSIDE TEMP is pressed again. Climate controls OUTSIDE TEMP MAX A/C VENT PNL • FLR If the selected temperature is changed while the outside temperature is displayed, the new temperature will be displayed for four seconds after it is changed, then the outside temperature will return to the window. If a manual override function is selected while the outside temperature is displayed, the new function will be displayed for four seconds after it is changed, then the outside temperature will return to the window along with the override selection. The outside temperature reading is most accurate when the vehicle is moving. Higher readings may be obtained when the vehicle is not moving. The readings that you get may not agree with temperatures given on the radio due to differences in vehicle and station locations. Operating tips ² In humid weather conditions, place the climate control system in DEF before driving. This will reduce fogging on your windshield. Once the windshield has been cleared, operate the climate control system as desired. ² To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in cold weather conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF or MAX A/C position. ² To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in warm weather conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF position. ² Under normal weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control system should be left in any position other than MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the outside air inlet duct. 41
  • 42. Climate controls ² Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control system should be left in the OFF position when the vehicle is parked. This allows the climate control system to be free from contamination of outside pollutants. ² If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during warm weather conditions, the air conditioner will perform more efficiently in cooling the vehicle if driven for two or three minutes with the windows open. This will force most of the hot, stale air out of the vehicle. Once the vehicle has been “aired out”, operate the climate control system as desired. ² Don’t put objects under the front seat that will interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. ² Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. ² Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can block airflow and reduce your ability to see through your windshield. Avoid placing small objects on top of the instrument panel. These objects may fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow, in addition to damaging the climate control system. To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather conditions: 1. Select PNL ² FLR 2. Set the temperature control to full heat 3. Set the fan speed control to HI 4. Direct the outer panel vents towards the side windows. To increase airflow to the outer panel vents, close the central panel vents. Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. REAR CONSOLE CLIMATE CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) Depending on the equipment package of your vehicle, the rear console may be equipped with audio/climate controls. The instrument panel climate controls must be on in order for the rear console climate controls to work. 42
  • 43. Your climate controls will either be located on the rear of the center console, or located in the overhead console. Climate controls COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR - VOLUME + MODE SEEK MEMORY OFF LO HI OFF LO HI COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR Turn the air distribution control to the desired airflow position. Turn the fan speed control to the desired position. AUXILIARY A/C-HEATER CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) Depending on your equipment package, your vehicle may be equipped with auxiliary A/C-heater controls. The auxiliary A/C-heater feature provides increased capacity to quickly heat or cool the vehicle. Besides the driver’s control panel for the front seat occupants, the second row auxiliary A/C-heater controls allow the rear passengers to control the temperature in the rear of the vehicle through a second control panel above the second row, or in the floor console. 43
  • 44. If your vehicle is equipped with auxiliary A/C controls, they may be located in the floor console, or located in the overhead console. If your vehicle is equipped with a moon roof and a navigation system, you will not have a front auxiliary A/C- heater control console. All operation is obtained through the rear auxiliary A/C-heater control console. HI OFF REAR WARM COOL PANEL FLOOR Climate controls 44
  • 45. Climate controls In order for the auxiliary A/C-heater controls (if equipped) to function, the driver’s auxiliary A/C-heater control must be set to REAR, unless your vehicle is equipped with a moonroof and a navigation system. In which case, the rear auxiliary A/C-heater control console serves as the main control for the auxiliary climate control system. The instrument panel climate controls must be on in order for the OFF F auxiliary A/C-heater to operate. AUTO OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC When the auxiliary A/C-heater control is set to FLOOR, airflow only occurs from the third row seat floor vent located in the driver’s side rear quarter trim panel. When the auxiliary A/C-heater control is set to PANEL, airflow occurs from the overhead 2nd and 3rd row vents. Turn the fan speed control knob to the desired speed. Turn the temperature control to the desired temperature. You can get warm or cool air through either the overhead registers or floor vent by turning the auxiliary mode selector: ² Far left for airflow to the overhead registers. ² Far right for airflow to the rear floor vent. ² Anywhere between PANEL and FLOOR to vary airflow between the outlets. COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR OFF REAR HI VENT PNL • FLR FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF HI MAX A/C LO OFF LO HI COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR 45
  • 46. Climate controls REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER The rear defroster control is located on the instrument panel. Press the rear defroster control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. ² A small LED will illuminate when the rear defroster is activated. The ignition must be in the ON position to operate the rear window defroster. The defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turned to the OFF position. To manually turn off the defroster before 10 minutes have passed, push the control again. 46
  • 47. HEADLAMP CONTROL Rotate the headlamp control to the first position to turn on the parking lamps. Rotate to the second position to also turn on the headlamps. Foglamp control (if equipped) The headlamp control also operates the foglamps. The foglamps can be turned on only when the headlamp control is in the position and the high beams are not turned on. Pull headlamp control towards you to turn foglamps on. The foglamp indicator light will illuminate. Autolamp control The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on-off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control. The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for approximately 20 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to OFF. ² To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise. A A A Lights ² To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to OFF. ² Foglamps are not controlled by the autolamps. In order to turn on the foglamps, you must turn the lamp switch to the position and pull toward you for foglamps. 47
  • 48. Lights Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped) Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate: ² the ignition must be in the ON position and ² the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking lamps position. Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system does not activate with your tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision. High beams ² Push forward to activate. ² Pull toward you to deactivate. Flash to pass Pull toward you to activate and release to deactivate. PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel during headlamp and parklamp operation. ² Rotate up to brighten. ² Rotate down to dim. ² Rotate to full up position (past detent) to turn on interior lamps. ² Rotate to full down position (past detent) to turn off interior lamps. 48
  • 49. Lights AIMING THE HEADLAMPS Your vehicle is equipped with a Vehicle Headlamp Aim Device (VHAD) on each headlamp. Each headlamp may be properly aimed in the vertical (up/down) and the horizontal (left/right) directions using your VHAD system. The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. A bubble (vertical indicator) that is not centered between the two red lines does not necessarily indicate out-of-aim headlamps. If your vehicle is not positioned on a level surface, the slope will be included in the vertical indication. Therefore, vertical and horizontal headlamp adjustment should be performed only when the beam direction appears to be incorrect. You will need one 4 mm wrench or socket to make the adjustments. If the vehicle has been in an accident, the vehicle’s front structure should be properly aligned before aiming the headlamps. Horizontal aim adjustment 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 2. With the hood open, locate the horizontal indicator and the adjusting screw. They are located below the viewing hole at the rear of the headlamp assembly. 3. Use a 4 mm wrench or socket to turn the horizontal adjusting screw until the “0” mark on the yellow dial lines up with the reference mark on the marker (as shown) when viewed directly from above. D U 49
  • 50. Turning the horizontal adjusting screw in the direction of the arrow changes the horizontal aim as shown. Vertical aim adjustment 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 2. With the hood open, locate the bubble level and the vertical adjustment screw. The adjustment screw is located on the outboard side of the headlamp. D U 3. The “U” and “D” on the bubble indicate the directional change (up or down) of the vertical aim. 4. Use a 4 mm wrench or socket to turn the vertical adjusting screw until the bubble is centered between the two red lines which represents the “0” mark position. When the horizontal and vertical indicators are set to the “0” mark, the headlamp has been properly aimed. D U Lights 50
  • 51. TURN SIGNAL CONTROL ² Push down to activate the left turn signal. ² Push up to activate the right turn signal. INTERIOR LAMPS Map lamps To turn on the map lamps, press the control next to each lamp. Rear dome lamp The dome lamp lights when: ² any door is opened. ² the instrument panel dimmer switch is held up until the courtesy lamps come on. ² any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is OFF. VENT ROOF VENT Lights With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control. 51
  • 52. Lights BULBS Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of the following lamps frequently: ² Headlamps ² Foglamps ² High-mount brakelamp ² Brakelamps ² Turn signals ² License plate lamp ² Tail lamps ² Back-up lamps Do not remove lamp bulbs unless they can be replaced immediately with new ones. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, contaminants may enter the lamp housings and affect lamp performance. Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. Function Number of bulbs Trade number Headlamps 2 9007 Front park/turn lamps 2 3157 AK (amber) Front sidemarker 2 194 AK (amber) Foglamps 2 800 Dome/map lamps 2 579 Turn/tail/brake lamps 2 3157K Liftgate lamp 2 916 Backup lamp 2 579 License lamp 2 168 Running board lamp (if equipped) 2 168 High-mount brake lamp See a dealer or qualified service technician All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted. To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer 52
  • 53. Replacing the interior bulbs Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently: ² interior overhead lamp ² map lamp For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. Replacing headlamp bulbs 1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position. 2. Open the hood. 3. At the back of the headlamp, remove the headlamp assembly retainers by pushing rearward and pulling up. 4. Pull the headlamp assembly forward slightly to expose the electrical connectors. 5. Rotate the bulb cover counterclockwise and remove. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward. Lights 53
  • 54. Lights 7. Remove the bulb retainer ring by turning it counterclockwise, then slide the ring off the plastic base. 8. Without turning, carefully pull the bulb out of the headlamp assembly. Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. 9. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly. When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, push the bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp assembly. 10. To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse order. Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs 1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position. 2. Open the hood. 54
  • 55. 3. At the back of the headlamp, remove the headlamp assembly retainers by pushing rearward and pulling up. 4. Pull the headlamp assembly forward slightly to expose the electrical connectors. Lights 5. Release clip and disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb socket. 6. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove. 7. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb. 8. To complete installation of the parking lamp/turn signal assembly, follow the removal procedures in reverse order. Replacing foglamp bulbs The halogen bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. 1. Rotate the foglamp bulb counterclockwise and remove from foglamp (the rear side of the foglamp is shown). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the foglamp bulb. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the new foglamp bulb. 4. Install the foglamp bulb in foglamp by rotating clockwise. 55
  • 56. Lights Replacing tail lamp bulbs 1. Open the liftgate to expose the lamp assembly screws. 2. Remove the two screws from the lamp assembly. 3. Carefully pry the lamp assembly away from the vehicle to expose the bulb socket. 4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly. 5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb. 6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise. 7. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws. Replacing liftgate tail lamp bulb 1. Raise the liftgate and remove the lamp assembly nuts. 2. Carefully pull the lamp assembly outward to expose the electrical connector. 56
  • 57. 3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise counterclockwise and remove. 4. Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb. 5. To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse order. Replacing license plate lamp bulbs To change the license plate bulbs: 1. Remove screw and the license plate lamp assembly from liftgate. 2. Remove the bulb socket from lamp assembly by turning counterclockwise. 3. Carefully pull the bulb out from the socket and push in the new bulb. 4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning clockwise. 5. Install the lamp assembly on liftgate with screw. Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. Replacing running board lamp bulbs For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. Lights 57
  • 58. Driver controls WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS Rotate the windshield wiper control to the desired interval, low or high speed position. The bars of varying length are for intermittent wipers. When in this position rotate the control upward for fast intervals and downward for slow intervals. Push (tap) the end of the stalk briefly for a single swipe (no wash). Push and hold for three swipes with wash. Push and hold for a longer wash (up to ten seconds). Rear window wiper/washer controls For rear wiper operation, rotate the rear window wiper and washer control to the desired position. Select: INT 1 — 3.5 second interval rear wiper. INT 2 — 10.5 second interval rear wiper. OFF — Rear wiper and washer off. For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer control to either position. From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT2 or OFF position. Speed dependent wipers When the windshield wiper control is set on the intermittent settings, speed-sensitive front wipers automatically adjust as the vehicle’s speed changes. 58
  • 59. Driver controls Windshield wiper blades Check the wiper blades at least twice a year or when they seem less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. Checking the wiper blades If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents. Changing the wiper blades To replace the wiper blades: 1. Pull the wiper arm away from the windshield and lock into the service position. 2. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm. Push the lock pin manually to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm. 3. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard. Rear window wiper blades Refer to Windshield wiper blades in this section for more information on rear wiper blades. 59
  • 60. Driver controls TILT STEERING Pull the tilt steering control toward you to move the steering wheel up or down. Hold the control while adjusting the wheel to the desired position, then release the control. Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED) To turn on the visor mirror lamps, lift the mirror cover open. OVERHEAD CONSOLE The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to your option package. 60
  • 61. Forward storage bin (if equipped) Press the release control to open the storage compartment. The door will open slightly and can be moved to full open. The storage compartment may be used to secure sunglasses or a similar object. Driver controls Installing a garage door opener (if equipped) The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of aftermarket garage door openers: ² Place Velcro hook onto back side of aftermarket transmitter opposite of actuator control. ² Place transmitter into storage compartment, control down. ² Place the provided height adaptors onto the back of the storage bin door as needed. ² Press the storage compartment door to activate the transmitter. 61
  • 62. Driver controls One-touch moon roof (if equipped) ² Press and release the rear portion of the moon roof control to open. ² Press and hold (as desired) the front portion of the moon roof control to close. ² To halt motion at any point during one-touch opening, press the control a second time. ² The moon roof has a sliding shade that can be manually opened or closed when the glass panel is shut. ² To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the vehicle. VENT ROOF VENT Do not let children play with the moon roof. They may seriously hurt themselves. Trip computer For information on the trip computer, refer to Trip computer this chapter. Electronic compass (if equipped) The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antennas. Magnetic or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy. Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration adjustment. Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment. 62
  • 63. Compass zone adjustment 1. Determine which magnetic zone you are in for your geographic location by referring to the zone map. 1 Driver controls 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 15 13 12 11 2. Locate the compass module mounted on the center rear view mirror post. 3. Turn ignition to the ON position. 4. Press and hold the RESET button on top of the compass module until the message display in the trip computer shows the current zone setting. 5. Release the RESET button. 6. Press the RESET button until the correct zone is displayed on the trip computer. Compass calibration adjustment Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut. 1. Start the vehicle. 63
  • 64. Driver controls 2. Press and hold the RESET button on the compass module until CAL indicator is displayed in the trip computer. 3. Release pressure from the RESET button. 4. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) until the CAL indicator turns off. This will take three to five circles to complete calibration. 5. The compass is now calibrated. Power quarter rear windows (if equipped) ² With out a moon roof ² With a moon roof VENT VENT MODE E/M RESET VENT ROOF VENT Press the portion of the VENT control to open the power rear quarter windows. Press the portion of the VENT control to close the power rear quarter windows. 64
  • 65. CLOCK Press H to set the hour. Press M to set the minute. Driver controls AUXILIARY POWER POINT Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. The auxiliary power point is located on the instrument panel. Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter. Use the power point. 65
  • 66. Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. A second auxiliary power point is located on the lower rear side of the console. The power point is accessible from the rear seats. POWER WINDOWS Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows. ² Press the top portion of the rocker switch to close. AUTO Driver controls 66
  • 67. ² Press the bottom portion of the rocker switch to open. One touch down ² Press AUTO completely down and release quickly. The driver’s window will open fully. Depress again to stop window operation. One touch down can be deactivated during operation by pushing down on the top part of the driver power window control. Driver controls AUTO AUTO Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows. To lock out all the window controls WINDOW LOCK except for the driver’s press the left side of the control. Press the right side to restore the window controls. Accessory delay With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until any door is opened. 67
  • 68. MIRRORS Automatic dimming rear view mirror Your vehicle is equipped with an inside rear view mirror with an auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from the normal state to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach the inside rear view mirror. When the inside rear view mirror detects bright light from in front of or behind the vehicle, the inside rear view mirror will automatically adjust (darken) to minimize glare. Do not block the sensor on the backside of the inside rear view mirror since this may impair proper system performance. Press the control to turn the mirror OFF or AUTO. The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the OFF AUTO vehicle is placed in R (Reverse)(when the mirror is on) to ensure a bright clear view when backing up. Power side view mirrors The ignition can be in any position to adjust the power side view mirrors. To adjust your mirrors: 1. Select L to adjust the left mirror or R to adjust the right mirror. MIRRORS L R Driver controls 68
  • 69. 2. Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror. Driver controls MIRRORS L R 3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place. 4. Adjust spotter mirrors (if equipped) manually. Heated outside mirrors Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice, mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated. Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors. Signal mirrors (if equipped) When the turn signal is activated, the outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink red. This provides an additional warning to other drivers that your vehicle is about to turn. 69
  • 70. Driver controls Fold-away mirrors Pull the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space, like an automatic car wash. Power fold mirrors (if equipped) Press the control to retract or extend the outside rear view mirrors. If the mirrors are extended and are pushed-in manually, they will deploy back out after a short period of time; likewise, if they are retracted and pulled-out manually, they will deploy back in. Use caution in certain instances (i.e. automatic car washes) in order to avoid damage to the mirrors. POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS The accelerator and brake pedal PEDALS should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P(Park) position. Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal toward you or away from you. The adjustment allows for approximately 76 mm (3 inches) of maximum travel. Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on pedals or while the vehicle is moving. 70
  • 71. SPEED CONTROL To turn speed control on ² Press ON. Vehicle speed cannot be controlled until the vehicle is traveling at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral) with the speed control on. Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. To turn speed control off ² Press OFF or ² Turn off the vehicle ignition. Once speed control is switched off, the previously programmed set speed will be erased. Driver controls 71
  • 72. Driver controls To set a speed ² Press SET ACCEL. For speed control to operate, the speed control must be ON and the vehicle speed must be greater than 48 km/h (30 mph). If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle speed may vary momentarily slower or faster than the set speed. This is normal. Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it increases above the set speed on a downhill. If your vehicle speed is faster than the set speed while driving on a downhill, you may want to shift to the next lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce your vehicle speed. If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. This is normal. Pressing RESUME will re-engage it. Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. 72
  • 73. To set a higher set speed ² Press and hold SET ACCEL. Release the control when the desired vehicle speed is reached or ² Press and release SET ACCEL to operate the Tap-Up function. Each press will increase the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or ² Accelerate with your accelerator pedal. When the desired vehicle speed is reached, press and release SET ACCEL. You can accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any time during speed control usage. Releasing the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to the previously programmed set speed. To set a lower set speed ² Press and hold COAST. Release the control when the desired speed is reached or ² Press and release COAST to operate the Tap-Down function. Each press will decrease the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or Driver controls 73
  • 74. Driver controls ² Depress the brake pedal. When the desired vehicle speed is reached, press SET ACCEL. To disengage speed control ² Depress the brake pedal. Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previously programmed set speed. 74
  • 75. Pressing OFF will erase the previously programmed set speed. To return to a previously set speed ² Press RESUME. For RESUME to operate, the vehicle speed must be faster than 48 km/h (30 mph). Driver controls STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control features. 75
  • 76. Radio control features ² Press BAND/MODE to select AM, FM1, FM2, TAPE or CD (if equipped). In Radio mode: ² Press MEM/NEXT to select a preset station from memory. In Tape mode: ² Press MEM/NEXT to listen to the next selection on the tape. In CD mode: ² Press MEM/NEXT to listen to the next track on the disc. In any mode: ² Press VOL up or down to adjust the volume. Climate control features ² Press TEMP up or down to adjust temperature. ² Press FAN up or down to adjust fan speed. HOMELINKT UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (IF EQUIPPED) The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver, located on the driver’s visor, provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gates, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting. When programming your HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver, to a garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential harm or damage. NEXT MODE Driver controls 76
  • 77. Driver controls Do not use the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information on this matter, call toll-free: 1–800–355–3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink.jci.com. Programming Do not program the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver with the vehicle parked in the garage. 1. Prepare for programming the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver by erasing the three factory default codes by holding down the two outside buttons until the red light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Release both buttons. 2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter 5–14 cm (2–5 inches) away from the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver surface (located on your visor) while keeping the red light in view. 3. Using both hands simultaneously press and hold the hand-held transmitter button and the desired HomeLinkt button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace step 3 with the procedure in the “Canadian Programing” section. 4. The red light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both buttons when the red light flashes rapidly. 5. Follow steps 2 through 4 to program the remaining two buttons. If you do not successfully program the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver after repeated attempts, refer to Rolling code programing which follows, or call toll-free customer assistance: 1–800–355–3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink.jci.com. 77
  • 78. Driver controls Canadian Programming During programming, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after two seconds which may not be long enough to program the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver. To program your hand-held transmitters: ² Continue to hold the button on the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver. ² Press and re-press the hand-held transmitter button every two seconds until the red light changes from a slow to a fast flash. Operating the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver Once programmed, the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver can be used in place of hand-held transmitters. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate HomeLinkt button (the red light will illuminate, indicating the signal is being transmitted). Rolling code programming Rolling code garage door openers (or other rolling code devices) which are “code protected” and manufactured after 1996, may be determined by the following: ² Reference the device owner’s manual for verification ² The hand-held transmitter appears to program the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver but does not activate the device. ² Press and hold the trained HomeLinkt button. The device has the rolling code feature if the indicator light flashes rapidly and then turns solid after two seconds. After completing the “Programming” functions, follow these steps to train a garage door opener with the rolling code feature: 1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor head unit. Refer to the garage door opener manual or call 1–800–355–3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink.jci.com. if there is difficulty locating the training button. 78
  • 79. Driver controls 2. Press the training button on the garage door motor head unit (which will activate the “training” light). 3. Press and release the programmed HomeLinkt button. Press and release the HomeLinkt button a second time to complete the training process. (Some garage door openers may require this procedure to be done a third time to complete the training.) The 2nd or 3rd press from step 3 will activate the door. The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver has now been trained to the receiver. The remaining two buttons may now be programmed if this has not previously been done. Erasing HomeLinkT buttons Individual buttons cannot be erased, however, to erase the three programmed buttons: 1. Hold down the two outside buttons until the red light begins to flash after 20 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button To program a device to HomeLinkt using a HomeLinkt button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button. Do NOT release until step 4 has been completed. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 5–14 cm (2 to 5 inches) away from the HomeLinkt surface. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. The HomeLinkt indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons. 79
  • 80. Driver controls The previous device has now been erased and the new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLinkt button that has just been programmed. TRIP COMPUTER The trip computer tells you about the condition of your vehicle through a constant monitor of vehicle systems. You may select display features on the trip computer for a display of status. The appearance of your vehicle’s trip computer may differ depending on your vehicle’s option package, but the functions are the same. The trip computer only works when the ignition is in the ON position. Trip computer features follow: Selectable features English/metric display Press this control to change the trip computer display from metric to English units. Press again to change from English to metric units. Mode control Each press of the MODE control will display a different feature as follows: Fuel range. This displays the approximate number of kilometers (miles) left to drive before the fuel tank is empty. The indicated distance to empty may be inaccurate: ² with sustained, drastic changes in fuel economy (such as trailer towing), but will eventually recover. ² if the vehicle is started while parked on an incline. ² if less than 27 liters (6 gallons) of fuel is added to the fuel tank. 80
  • 81. Driver controls The fuel range function will flash for 5 seconds when you have approximately the following distance you can drive before the fuel tank is empty: ² 80 km (50 miles) ² 40 km (25 miles) ² 16 km (10 miles) Average fuel economy. The display will indicate the vehicle’s average fuel economy in liters/100 km (or miles/gallon) since last reset. ² To reset the average fuel economy: 1. Press the MODE control repeatedly until AVG F/ECON is displayed (no other display is resettable). 2. Press the E/M and MODE controls simultaneously. Compass display. Refer to Electronic compass in the Controls and features chapter for more information. Off. In this mode the display will go blank indicating the system is off. OVERDRIVE CONTROL Activating overdrive (Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through all available gears. Deactivating overdrive Press the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) located on the end of the gearshift lever. The OVERDRIVE Transmission Control Indicator Light (TCIL) (the word OFF) will illuminate on the end of the gearshift lever. The transmission will operate in all gears except overdrive. 81
  • 82. Driver controls To return to normal overdrive mode, press the Transmission Control Switch again. The TCIL (the word OVERDRIVE OFF OFF) will no longer be illuminated. When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode. For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission Operation section of the Driving chapter. CENTER CONSOLE Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These include: ² Utility compartment ² Cupholders ² Coin holder slots ² Tissue box holder ² Compact disc changer (if equipped) ² Cellular phone (if equipped) Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you in a collision. Navigation system (if equipped) The navigation system is located in the center console. For information on operating the navigation system, refer to the Navigation System Supplement. For any other question or problems, contact Navigation Technologies at: 1–888–NAV-MAPS (1–888–628–6277), (800#) 740 East Arques Avenue Sunnyvale, CA 94086–3734 www.navtech.com Cellular phone Refer to the “Cellular phone guide” for instructions on operation. 82
  • 83. Driver controls Rear center console features (if equipped) The rear center console incorporates the following features: ² utility compartment ² cupholders POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT Position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the pointed end of the retention post and rotate forward to lock in. Make sure that the mat does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator or the brake pedal. To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. LIFTGATE To open the rear window, pull the left side of the liftgate handle. To open the liftgate, pull the right side of the liftgate handle. ² Do not open the liftgate or liftgate glass in a garage or other enclosed area with a low ceiling. If the liftgate glass is raised and the liftgate is also opened, both liftgate and glass could be damaged against a low ceiling. ² Do not leave the liftgate or liftgate glass open while driving. Doing so could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle. 83
  • 84. Driver controls Make sure that the liftgate door and/or window are closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate door or window open, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle. LUGGAGE RACK (IF EQUIPPED) The rear cross-bar can be adjusted to fit the item being carried. The front cross-bar does not move. To adjust cross-bar position: 1. Loosen the thumbscrews at both ends of the rear cross-bar. 2. Slide the cross-bar to the desired location. 3. Tighten the thumbscrews at both ends of the cross-bar. Load luggage at the front cross-bar and adjust the rear cross-bar as necessary. ² Do not exceed 90.7 kg (200 lb) of luggage if the weight is placed directly on the cross-bars. ² Do not exceed 68 kg (150 lb) if the weight is resting directly on the roof. 84
  • 85. KEYS The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement keys are available from your dealer. You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency. Refer to SecuriLocky Passive Anti-Theft System for more information. POWER DOOR LOCKS If the door does not unlock when the U is pressed, see Power door disable feature in the Remote entry section in this chapter. Press U to unlock all doors and L to lock all doors. Locks and security U L Childproof door locks When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside. The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the doors are unlocked. The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door. Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors. Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock. Move control down to disengage childproof locks. 85
  • 86. Locks and security REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to: ² unlock the vehicle doors without a key. ² lock all the vehicle doors without a key. ² activate the personal alarm. The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in the LOCK position. This system will disable the power door lock controls. These will not work until the vehicle is disarmed. Refer to Power door locks in the Driver Controls chapter for more information. If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle, ensure ALL key fobs (remote entry transmitters) are brought to the dealership, to aid in troubleshooting. Unlocking the doors Press this control to unlock the driver door. The interior lamps and running board lamps will illuminate. The memory mirrors/seat will also be moved to position 1, 2 or 3 depending upon which remote entry transmitter (1, 2 or 3) is used. Press the control a second time within three seconds to unlock all doors. 86
  • 87. Locks and security Locking the doors Press this control to lock all doors. The doors will lock and the lamps will flash. To confirm doors are closed and locked, press this control a second time within three seconds. The door(s) will lock again, the horn will chirp once and the lamps will flash. If any of the doors are open or ajar, the horn will make two quick chirps, reminding you to properly close the doors. Power door lock disable feature This feature will help protect your vehicle from unauthorized entry. The UNLOCK function on the power door switch will not operate with the ignition OFF and twenty seconds after the doors are closed and electronically locked by the key fob, key pad, or power door switch (if pressed while the door was open). The UNLOCK function will operate again after you unlock the vehicle using the key fob or key pad, turn the ignition to ON, or open the door from inside of the vehicle. 87
  • 88. Locks and security Deactivating/activating power door lock disable feature 1. Turn the ignition key to ON, then press the UNLOCK button 3 times. 2. Turn the ignition key to OFF, then press the UNLOCK button 3 times. U L 3. Turn the ignition key to ON, within five seconds press the LOCK button 2 times. The user should receive 2 horn chirps to indicate the system has been disabled or 2 chirps followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled. Pressing the power door LOCK button 2 times again will toggle the trim switch inhibit states. Turn ignition to OFF to exit programming. Sounding a panic alarm Press this control to activate the alarm. To deactivate the alarm, press the control again or turn the ignition to ACC or ON. Panic alarm will only operate with the ignition in the OFF position. Replacing the battery The remote transmitter is powered by one coin type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent. Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 10 meters (33 feet) away from your vehicle. A decrease in operating range can be caused by: ² weather conditions ² nearby radio towers ² structures around the vehicle ² other vehicles parked next to the vehicle 88
  • 89. Locks and security To replace the battery: 1. Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter near the key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER APART. 2. Place the positive (+) side of new battery in the same orientation. Refer to the diagram inside the transmitter unit. 3. Snap the two halves back together. Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement. Replacing lost transmitters If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove it from the vehicle’s memory, or you would like to purchase additional remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle: ² Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your dealer for programming, or ² Perform the programming procedure yourself Programming remote transmitters It is necessary to have all (maximum of four — original and/or new) of your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure. 89
  • 90. Locks and security To program the transmitters yourself: ² Place the key in the ignition and turn from 2 (LOCK) to 3 (OFF) and cycle between 3 (OFF) and 4(ON) eight times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds) with the eighth turn ending in the 4 (ON) position. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that programming mode has been entered. ² Within 20 seconds, program a 3 2 1 5 4 remote transmitter by pressing any button on a transmitter. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that the remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 seconds pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.) ² Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has been programmed. ² When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn the ignition to 3 (OFF). Again the doors will lock/unlock to confirm programming has been completed. Illuminated entry The illuminated entry system will turn on the interior lights when the remote transmitter unlock control is pressed. The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or if the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or after 25 seconds of illumination. The inside lights will not turn off if: ² they have been turned on with the dimmer control or ² any door is open The battery save feature will turn off the interior lights 45 minutes after the last door is closed, even if the dimmer control is on. 90
  • 91. Locks and security Memory seat/mirrors/adjustable pedal feature The memory feature allows automatic positioning of the driver seat, side mirrors and adjustable pedals to three programmable positions. ² To program position one, move the driver seat, both side mirrors, and adjustable pedals to the desired positions. Press the SET control. The SET control indicator light will briefly illuminate. While the light is illuminated, press control 1. ² To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control 2. ² To program position three, repeat the previous procedure but press controls 1 and 2 simultaneously. The memory feature also allows you to recall previously stored positions with your remote transmitter(s). Up to three remote transmitters can be activated to utilize the memory recall positions. Press the memory feature control to move to the previously stored seat/mirror/adjustable pedal positions. Activating/deactivating the memory feature on your remote transmitter The memory feature from the remote transmitter can be turned off/on, however, the memory control buttons will continue to operate. Before following the procedure, make sure that the ignition is OFF and all doors and the liftgate window are closed. You must complete steps 1–7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must wait 30 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 2. Press the power door unlock control three times. 3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. 4. Press the power door unlock control three times. 5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp. 6. Press the power door unlock control two times, then press the power lock control once. The horn will chirp twice if the memory feature was deactivated or three times (two short and one long chirp) if the memory feature was activated. 7. Turn ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete. 91
  • 92. Locks and security Autolock (if equipped) This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when: ² all doors, liftgate and liftgate window are closed ² the engine is running ² you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion. Relock The autolock feature repeats when: ² any door, except the drivers, is opened then closed while the engine is running and ² you put the vehicle in motion. Deactivating/activating the autolock feature Before following the procedure, make sure that the ignition is OFF and all vehicle doors and the liftgate window are closed. You must complete steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must wait 30 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 2. Press the power door unlock control three times. 3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. 4. Press the power door unlock control three times. 5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp. 6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was activated. 7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete. KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM With the keyless entry keypad, you can: ² lock or unlock the vehicle doors without using the key. Your vehicle has a factory set 5 digit code that operates the keyless entry system. You can also program your own 5 digit personal entry code. The factory-set code is located: 92
  • 93. Locks and security ² on the owner’s wallet card in the glove compartment ² taped to the computer module ² or at your dealer. When pressing the controls on the keyless entry keypad, press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation. This system will disable the power door lock controls. These will not work until the vehicle is disarmed. Refer to Power door locks in the Driver Controls chapter for more information. Programming your own personal entry code To program your own code: 1. Enter factory set code (keypad will illuminate when pressed). 2. Press 1/2 control within five seconds of step 1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 3. Enter your personal 5 digit code. Enter each digit within five seconds of previous one. Do not set a code that includes five of the same number or presents them in sequential order. Thieves can easily figure out these types of codes. Your personal code does not replace the permanent code that the dealership gave you. You can use either code to unlock your vehicle. If a second personal code is entered, the module will erase it in favor of the new code. If you wish to erase your personal code, use the following instructions: 1. Enter factory set code. 2. Press 1/2 control within five seconds of step one. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 3. Press 7/8 control and 9/0 control at the same time within five seconds of step 2. The system will now only respond to the factory set code. 93
  • 94. Anti-scan feature The keyless entry pad is disabled for 1 minute after 7 unsuccessful 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 attempts at entering a valid key code. The keypad will flash during this 1 minute mode. However, the 7/8 and 9/0 controls will still lock the vehicle. Anti-scan will turned off after: ² one minute of keypad inactivity ² the keyfob UNLOCK button is pressed. ² the ignition is turned to the ON position Unlocking the doors with the keyless entry system To unlock the driver door, enter either the factory set code or the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 personal code (each digit must be pressed within five seconds of the prior digit). The interior lamps will also illuminate. To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or personal code (driver door unlocks) and press the 3/4 control within five seconds. Locking the doors with the keyless entry system It is not necessary to enter the factory or personal code prior to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 locking all doors. To lock the doors: ² Press the 7/8 control and the 9/0 control at the same time. Activating/deactivating autolock with the keyless entry system Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure that the anti-theft system (if equipped) is not armed, ignition is off, and all vehicle doors and liftgate window are closed. 1. Enter 5 digit entry code 2. Press and hold 7/8 control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Locks and security 94
  • 95. Locks and security 3. Press and release 3/4 control while holding 7/8 control 4. Release 7/8 control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was activated. To re-activate autolock, repeat steps 1–4. SECURILOCKY PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization system. This system prevents the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position. The THEFT light in the instrument cluster will flash 3 every two seconds when the vehicle is armed. 2 1 5 4 Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a coded key disarms the vehicle. The THEFT light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If the THEFT light stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealership or a qualified technician. 95
  • 96. Locks and security Key information Your vehicle is supplied with two coded keys. Only a coded key will start your vehicle. Spare coded keys can be purchased from your dealership. Your dealership can program your key or you can “do it yourself”, refer to Programming spare keys. Large metallic objects, electronic devices on the key chain that can be used to purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second key on the same key ring as the coded key may cause vehicle starting issues. If present, you need to keep these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects and devices cannot damage the coded key, but can cause a momentary NO—START condition if they are too close to the key during engine start. If a problem occurs, turn ignition OFF and restart the engine with all other objects on the key ring held away from the ignition key. Check to make sure the coded key is an approved Lincoln coded key. 96
  • 97. If your keys are lost or stolen you will need to do the following: ² Use your spare key to start the vehicle, or ² Have your vehicle towed to a Locks and security dealership or locksmith. The key codes will need to be erased from your vehicle and new key codes will need to be re-coded. Replacing coded keys can be very costly and you may want to store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to prevent an unforeseen inconvenience. The correct coded key must be used for your vehicle. The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “NO-START” condition. If an unprogrammed key is used in the ignition it will cause a “NO START” condition. Programming spare keys A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only SecuriLocky keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure. If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the spare coded key(s) programmed. Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. 97
  • 98. 1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 3 4 (OFF) to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition 3 in 4 (ON) for at least one second). 5 2. Turn ignition to 3 (OFF) then 2 2 (LOCK) and remove the first coded key from the ignition. 3. Within five seconds of removing 1 the first coded key, insert the second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 3 (OFF) to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition in 4 (ON) for at least one second but no more than five seconds). 4. Turn the ignition to 3 (OFF) then 2 (LOCK) and remove the second coded key from the ignition. 5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the ignition from 3 (OFF) to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition in 4 (ON) for at least one second). This step will program your new key to a coded key. 6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure from step 1. If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat steps 1 through 6. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the new spare key(s) programmed. Locks and security 98
  • 99. Seating and safety restraints SEATING Adjustable head restraints (if equipped) Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to raise and lower the head restraints. The head restraints can be moved up and down. Using the power lumbar support (if equipped) The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat. Press one side of the control to adjust firmness. Press the other side of the control to adjust softness. Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped) Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. 99
  • 100. Seating and safety restraints Reclining the seatback can reduce the effectiveness of the seat’s safety belt in the event of a collision. The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. Press to raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion. Press to raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion. Press the control to move the seat forward, backward, up or down. 100
  • 101. Seating and safety restraints Memory seats/rearview mirrors/adjustable pedals (if equipped) This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat, outside rearview mirrors, and SET adjustable pedals to three programmable positions. The memory seat control is located on the driver door. 1 2 ² To program position one, move the driver seat to the desired position using the seat controls. Press the SET control. The SET control indicator light will briefly illuminate. While the light is illuminated, press control 1. ² To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control 2. ² To program position three, repeat the previous procedure but press controls 1 and 2 simultaneously. A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park. A memory seat position may be programmed at any time. The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter UNLOCK control. To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and security chapter. Heated seats (if equipped) To operate the heated seats: ² Push control to activate. ² Push again to deactivate. The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. 101
  • 102. Seating and safety restraints CLIMATE CONTROL SEATS (if equipped) To operate the climate control seats the engine must be running. ² Slide the control to to heat the seatback and the seat cushion. ² Slide the control to to cool the seatback and the seat cushion. 5 3 In heat mode: ² Rotate the thumbwheel to select the desired heat level from 0 (OFF) to 5 (MAX). In cool mode: ² Rotate the thumbwheel to select the desired cooling level from 0 (OFF) to 5 (MAX). When setting 1 is selected, the seat(s) will provide vent cooling only (same temperature as cabin air). Allow five minutes for the temperature level to stabilize. The thumbwheel selection level numbers will illuminate when the system is turned on. If the climate control seat is not turned OFF (0), the seat will return to the selected temperature level each time the ignition is turned to ON. CLIMATE CONTROL SEATS air filter replacement (if equipped) The climate control seat system includes an air filter that has to be replaced periodically. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for more information. 102
  • 103. Seating and safety restraints ² There is a filter located under both front seats. ² It can be accessed from the second row seat. Move the front seat all the way forward and up to ease access. To remove climate control seat air filter: ² Remove key from ignition. ² Push on the outside rigid edge of the air filter at the center and rotate downward once tab is released. 103
  • 104. Seating and safety restraints ² Remove filter. To install climate control seat air filter: ² First, position the filter in it’s housing making sure that the far forward end is all the way up in the housing. Then push in on the center of the outside edge of the filter and rotate up into the housing until it clips into position. REAR SEATS Adjustable head restraints Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to raise and lower the head restraints. Push or pull the head rests to the desired position. 104
  • 105. Rear folding bench seat (if equipped) Folding down the rear seats Ensure that the headrest is in the down position and no objects such as books, purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row seats before folding them down. Move front passenger seat forward so that the second row seat head rest clears the front seat. 1. Locate handle below the seat cushion near the bottom of the door side cushion that reads “FOLD FLAT OR RECLINE”. 2. Lift the handle and push the seatback toward the front of the vehicle. 3. Press the green control on the seatback to release the closeout panel. Rotate the panel to closeout the space in the floor. 4. Once the second row seats are in the down position, the front seats may be readjusted. Returning the seat to upright Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop. Seating and safety restraints 105
  • 106. Seating and safety restraints 1. Rotate the closeout panel onto the seatback and press the black control (adjacent to the green control) to lock. 2. Locate and lift the handle that reads “FOLD FLAT OR RECLINE”. 3. Pull on the seatback while lifting the handle to lift the seat into the upright position. Reclining the seatback Locate the lever at the bottom of the seatback that reads “FOLD FLAT OR RECLINE”. Pull the lever upwards to recline the seatback. Third row seat The third row seat is equipped with combination lap and shoulder belts in the outboard seating positions and a manual adjust tongue lap belt in the center seating position. For information on the proper operation of the safety restraints, refer to Safety Restraints in this chapter. The third row seat may be removed from the vehicle for additional cargo space. 106
  • 107. Seating and safety restraints Accessing the third row seat Your vehicle is equipped with an easy entry second row seat feature which allows ready access to the third row seat. You may enter the third row seat: ² through the passenger side rear door if your vehicle has a second row bench seat ² through either rear door if your vehicle has second row bucket seats Ensure that the second row seat is in the upright position in order to achieve optimum access to the third row. To minimize the risk of personal injury, the third row seat should not be left in the forward, stowed position while the vehicle is in motion. Please ensure that the seat is in the upright, fully latched position before putting the vehicle in motion. 1. Locate and lift seat control “3RD ROW ENTRY” to release seatback and cushion to flip toward the front seat. 2. After entering the seat, reverse this procedure; ensure that the latch tub and surrounding areas are clear. Folding down the third row seat Pull the seat release lever located on the lower right side of the seatback while pushing the seatback down into the seat cushion. The seatback will latch into place. Pull the seat release lever to return the seatback into the upright seating position. 107
  • 108. Seating and safety restraints Removing the third row seat From the rear of the vehicle, with the liftgate open: 1. Disengage the lap/shoulder belt from the floor by inserting a key or small screwdriver through the hole in the boot of the detachable anchor. Then, press the release button to separate the detachable anchor from the anchor tongue. 2. Before removing the seat, be sure that the detachable anchor tongue is stowed flat into the vehicle floor. 3. Use the black plastic clip (located just above the detachable anchor) to stow the loose seat belt. 108
  • 109. Seating and safety restraints ² Pull the seat release lever located on the lower right side of the seatback while pushing the seatback down into the seat cushion. ² The seatback will latch into place. 4. Lift the seat release bar located at the center of the seat near the floor to release the floor latches. 5. While pulling up on the release bar, lift the seat up and out of the floor tubs and roll seat rearward. 6. With assistance, lift the seat out of the vehicle. Installing the third row seat Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop. When reinstalling a rear seat in your vehicle it must be placed in its original position. Improper installation of the seat will prevent correct use of the safety belts and could increase the risk of injury. Refer to the warning label on the seat belt. 109
  • 110. Seating and safety restraints Before installing your third row seat, ensure that the detachable anchor tongues are stowed into the floor and the loose belts are stored out of the way. For proper latching, ensure that the floor tubs are clear of debris. From the rear of the vehicle, with the liftgate open: 1. With assistance, lift the seat into the rear of the vehicle and position front rollers onto the track. By rolling the seat forward, guide the seat positioners over the front pins of the floor tubs. 2. Guide the positioners around each pin and lower the seat. ² When the rear of the seat is 10–13 cm (4–5 in) above the rear pins, let the seat drop. This will ensure that the seat will properly latch into the floor. 3. Locate the seat belt anchor tongue in the plastic housing on the floor. 4. Disconnect the detachable anchor from its stowage location and connect it to the anchor tongue (making sure that the label on the detachable anchor is pointing toward the outside of the vehicle (left side) and that the belts are not twisted or jammed). NOTE:Improper installation of the seat belt anchor will prevent correct use of the safety belt and could increase the risk or injury. 5. Insert the seat detachable anchor into detachable anchor tongue until you hear a “click” and feel the latch engage. 6. Push up on the seat to verify that it is latched into the floor. 7. Verify that the safety belts can move freely on either side of the seat. 110
  • 111. Seating and safety restraints 3rd row tip/stow feature The 3rd row seat has a tip/stow feature to increase cargo space without removing the seat from the vehicle. To put seat in tip/stow position: 1. Pull the seat release lever located on the lower right side of the seatback while pushing the seatback down into the seat cushion. 2. The seatback will latch into place. 3. To release the rear floor latches of the 3rd row seat, lift the seat release bar located at the center of the seat near the floor to release the floor latches. 4. Lift back of seat up and hold. 5. Lift latch up and out of floor tub to upright position using the strap on the latch. 111
  • 112. Seating and safety restraints 6. Pull down support bar and push into floor latch. To return seat to seating position: 1. Hold seat and pull support bar from floor latch. 2. Rotate support bar up under seat. 3. Rotate floor latch down into floor tub. 4. Lower the seat. When the rear of the seat is 10–13 cm (4–5 in) above the rear pins, let the seat drop. This will ensure that the seat will properly latch into the floor. SAFETY RESTRAINTS Safety restraints precautions Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is provided. 112
  • 113. Seating and safety restraints It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. Combination lap and shoulder belts 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. ² Front seats 113
  • 114. Seating and safety restraints ² Rear seats (if equipped) 2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. ² Front seats ² Rear seats (if equipped) 114
  • 115. Seating and safety restraints The front and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes described below: Vehicle sensitive mode The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. The safety belt system can also be made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt. Automatic locking mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. When to use the automatic locking mode ² Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children later in this chapter. How to use the automatic locking mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. ² Front seats 115
  • 116. Seating and safety restraints ² Rear seats (if equipped) 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. How to disengage the automatic locking mode Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by a qualified technician after any collision. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. 116
  • 117. Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. After any vehicle collision, the front passenger outboard seat belt system must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for proper function. BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and front passenger seating positions. The safety belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing from the safety belt system. The safety belt pretensioner uses the same crash sensor system as the front air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS). When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap and shoulder belt is tightened. The driver and front passenger seat belt system (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front air bags and safety belt pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter. Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Seating and safety restraints 117
  • 118. Seating and safety restraints Front and second row safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver, front passenger and second row outboard passengers. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. To lower the shoulder belt height, push the button down and slide the height adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision. Lap belts Adjusting the lap belt The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not across the waist. 118
  • 119. Seating and safety restraints ² 1st row and 3rd row (if equipped) center seating positions The lap belt does not adjust automatically. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). To lengthen the belt, turn the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle. To tighten the belt, pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips. Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use. ² 2nd row center seating position (if equipped) The lap belt will adjust automatically. To fasten, grasp the tongue, and with a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing to buckle the tongue into the correct buckle. If you did not pull out enough webbing to reach the buckle, allow the tongue to retract fully before trying to pull it out again. Safety belt warning light and indicator chime The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. 119
  • 120. Seating and safety restraints Conditions of operation If... Then... The driver’s safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding... The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off. The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off. BeltMinder The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. If... Then... The driver’s safety belt is not buckled approximately 5 seconds after the safety belt warning light has turned off... The BeltMinder feature is activated - the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until safety belt is buckled. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the safety belt indicator light is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding... The BeltMinder feature will not activate. The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The BeltMinder feature will not activate. The purpose of the BeltMinder is to remind occasional wearers to wear safety belts all of the time. 120
  • 121. Seating and safety restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts: (All statistics based on U.S. data) Reasons given... Consider... “Crashes are rare events” 36 700 crashes occur every day. The more we drive, the more we are exposed to “rare” events, even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime. “I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home. “Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible; this can improve comfort. “I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up. “Seat belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars, and by 60% in light trucks. “Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle crashes, many when no other vehicles are around. “Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are unbelted. “The people I’m with don’t wear belts” Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people. Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate behavior they see. “I have an air bag” Air bags offer greater protection when used with safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers. “I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”. Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt Minder feature please follow the directions stated below. 121
  • 122. Seating and safety restraints One time disable Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only. Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation/activation programming procedure. The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure: Before following the procedure, make sure that: ² the parking brake is set ² the gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) ² the ignition switch is in the OFF position ² all vehicle doors are closed ² the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled ² the parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure.) To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT START THE ENGINE) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2 minutes) ² Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. 3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder warning activation. 4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps. 5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. ² After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds. 122
  • 123. Seating and safety restraints 6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. ² This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable BeltMinder if it is currently disabled. 7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds. 8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds, followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off, then followed by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds again. 9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm (8 inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number 611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost. Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt maintenance Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower anchors (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. 123
  • 124. Seating and safety restraints Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts in the Cleaning chapter. AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information about the air bag and sensor systems. In the event of a collision this module may save information related to the collision including information about the air bag system and impact severity. This information will assist Ford Motor Company in the servicing vehicle and helping to better understand real world collisions and further improve the safety of future vehicles. 124
  • 125. Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Air bags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying air bag is greatest close to the trim covering the air bag module. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is provided. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module. Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the air bag: ² Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. ² Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. Seating and safety restraints 125
  • 126. Seating and safety restraints Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle. Additional equipment may affect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment. 126
  • 127. Seating and safety restraints Children and air bags For additional important safety information, read all information on safety restraints in this guide. Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision. Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back. How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work? The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates air bag inflation. The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Air bags are designed to inflate in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration. 127
  • 128. Seating and safety restraints The air bags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After air bag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the air bag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying air bag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation. If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. The SRS consists of: ² driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and air bags), ² one or more impact and safing sensors and diagnostic monitor (RCM), ² a readiness light and tone ² the electrical wiring which connects the components. 128
  • 129. Seating and safety restraints The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the impact sensors, the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air bag back up power and the air bag ignitors). Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is not required. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: ² The readiness light will either flash or stay lit. ² The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on. ² A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision. Side air bag system (if equipped) Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying air bag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision. Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side air bags and increase the risk of injury in an accident. Do not lean your head on the door. The side air bag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback. 129
  • 130. Seating and safety restraints Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag supplemental restraint system, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an air bag. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an air bag SRS is provided. How does the side air bag system work? The side air bag system consists of the following: ² An inflatable nylon bag (air bag) with a gas generator concealed behind the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks. ² A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment. ² The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front air bags. ² Two crash sensors located under the outboard side of the front seats, attached to the floor. Side air bags, in combination with seat belts, can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision. The side air bags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air bag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated, even if the respective seat is not occupied. The air bag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions. The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates air bag inflation. 130
  • 131. The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side air bags are designed to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration. Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation. If the side air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function again. The side air bag system (including the seat) must be inspected and serviced by a qualified technician in accordance with the vehicle service manual. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness section in the Instrumentation chapter. Routine maintenance of the side air bag is not required. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: ² The readiness light (same light as for front air bag system) will either flash or stay lit. ² The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on. Seating and safety restraints 131
  • 132. Seating and safety restraints ² A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision. Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including pretensioners) For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel. SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags. Important child restraint precautions You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S. and Canada. If small children ride in your vehicle (generally children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less), you must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or child restraint you might use. When possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Children and safety belts If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. 132
  • 133. Seating and safety restraints Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts. Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle. If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in your vehicle. To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children who have outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standards. Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child and provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that encourages safer seating posture and better fit of lap and shoulder belts on the child. A belt-positioning booster seat should be used if the shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all the way back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang over the edge of the seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the special needs of your child with your pediatrician. 133
  • 134. Seating and safety restraints SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Child and infant or child safety seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. When installing a child safety seat: ² Review and follow the information presented in the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section in this chapter. ² Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). ² Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. ² Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. ² Place seat back in upright position. 134
  • 135. Seating and safety restraints ² Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter. Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps. in this chapter. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back. 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. 135
  • 136. Seating and safety restraints 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 136
  • 137. Seating and safety restraints 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. 6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the buckle and pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down with your knee on the child seat. 8. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. 9. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than one inch of movement for proper installation. 10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps two through nine. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. 137
  • 138. Seating and safety restraints Installing child safety seat in the second row center seating position with an automatic locking retractor 1. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position. 2. In a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing from the retractor to route the tongue through the child seat. 3. While holding the webbing to prevent it from retracting, route the webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 4. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle for that seating position until you hear and feel the buckle engage. Make sure the buckle is latched securely by pulling on the webbing. 5. If you have not pulled out enough webbing to reach, allow the webbing to fully retract before attempting to pull it out again and repeat steps 2 through 4. 6. Pull the webbing through the child seat toward the buckle while pushing down with your knee on the child seat. 7. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. It will make a clicking noise while doing this. 8. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. 9. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. Installing child safety seat in the third row center seating position (if equipped) 1. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position. 2. Route the tongue end through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturers instructions. If the tongue will not reach the buckle, lengthen the amount of belt by turning the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pulling on it until it reaches the buckle. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 3. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle for that seating position (buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear and feel the buckle engage. To tighten the belt, pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until all the slack is removed from the belt. Make sure the buckle is latched securely by pulling on the webbing. 138
  • 139. Seating and safety restraints 4. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. 5. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. Attaching safety seats with tether straps Most forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes over the back of the set and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your child safety seat for information about ordering a tether strap. Tether anchorage hardware All second row and one third row seating position have a fabric strap installed near the bottom of the rear face of the seatback. These straps have a loop at the top, and are to be used for child seat tether anchorages. A tethered seat can be installed in the front passenger seat. Put the tether strap over the seatback and attach it to an anchor bracket. Anchor brackets can be bolted to the rear edge of the front passenger seat cushion. The bolt holes are in the bottom of the rear edge of the front passenger seat cushion frame. The anchor bracket must be installed using the instructions provided with the kit. Tether anchorage hardware kits (part number 613D74) including instructions, may be obtained at no charge from any Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. Tighten the anchor according to specifications. Otherwise, the safety seat may not be properly secured and the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. Attaching child safety seats with tether straps Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap. 139
  • 140. Seating and safety restraints The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below. The tether anchors in your vehicle are straps on the seatback. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor. 1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion. 2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat. 3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. (Shown with the seats folded down.) 140
  • 141. ² You may need to pull the Seating and safety restraints seatback forward to access the tether anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before installing the child seat. Refer to the Folding Down The Rear Seats section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear seats. 4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision. 5. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further instructions to secure the child safety seat. 6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases. 141
  • 142. STARTING Positions of the ignition 1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to 3 operate while the engine is not running. 2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, 2 automatic transmission gearshift lever and allows key removal. 3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all 1 accessories without locking the steering wheel. 4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key position when driving. 5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts. Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise. When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 5 4 Driving 142
  • 143. Driving Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Important safety precautions A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute (RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM. Before starting the vehicle: 1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. 2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off. 3. Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park). 143
  • 144. Driving 4. Make sure the parking brake is set. 5. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START). 4 If there is difficulty in turning the 3 key, firmly rotate the steering wheel left and right until the key turns freely. This condition may occur 2 when: ² front wheels are turned 1 ² front wheel is against the curb ² steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle 5 L L H 00 H NAVIGATOR DOOR AJAR THEFT 20 40 60 80 40 60 20 F MPH km/h RPMX1000 P RNDD 2 SELECT RESET 4X4 LOW RANGE H E C LOW FUEL BRAKE CK SUSP SERVICE ENGINE SOON Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced. ² If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate. 144
  • 145. Starting the engine Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. 1. Turn the key to 5 (START) without pressing the accelerator pedal and release as soon as the engine starts. The key will return to 4 (ON). 2. If the temperature is above –12° C (10° F) and the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. 3. If the temperature is below -12° C (10° F) and the engine does not start in 15 seconds on the first try, turn the key OFF and wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and hold. Turn the key to START position. 4. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator pedal gradually as the engine speeds up. 5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake and release the parking brake. Using the engine block heater (if equipped) An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms up the engine faster and allows the heater-defroster system to respond quickly. Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -23° C (-10° F) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not harm the engine, so the heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle. To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. 3 2 1 5 4 Driving 145
  • 146. Driving Guarding against exhaust fumes Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful and could kill you. Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: ² the vehicle is raised for service ² the sound of the exhaust system changes ² the vehicle has been damaged in a collision WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in an open area for long periods of time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch). Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) to bring in fresh air. Improve vehicle ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, leaves and other debris. BRAKES Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance. Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning; however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be 146
  • 147. Driving aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture, road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or “continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) On vehicles equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s anti-lock brake system. The ABS performs a self-check after you start the engine and begin to drive away. A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If a malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician. The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake applications and compensates for this tendency. The wheels are prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied. The accompanying illustration depicts the advantage of an ABS equipped vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking traction. Using ABS ² In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four-wheel ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheel ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain full steering control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient space, will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled stop. ² The anti-lock system does not decrease the time necessary to apply the brakes or always reduce stopping distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop. 147
  • 148. ² We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks. ABS warning lamp ABS The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the ABS needs to be serviced. With the ABS light on, the anti-lock brake system is disabled and normal BRAKE braking is still effective unless the ! brake warning light also remains illuminated with parking brake released. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle serviced immediately.) Parking brake with auto-release Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked. To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops. Driving 148
  • 149. The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated (when the ignition is turned ON) until the parking brake is released. BRAKE ! Driving Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle. However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. Your vehicle has an automatic parking brake release. To release the parking brake: 1. Turn the ignition to the ON position. 2. Press the brake pedal. 3. Move the gearshift out of the P (Park) position (the parking brake will release automatically when you shift into reverse). The brake pedal must remain pressed while the gearshift is moved. If the parking brake fails to release after completing this procedure, use the manual parking brake release lever. Pull the release lever to release the HOOD brake. Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to BRAKE wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy. 149
  • 150. Driving STEERING Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to help steer the vehicle. To prevent damage to the power steering pump: ² Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left for more than a few seconds when the engine is running. ² Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level (below the MIN mark on the reservoir). If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. If the steering wanders or pulls, the condition could be caused by any of the following: ² underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s) ² uneven vehicle loading ² high crown in center of road ² high crosswinds ² wheels out of alignment ² loose or worn suspension components Speed sensitive steering Your vehicle is equipped with speed sensitive, variable assist power steering (VAPS). At high speeds, steering assist will increase to improve low speed maneuverability. If the amount of effort required to steer your vehicle changes while driving at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked by your dealer or a qualified service technician. AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) The air suspension system is designed to improve ride, handling and general vehicle performance for static, on and off-road driving conditions. ² The load leveling feature of the air suspension automatically keeps the vehicle at a constant level if a load is added or removed from the vehicle. 150
  • 151. ² The height adjustment feature automatically controls the vehicle height over a range of approximately 5 cm (2 inches) based on vehicle speed, ignition position and selection of two or four-wheel drive modes. ² The air suspension automatically puts the vehicle at its lowest height when ignition is OFF to provide easy entry and exit. Whenever a door is opened (including the liftgate) the system memorizes and maintains the height of the vehicle until all doors are closed or until vehicle exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph). ² The air suspension system raises the vehicle to its normal ride position when the ignition is turned on, all doors are closed and the transmission is shifted into gear. ² In 4WD Low the air suspension system will not move to its lowest height. In 4WD Low, the air suspension system raises the vehicle above the normal ride height at speeds below 40 km/h (25 mph) to improve ground clearance. In 4WD Low, do not exceed 56 km/h (35 mph). ² When the vehicle is in motion, the air suspension system will adjust the vehicle’s height according to ground clearance and speed to maximize ride comfort. ² It is normal to occasionally hear a buzz or clicking from the vehicle’s air suspension system when the ignition is turned off. The system stays energized for 40 minutes after the ignition is turned off to compensate for any load changes made after the vehicle is parked. The air suspension shut-off switch is located behind an access panel underneath the passenger side instrument panel. On vehicles equipped with Air Suspension, turn OFF the Air Suspension switch prior to jacking, hoisting or towing your vehicle. Normal vehicle operation does not require any action by the driver. OFF AIR SUSPENSION SWITCH INTERRUPTEUR DE LA SUSPENSION PNEUMATIQUE Driving 151
  • 152. Driving Check air suspension indicator light The warning and indicator light CK SUSP illuminates when the air suspension switch is turned off or an air suspension system fault has been detected. If the light is illuminated while driving and the air suspension system switch is not turned off, safely pull off the road at your earliest convenience. Turn the ignition switch from 4 (On) to 3 (Off) and 4 (On) again. If the warning light illuminates again, turn the air suspension switch off and have the vehicle serviced by a dealer or qualified service technician. If the vehicle is loaded beyond the recommended maximum payload, the CK SUSP light may illuminate. To correct this condition, remove or redistribute the payload according to the recommended requirements and follow the procedure outlined above. TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED) This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Your vehicle has special design and equipment features to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of circumstances. These special design features, such as larger tires and increased ground clearance, give the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. 152
  • 153. Driving Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling people and cargo may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. Use extra caution while becoming familiar with your vehicle. Know the capabilities and limitations of both you as a driver and your vehicle. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Brake-shift interlock This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed. If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed: 1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the key. 2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). 3. Start the vehicle. If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside emergencies chapter. 153
  • 154. Driving Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your dealer or a qualified service technician. Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission Your vehicle’s automatic transmission is equipped with a special shift strategy that insures maximum heater performance during cold weather operation. When ambient temperature is –5° C (23° F) or below and the engine coolant temperature is below 38° C (100° F), light throttle upshifts may be slightly delayed. Once the engine coolant temperature reaches 71° C (160° F) the normal shift strategy will resume. This is normal operation and will not affect the function or the durability of the transmission. If the normal shift strategy does not resume once the engine coolant temperature reaches the normal operating temperature, or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function normally, see your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon as possible. Understanding gearshift positions To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal, then move gearshift lever out of P (Park). 154
  • 155. Driving Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. P (Park) Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). Make sure the gearshift lever is securely latched in P (Park). This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift lever is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. R (Reverse) With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse). N (Neutral) With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this gear. (Overdrive) The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission operates in gears one through four. (Overdrive) can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch (TCS) on the end of the gearshift lever. OVERDRIVE OFF 155
  • 156. Driving The transmission control indicator light (TCIL) (the word OFF) on the end of the gearshift lever will illuminate. Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission control switch (TCS) on the end of the gearshift lever with the gearshift in the position. The TCIL (the word OFF) will illuminate on the gearshift lever. Transmission operates in gears one through three. (Drive) provides more engine braking than (Overdrive) and is useful when: ² driving with a heavy load. ² towing a trailer up or down steep hills. ² additional engine downhill braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer to Driving while you tow in the Trailer towing section. OVERDRIVE To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control switch (TCS). The TCIL (the word OFF) will no longer be illuminated. Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically return to normal overdrive mode. Every time the vehicle is shut off and restarted, you must press the transmission control switch to cancel overdrive operation if driving in overdrive is not desired. 2 (Second) Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades. 1 (First) Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum engine braking on steep downgrades. Upshifts can be made by shifting to 2 (Second) or to (Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at higher speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower gear, and will shift to 1 (Low) after vehicle decelerates to the proper speed. 156
  • 157. Driving Forced Downshifts To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or first gear. Shift strategy (4R100 automatic transmission) To account for customer driving habits and conditions, your 4R100 automatic transmission electronically controls the shift quality by using an adaptive learning strategy. The adaptive learning strategy is maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. Optimal shifting will resume within a few hundred kilometers (miles) of operation. If the shift quality does not improve within a few hundred kilometers (miles) of operation, or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function normally, see your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon as possible. REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) The reverse sensing system (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the reverse gear is selected. To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the limitations on the reverse sensing system described below. Reverse sensing is only an assist for some (generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking speeds” of approximately 4.8 km/h (3 mph) or less. The weather may also affect the function of RSS. RSS may have reduced performance, or be activated in inclement weather. It is the driver’s responsibility for ensuring that their path is clear when operating the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse and when using the reverse sensing system. 157
  • 158. Driving This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to the ground. The RSS will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while the vehicle slowly moves in reverse at speeds less than 4.8 km/h (3 mph). The RSS is not effective at speeds greater than 4.8 km/h (3 mph) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. The reverse sensing system detects obstacles within approximately 1.8 meters (5.9 ft.) of the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When the distance to the obstacle is less than 25.0 cm (10 in.), the tone will sound continuously. If the system detects a stationary or receding object further than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the side of the vehicle, the tone will sound for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the tone will sound again. 158
  • 159. Driving The reverse sensing system is automatically enabled when the gear OFF selector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON. A reverse sensing control allows the driver to disable the reverse sensing system only when the ignition is ON, and the gear selector is in R (Reverse). The OFF indicator remains illuminated when the system is disabled. The system defaults to ON every time the reverse gear is selected. Press the control to disable or enable the system. The indicator will remain illuminated to indicate a failure of the reverse sensing system. Always keep the sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free from dirt, snow and ice (do not clean the sensors with sharp objects). These elements may cause the system to operate inaccurately. If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter. When Four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. 4WD power can be selected when additional driving power is desired. If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and the instrument panel control is moved to 4WD Low while the vehicle is moving, the system will not engage and no damage will occur to the 4WD system. Before 4WD Low can be engaged, the vehicle must be at a complete stop with the brake pedal depressed and the transmission in N (Neutral). 4H or 4L operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, damage to the transfer case, increased tire wear, decreased fuel economy and difficulty turning. 159
  • 160. Driving Control-Trac automatic four-wheel drive system (if equipped) Your 4x4 features the heavy-duty Control-Trac system which includes a computer-operated transfer case. This unique system is interactive with the road, continually monitoring and adjusting torque delivery to the front and rear wheels to optimize vehicle control. Positions of the Control-Trac system The Control-Trac A4WD system functions in three modes: ² A4WD position delivers power to the rear axle. If the rear wheels lose traction, power will be automatically delivered to the front axle to maintain traction throughout the slippery condition. ² 4H position provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive power delivery to front and rear axles. 4H A4WD 4L ² 4L position provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive when above average power at reduced speeds is required. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. 160
  • 161. Using the Control-Trac system Shifting from A4WD to 4H Move the 4WD control from A4WD to 4H at any forward speed up to 88 km/h (55 mph). At temperatures below 0°C (32°F), shifts from A4WD to 4H should not be performed above 72 km/h (45 mph). Shifting from 4H to 4L (and 4L to 4H) 1. Bring the vehicle to a stop. 2. Depress the brake. 3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral). 4. Move the 4WD control to the 4H (or 4L) position. Shifting to A4WD Move the 4WD control back to A4WD at a stop or at speeds up to 88 km/h (55 mph). 4H Driving A4WD 4L 4H A4WD 4L 4H A4WD 4L 161
  • 162. Driving Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles 4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. Basic operating principles ² Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads (except models equipped with Auto 4WD). This may damage the drivelines and axles. ² Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle. ² Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice. If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement ² If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface. ² It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may loose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. 162
  • 163. Driving ² It often may be less risky to strike small inanimate objects, such as highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. If your vehicle gets stuck If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. Emergency maneuvers ² In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e., turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel. ² In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. ² If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or barking). Again, avoid these abrupt inputs. Parking On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in N (Neutral) 163
  • 164. Driving position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. 4WD Systems (if equipped) 4WD (when you select the 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle can’t. Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle. Normal characteristics On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern. Sand When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels. If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible. Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution. 164
  • 165. Mud and water If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. Driving Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. Water intrusion into the transmission may damage the transmission. If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should be replaced. After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components. “Tread Lightly” is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land-use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas. Ford joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by “treading lightly.” 165
  • 166. Driving Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer. When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. If you do stall out, do not try to turn around because you might roll over. It is better to back down to a safe location. Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating. Do not descend in neutral, disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. When you brake hard, the front wheels can’t turn and if they aren’t turning, you won’t be able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still maintain steering control. If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. 166
  • 167. Driving Driving on snow and ice 4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions. Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping as well as drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. If your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the brake steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system. Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and swing around during braking. Tires, Replacement Requirements 4WD vehicles are equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel other than that originally provided by Ford because it can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or roll over and serious injury. Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type, tread design, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. 167
  • 168. Driving If you nevertheless decide to equip your 4WD for off-road use with tires larger than what Ford recommends, you should not use these tires for highway driving. If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford, it may adversely affect vehicle handling and could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case failure. Do not use”aftermarket lift kits” or other suspension modifications, whether or not they are used with larger tires and wheels. These “aftermarket lift kits” could adversely affect the vehicle’s handling characteristics, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or roll over and serious injury. Tires can be damaged during off-road use. For your safety, tires that are damaged should not be used for highway driving because they are more likely to blow out or fail. You should carefully observe the recommended tire inflation pressure found on the safety compliance certification label attached to the left front door lock facing or door latch post pillar. Failure to follow tire pressure recommendations can adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Do not exceed the Ford recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum pressure allowed for the tire. Each day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires, and adjust if required. Check tire pressure with a tire gauge every few weeks (including spare). Safe operation requires tires that are neither underinflated nor overloaded. Periodically inspect the tire treads and remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary repairs. Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. 168
  • 169. Driving Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide both reasonably safe, predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment. Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control. Ford recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box cover). Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off-road usage. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine. If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage. 169
  • 170. Driving VEHICLE LOADING Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms: ² Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or aftermarket equipment. ² Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight rating minus base curb weight. ² GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload weight. The GVW is not a limit or a specification. ² GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum permissable total weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo. The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. ² GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. ² GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer. ² GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum permissable combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer ² Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each engine/ transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. ² Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded vehicle (including occupants and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. ² Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range that the trailer must fall within that ranges from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight. 170
  • 171. Driving Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. The Safety Certification Label, found on the driver’s door pillar, lists several important vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any additional equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are adding weight to the front of your vehicle, (potentially including weight added to the cab), the weight added should not exceed the front axle reserve capacity (FARC). Additional frontal weight may be added to the front axle reserve capacity provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e. restrict the number of occupants or amount of cargo carried). Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment being carried is within the weight limitations that have been established for your vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and front and rear gross axle weight rating limits. Under no circumstance should these limitations be exceeded. Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury. Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility-type vehicles For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in this chapter. Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. 171
  • 172. Driving Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow 1. Use the appropriate maximum gross combined weight rating (GCWR) chart to find the maximum GCWR for your type engine and rear axle ratio. 2. Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle without cargo. To obtain correct weights, try taking your vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks. 3. Subtract your loaded vehicle weight from the maximum GCWR on the following charts. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow and must fall below the maximum shown under maximum trailer weight on the chart. TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to maximize vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment while towing. Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing: ² Stay within your vehicle’s load limits. ² Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to tow in this chapter. ² Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving while you tow in this chapter. ² Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide. ² Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 800 km (500 miles). ² Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications. Your vehicle is pre-wired for trailer towing. An electrical connector is provided under the instrument panel for installing a customer-supplied electric brake controller. Another electrical connector is provided at the hitch. This connector provides power to the trailer for taillamps, stop and turn lamps, back up lamps, battery charge, electric brakes (when a customer provided controller is installed) and ground. The kit included with your vehicle provides you with adaptors to attach the brake controller and convert the hitch connector for Class I trailer usage. 172
  • 173. Driving GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer weights Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR - kg (lbs.) Trailer weight range (0-maximum) - kg (lbs.) 4x2 with 17 inch wheels 5.4L-4V 3.73 6 577 (14 500) 0-4 037 (0-8 900) 4x4 with 17 inch wheels 5.4L-4V 3.73 6 350 (14 000) 0-3 674 (0-8 100) Maximum frontal area of trailer is 5.6 square meters (60 square feet) Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight. Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of control and personal injury. Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer, and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance. Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue. Load equalizing hitch When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the following procedure: 1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level. 173
  • 174. Driving 2. Turn the air suspension (if equipped) control to OFF. 3. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle. 4. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0–13 mm (0.5 in) of the reference point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher than in Step 3. 5. Turn the air suspension (if equipped) control to ON. Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle is lower or higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the load equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling. Safety chains Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners. If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you. Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations. Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR. Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps. 174
  • 175. Driving Driving while you tow When towing a trailer: ² Ensure that you turn off your speed control. The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. ² Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer. ² Use a lower gear when towing up or down steep hills. This will eliminate excessive downshifting and upshifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling. ² Anticipate stops and brake gradually. Exceeding the GCWR rating may cause internal transmission damage and void your warranty coverage. Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for more information. Trailer towing tips ² Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles. ² Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. ² If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective. ² The trailer tongue weight should be 10% of the loaded trailer weight. ² After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts. ² When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, place the gearshift in P (Park) and increase idle speed. This aids engine cooling and air conditioner efficiency. ² Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels. 175
  • 176. Driving Launching or retrieving a boat When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval: ² do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper and ² do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions, reliability and causing internal transmission damage. Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required. Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water. RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND) An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. Follow these guidelines if you have the need for recreational towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged. 2WD vehicles (with automatic transmissions) ² Place the transmission in N (Neutral) ² Maximum speed is 56 km (35 mph) ² Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles) If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km (35 mph) must be exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed before the vehicle is towed. Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation. Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal transmission components. 4WD vehicles electronic shift transfer case (with automatic transmissions) 4x4 vehicles with electronic shift on the fly cannot be towed with any wheels on the ground. 176
  • 177. Roadside emergencies GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE To fully assist if you should have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: ² 24–hours, seven days a week ² for the Basic warranty period (Canada) or New Vehicle Limited Warranty period (U.S.) of three years or 60 000 km (36 000 miles), whichever comes first on Ford and Mercury vehicles, and four years or 80 000 km (50 000 miles) on Lincoln vehicles Roadside assistance will cover: ² changing a flat tire ² jump-starts ² lock-out assistance ² limited fuel delivery* ² towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company dealership, or your selling dealer if within 25 kms (15.5 miles) of the nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement). Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession). * Canadian customers refer to your Roadside Assistance supplement for exact fuel amounts. USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is found in the Roadside Assistance book in the glove compartment. U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006. 177
  • 178. Roadside emergencies If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call 1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call 1–800–665–2006. ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact 1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca. HAZARD FLASHER Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown, approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the ignition is off. ² The hazard lights control is located on top of the steering column. ² Depress hazard lights control to activate all hazard flashers simultaneously. ² Depress control again to turn the flashers off. FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH FUEL RESET The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been activated. 178
  • 179. The fuel pump shut-off switch is located in the passenger’s foot well, by the kick panel. Roadside emergencies Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch. 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Check the fuel system for leaks. 3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by pushing in on the reset button. 4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and return the key to the OFF position. 5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system. 179
  • 180. Roadside emergencies FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse rating Mini fuses Standard fuses Maxi fuses 15 Cartridge maxi fuses Fuse link cartridge 2A Grey Grey — — — 3A Violet Violet — — — 4A Pink Pink — — — 5A Tan Tan — — — 7.5A Brown Brown — — — 10A Red Red — — — 15A Blue Blue — — — 20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue 25A Natural Natural — — — 30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 40A — — Orange Green Green 50A — — Red Red Red 60A — — Blue — Yellow 70A — — Tan — Brown 80A — — Natural — Black 180
  • 181. Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover. The fuses are coded as follows. Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 1 25A Audio 2 5A Clock, Overhead Trip Computer, Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC), Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Cluster, Navigation 3 20A Cigar Lighter, OBD-II Scan Tool Connector FUSE1 12 22 2 13 23 6 17 27 7 18 28 8 19 29 9 30 20 11 21 31 10 RELAY 5 RELAY 4 3 14 24 4 15 25 RELAY 5 16 26 3 RELAY 2 RELAY 1 Roadside emergencies 181
  • 182. Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 4 7.5A Remote Entry Module, Mirrors, Memory Module, Adjustable Pedals, Drivers Seat, Power Fold Mirrors 5 15A Speed Control Module, Reverse Lamp, Daytime Running Lamp Relay, Reverse Sensing System, Autolock, E/C Mirror, Navigation 6 5A Cluster, Overhead Trip Computer, Compass, Steering Sensor, Brake Shift Interlock Solenoid, Air Suspension Module, GEM Module, Heated Mirror, Rear Defroster, Reverse Sensing System, Automatic Park Brake Release 7 5A Aux A/C Blower Relay, Console Blower 8 5A Remote Entry Module, Cell Phone, Clock, GEM Module, Navigation 9 — Not Used 10 — Not Used 11 30A Front Washer Pump Relay, Wiper Run/Park Relay, Wiper Hi/LO Relay, Windshield Wiper Motor, Rear Washer Pump Relay 12 15A Air Suspension Switch 13 20A Stop Lamp Switch (Lamps), Turn/Hazard Flasher, Speed Control Module Roadside emergencies 182
  • 183. Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Roadside emergencies Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 14 15A Rear Wipers, Running Board Lamps, Battery Saver Relay, Interior Lamp Relay, Accessory Delay Relay (Power Windows, Moonroof, Flip Windows, Audio), Homelink 15 5A Stop Lamp Switch, (Speed Control, Brake Shift Interlock, ABS, PCM Module Inputs), GEM Module, Autolock, Air Suspension Module 16 20A Headlamps (Hi Beams), Cluster (Hi Beam Indicator) 17 10A Heated Mirrors/Rear Window Defroster Indicator 18 5A Instrument Illumination (Dimmer Switch Power), Clock (Dimmer), Navigation Screen 19 — Not Used 20 5A Audio, Air Suspension Module, Memory Module, GEM Module 21 15A Starter Relay, Fuse 20, Digital Transmission Range Selector 22 10A Air Bag Module, Intelligent Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Module 23 10A Electrochromic Mirror, Aux A/C, Heated Seats, Trailer Tow Battery Charge, Turn/Hazard Flasher, Console Blower Door Actuator, 4x4 Clutch Relay, 4 Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (4WABS) Module 183
  • 184. Roadside emergencies Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 24 10A EATC Module, EATC Blower/Flasher Relay, Climate Control Selector Switch , Feeds fuse 7 25 — Not Used 26 10A Right Side Low Beam Headlamp 27 5A Foglamp Relay and Foglamp Indicator 28 10A Left Side Low Beam Headlamp 29 5A Autolamp Module, Transmission Overdrive Control Switch 30 30A Passive Anti Theft Transceiver, Cluster, Ignition Coils, Powertrain Control Module Relay 31 10A Rear Integrated Control Panel (Audio), CD Player, Cell Phone Relay 1 — Interior Lamp Relay Relay 2 — Battery Saver Relay Relay 3 — Rear Window Defroster Relay Relay 4 — One Touch Down Window Relay Relay 5 — ACC Delay Relay Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads. 184
  • 185. Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. refilling fluid reservoirs. To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter. The high-current fuses are coded as follows: Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Power Distribution Box Description 1 20A * Power Point 2 30A* Powertrain Control Module 3 30A* Headlamps/Autolamps 4 20A* Console Powerpoint 5 20A* Trailer Tow Backup/Park Lamps 6 15A* Parklamps/Autolamps, Feeds Passenger Compartment Fuse 18 7 20A* Horn MAXI FUSE 115 FUSE 24 FULL RELAY 303 HALF RELAY 208 MAXI FUSE 116 MAXI FUSE 117 MAXI FUSE 118 MAXI FUSE 111 MAXI FUSE 112 MAXI FUSE 113 MAXI FUSE 114 MAXI FUSE 107 MAXI FUSE 108 MAXI FUSE 109 MAXI FUSE 110 MAXI FUSE 103 MAXI FUSE 104 MAXI FUSE 105 MAXI FUSE 106 MAXI FUSE 101 MAXI FUSE 102 CB601 CB602 FUSE 21 FUSE 22 FUSE 19 FUSE 20 FUSE 17 FUSE 18 FUSE 23 FULL RELAY 302 R 401 D 501 FUSE 15 FUSE 16 FUSE 13 FUSE 14 FUSE 11 FUSE 12 FUSE 9 FUSE 10 FUSE 7 FUSE 8 FUSE 5 FUSE 6 FUSE 3 FUSE 4 FUSE 1 FUSE 2 D 503 D 502 FULL RELAY 301 HALF RELAY 207 FULL RELAY 304 HALF RELAY 201 HALF RELAY 202 HALF RELAY 209 HALF RELAY 205 HALF RELAY 206 HALF RELAY 203 HALF RELAY 204 Roadside emergencies 185
  • 186. Roadside emergencies Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Power Distribution Box Description 8 30A* Power Door Locks 9 15A* Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), Fog Lamps 10 20A* Fuel Pump 11 20A* Alternator Field 12 10A* Rear Wipers 13 15A* A/C Clutch 14 — Not Used 15 10A* Running Board Lamps 16 — Not Used 17 10A* Delayed Accessory (Audio, Flip Windows) 18 15A* Powertrain Control Module, Fuel Injectors, Fuel Pump, Mass Air Flow Sensor 19 10A* Trailer Tow Stop and Right Turn Lamp 20 10A* Trailer Tow Stop and Left Turn Lamp 21 — Not Used 22 — Not Used 23 15A* HEGO Sensors, Canister Vent, Transmission, CMS Sensor 24 — Not Used 101 30A** Trailer Tow Battery Charge 102 50A** Four Wheel Antilock Brake Module 103 50A** Junction Box Battery Feed 104 30A** 4x4 Shift Motor Clutch 105 40A** Climate Control Front Blower 106 — Not Used 186
  • 187. Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Roadside emergencies Power Distribution Box Description 107 30A** Passenger Power Seat, Passenger Seat Lumbar 108 30A** Trailer Tow Electric Brake 109 50A** Air Suspension Compressor 110 30A** Heated Seats/CCS 111 40A** Ignition Switch Battery Feed (Run and Start Circuits) 112 30A** Memory (Drivers Seat, Adjustable Pedals, Mirrors), Drivers Seat Lumbar 113 40A** Ignition Switch Battery Feed (Run and Accessory Circuits) 114 30A** Climate Control Auxilary Blower 115 — Not Used 116 40A** Rear Window Defroster, Heated Mirrors 117 — Not Used 118 — Not Used 201 — Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay 202 — Front Wiper Run/Park Relay 203 — Trailer Tow Backup Lamp Relay 204 — A/C Clutch Relay 205 — Rear Wiper Down 206 — Fog Lamp Relay 207 — Front Washer Pump Relay 208 — Rear Washer Pump Relay 209 — Rear Wiper Up Relay 301 — Fuel Pump Relay 302 — Trailer Tow Battery Charge Relay 303 — Front Wiper Hi/Lo Relay 304 — Powertrain Control Module Relay 401 — Not Used 187
  • 188. Roadside emergencies Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Power Distribution Box Description 501 — Powertrain Control Module Diode 502 — A/C Clutch Diode 503 — Automatic Park Brake Release Diode 601 30A Delayed Accessory (Power Windows, Flip Windows, Radio, Moonroof) 602 — Not Used *Mini fuses **Maxi fuses Relays Relays are located in the power distribution box and should be replaced by qualified technicians. CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Spare tire information Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire that may be used as a spare or a regular tire. The spare is identical to the other tires on your vehicle, although the wheel trim may not match. Location of the spare tire and tools The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following locations: Item Location Spare tire Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumper Jack, wheel nut wrench, instructions Behind the access panel located on the right rear quarter panel interior trim Jack handle On top of the radiator support at the front of the engine compartment 188
  • 189. Roadside emergencies Removing the jack handle 1. Open the hood. 2. Unsnap the end of the handle that is retained by the clip on the top of the windshield washer bottle. 3. Unsnap the shaft of the handle from the two retaining clips attached to the top of the radiator shroud. Removing the jack and tools 1. Locate the access panel on the right rear quarter panel interior trim. Lift the two panel retaining clips and remove the panel. 2. Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench and instructions from their retaining bracket. 3. Remove the jack by turning the thumbwheel counterclockwise to relieve tension against the stowage bracket. 4. If equipped with a two piece lug wrench, assemble the lug wrench as shown in the illustration. ² To assemble, screw the parts together. To disassemble, unscrew. Removing the spare tire 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Insert the straight end of the jack handle into the rear access hole located just above the rear bumper. Forward motion will stop and resistance to turning will be felt when properly engaged. 3. Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack. 4. Remove the retainer from the spare tire. 189
  • 190. Roadside emergencies Stowing the spare tire 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the outboard side facing up. 2. Install the retainer through the wheel center and slide the wheel under the vehicle. 3. Turn the spare handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original position underneath the vehicle. The spare handle ratchets when the tire is raised to the stowed position. It will not allow you to overtighten. Tire change procedure To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. On vehicles equipped with Air Suspension, turn OFF the Air Suspension switch prior to jacking, hoisting or towing your vehicle. Refer to the instruction sheet (located behind the interior trim access panel with the jack) for detailed tire change instructions. 190
  • 191. 1. Park on a level surface, activate hazard flashers and set the parking brake. 2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park) and turn engine OFF. 3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel. 4. Obtain the spare tire and jack from their storage locations. 5. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim. 6. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground. Roadside emergencies 191
  • 192. 7. Turn OFF the air suspension switch. 8. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park). To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked. If the vehicle slips off the jack, someone could be seriously injured. ² Front (4x2) OFF AIR SUSPENSION SWITCH INTERRUPTEUR DE LA SUSPENSION PNEUMATIQUE Roadside emergencies 192
  • 193. ² Front (4x4) ² Rear To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire. Roadside emergencies ² Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point. 9. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. 10. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. 193
  • 194. Roadside emergencies 11. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 12. Remove the jack and fully 1 tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. 13. Stow the flat tire. Refer to Stowing the spare tire. 14. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive. 15. Unblock the wheels. 16. Turn on the air suspension switch. JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 4 5 2 The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes, and clothing, if contacted. Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability; also, the catalytic conveter may become damaged. Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel. 1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle. 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. 194
  • 195. Roadside emergencies 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level. 5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical surges. Turn all other accessories off. Connecting the jumper cables + – + – 1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. + – + – 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting battery. 195
  • 196. + – Roadside emergencies + – 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the assisting battery. + – + – 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts. 196
  • 197. Roadside emergencies Jump starting 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. Removing the jumper cables + – + – Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. 1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. + – + – 2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the booster vehicle’s battery. 197
  • 198. + – Roadside emergencies + – 3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle’s battery. + – + – 4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle’s battery. After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions. 198
  • 199. WRECKER TOWING Roadside emergencies If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center. It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. If equipped with air suspension, the air suspension control must be turned to the OFF position. On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground. On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle damage may occur. Ford Motor Company provides a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 199
  • 200. Customer assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED At home Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the Ford dealer where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are needed. However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs. Certain warranty repairs require special training though, so not all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. That means that depending on the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to be taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership can not assist you, then contact the Customer Relationship Center. If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: 1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling/servicing dealership. 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager or Service Manager at the dealership. 3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. Away from home If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. In the United States: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 200
  • 201. Customer assistance In Canada: Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. In the United States: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 1-800-521-4140 (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) In Canada: Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center: ² Your telephone number (home and business). ² The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located. ² The year and make of your vehicle. ² The date of vehicle purchase. ² The current odometer reading. ² The vehicle identification number (VIN). If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.). 201
  • 202. Customer assistance In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states. In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in Canada). It provides the following: ² Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain maintenance and wear items). ² Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper Warranty expires. You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage. When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealers. If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Please contact your dealer for further information. Since this information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com. 202
  • 203. Customer assistance THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY) The Dispute Settlement Board is: ² an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes ² available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without incurring obligations per applicable state law. What kinds of cases does the Board review? Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle warranty are eligible for review, except those involving: ² a non-Ford product ² a non-Ford dealership ² sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as designed ² a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a service or product concern is being reviewed ² items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including maintenance and wear items) ² alleged personal injury/property damage claims ² cases currently in litigation ² vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes (except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to review commercial vehicles) ² vehicles with non-U.S. warranties Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin purchasers/lessees. 203
  • 204. Customer assistance Board membership The Board consists of: ² three consumer representatives ² a Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for their business leadership qualities. What the Board needs To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return receipt requested. Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating: ² The file number assigned to your application. ² The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator. Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be asked to submit statements. To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information: ² Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders relevant to the case. ² The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on your vehicle ownership license. ² The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s). ² The current mileage. ² The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle. ² A brief description of your unresolved concern. ² A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor Company. ² The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the dealership(s). ² A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern. 204
  • 205. Customer assistance You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not qualify for Board review. Oral presentations If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question 6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation may be requested by the Board as well. Making a decision Board members review all available information related to each complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party. Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to consider some cases. After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to them under state or federal law. To Request a DSB Brochure/Application For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the Board at the following address/phone number: Dispute Settlement Board P.O. Box 5120 Southfield, MI 48086–5120 1–800–428–3718 You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952 or by writing to the Center at the following address: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 205
  • 206. Customer assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada. CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or owner relations/customer relationship office. The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U.S. 206
  • 207. Customer assistance If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call: FORD MOTOR COMPANY WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 FAX: (313) 390-0804 If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office. If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market Operations. ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07150 Detroit, Michigan 48207 Or call: For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card holders only.) 207
  • 208. Customer assistance Obtaining a French owner’s guide French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 29 000 km (18 000 miles), whichever occurs first: 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time) In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126 208
  • 209. Customer assistance REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash, or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Ford Motor Company. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1–800–424–9393 (202–366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA U.S. Department of Transportation 400 Seventh Street Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 209
  • 210. Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR OF YOUR VEHICLE Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight. It is recommended that you wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral Ph shampoo, such as Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with plenty of water for best results. Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting. Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and do cause damage to the vehicle. Items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits should be washed and sponged off as soon as possible. Deposits not removed promptly can cause damage to the vehicle’s paintwork and trim over time. Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a car wash. PROTECTING THE PAINT FINISH OF YOUR VEHICLE Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle on a regular basis will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage. A typical paint sealant lasts approximately six months to a year, depending on local weather conditions and the cleaning soap that is used in washing the vehicle. Do not use a wax that beads excessively. Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time. 210
  • 211. Cleaning REPAIRING PAINT CHIPS Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips. Minor scratches or paint damage from road debris may be repaired using the Ultra Touch Prep and Finishing Kit (F7AZ-19K507–BA), which is available at your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. This kit contains: ² Lacquer Touch-Up Paint (ALBZ-19500–XXXXA) ² Exterior Acrylic Spray Lacquer (ALAZ-19500–XXXXA) Please note that the part numbers (shown as XXXX above) will vary with your vehicle’s specific coloring. Carefully observe the application instructions on the products. CLEANING THE WHEEL RIMS AND COVERS Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish. Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time. Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents for soiled wheel rims and covers. Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers. Clean wheel rims and covers with Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. Spray cleaner on cool wheel rims or covers and allow to set for 2–5 minutes. Agitate the area with a sponge and rinse off with plenty of water. Use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA), available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer, in order to remove tar and grease from wheel rims and covers. CLEANING THE ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: ² The engine must be cool to the touch before spraying with water. 211
  • 212. Cleaning ² Never spray a hot engine with cold water, as damage to the engine block or engine components may occur. ² Use caution when using a self-serve power washer (1000psi maximum pressure) to clean the engine, as the high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. ² Never apply anything to any exposed belts in the engine compartment, including the belt dressing. For general cleaning of the engine and engine compartment, spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (F4AZ-19A536–A) on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse the area with cool water. ² Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. ² Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. WASHING NON-PAINTED PLASTIC EXTERIOR PARTS Use Detail Wash (ZC-3–A) for routine cleaning. If tar or grease spots are present, clean with Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA). Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. WASHING THE EXTERIOR LAMPS In order to avoid scratching the plastic lamps, do not use dry paper towels, non-approved chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. 212
  • 213. Use a soft cloth and a solution of Triple Clean (EOAZ-19526–AA), mixed properly with water, in order to remove bug residue. If tar or grease spots are present, clean with Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA). CLEANING THE WINDSHIELD, WIPER BLADES AND REAR WINDOW If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other organic contamination. Do not clean the windshield or rear window glass with abrasives, as they may cause scratches. Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean the windshield, rear window or the wiper blades as damage may occur. Clean the outside of the windshield or rear window with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507–AA), available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. If after cleaning the glass surface, the water sheets from the glass (e.g., does not bead), then the window is clean. The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly. CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth. Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection. Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the air bag system. Cleaning 213
  • 214. Cleaning CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS Wipe the cluster area with a soft, damp cotton towel. Dry the area with a clean, dry towel. CLEANING SEATS EQUIPPED WITH SIDE AIR BAGS Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. In order to remove stains and soil, clean with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA). Never saturate the seat covers with any cleaning solution. Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the seat where the side air bag is mounted. Such products could contaminate the side air bag system and affect performance of the side air bag in a collision. The air bag may not function correctly and not provide injury reduction benefits. CLEANING THE INTERIOR FABRIC, CARPETS AND CLOTH SEATS Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Remove light stains and soil with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA). Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution. Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardent abilities of the seat materials. If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Spot and Stain Remover (F3AZ-19521–WA). Follow up by recleaning the area with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA). CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) All Ford, Lincoln and Mercury vehicles with leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather. To clean the leather seats, simply use a soft cloth with Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (F2AZ-19521–WA). Dry the area with a soft cloth. 214
  • 215. Cleaning It is recommended that you use the Deluxe Leather Care Kit (F8AZ-19G253–AA), available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. The mild cleaner and special pad available in the kit cleans the leather and maintains its natural beauty. For best results, follow the instructions printed on the cleaner label. Regular cleaning of your leather upholstery helps maintain its resiliency and color. Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating. CLEANING WOOD-TONE TRIM Wipe stains with a clean, soft cloth and Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507–AA). Dry the area by wiping with a dry, soft, clean cloth. CLEANING THE INSIDE WINDOWS Use Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507–AA) for the inside windows if they become fogged. To clean, use two lint-free, soft towels, folded into a pad-shape. Mist the glass completely with cleaner, and use one of the towels to evenly agitate the surface. Use the other towel to remove the residue. CLEANING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Clean the seat with a damp cloth, using a mild soap and water solution, if necessary. CLEANING AND MAINTAINING THE SAFETY BELTS Clean the safety belts with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA), available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. Do not use bleach, dye or any other solvent to clean the belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt. 215
  • 216. Cleaning FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following or products of equivalent quality: Ford Custom Clearcoat Polish* Ford Custom Silicone Gloss Polish Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada) Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) Ford Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada) Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in Canada) Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada) Ford Custom Bright Metal Cleaner Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) Ford Spot and Stain Remover* Ford Super Premium Tire and Trim Dressing Ford Triple Clean Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada) Ford Engine Shampoo and Degreaser * May be sold with the Motorcraft name 216
  • 217. Maintenance and specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle: ² We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy location. ² We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking routine service easy. If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to find out which parts and services are covered. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. ² Do not work on a hot engine. ² When the engine is running, make sure that loose clothing, jewelry or long hair does not get caught up in moving parts. ² Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. ² Keep all lit cigarettes, open flames and other lit material away from the battery and all fuel related parts. If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly, as explained in Battery in this chapter. 217
  • 218. Working with the engine off 1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. Working with the engine on 1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. OPENING THE HOOD 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the bottom left corner of the instrument panel. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch located under the front of the hood, just above the passenger side headlamp. Slide the yellow handle to release the auxiliary latch. 3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open. BRAKE HOOD Maintenance and specifications 218
  • 219. Maintenance and specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5.4L 4V V8 engine 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 9 1. Battery 2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Power steering fluid reservoir 5. Engine oil dipstick 6. Brake fluid reservoir 7. Power distribution box 8. Air filter assembly 9. Engine coolant reservoir 10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 8 7 219
  • 220. Maintenance and specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Washer fluid Check the washer fluid whenever you stop for fuel. The reservoir is highlighted with a symbol. If the level is low, add enough fluid to fill the reservoir. In very cold weather, do not fill the reservoir all the way. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification ESR-M17P5–A. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components. Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the windshield. ENGINE OIL Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil. 1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. 2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. 3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 220
  • 221. Maintenance and specifications 4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). MIN MAX 6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it again. ² If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL. ² If the oil level is below the MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level within the MIN-MAX range. ² Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by a service technician. 7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated. 221
  • 222. Maintenance and specifications Adding engine oil 1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter. 2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated. 5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated. To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed. Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark. SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended. Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft or an equivalent oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty. Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. 222
  • 223. Maintenance and specifications Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be experienced. It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application. BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service. However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”. Do not overfill the battery cells. If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the charging system checked. If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the 223
  • 224. Maintenance and specifications transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel. Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation. When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compunds. Wash hands after handling. For information on transmission operation after the battery has been disconnected see “Shift strategy” in the driving section. Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance. To begin this process: 1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the engine. 3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 224
  • 225. Maintenance and specifications 5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 6. With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process. ² The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. ² If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned. If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock must be reset once the battery is reconnected. ² Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner. Follow your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries. LEAD RETURN RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the mileage intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and water, which equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant should be maintained at the “cold full” of “cold fill range” level in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding Engine Coolant section. 225
  • 226. Maintenance and specifications Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above 60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A 50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following: ² Freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F). ² Boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F). ² Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion. ² Enables calibrated gauges to work properly. When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir. COLD FILL RANGE ² The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon application). ² Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval schedules. ² Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter. If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval, the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter. Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. 226
  • 227. Maintenance and specifications Adding engine coolant When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with either green-colored Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification ESE-M97B44–A or yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1. To determine your vehicle’s coolant type (color), check your coolant reservoir. ² Add Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored), VC-4–A (U.S.) or CXC-10 (Canada) or Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A, depending on the type of coolant originally equipped in your vehicle. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle requires, check your coolant reservoir or contact your local dealer. ² Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection. ² A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. 227
  • 228. Maintenance and specifications ² Do not use alcohol, methanol or brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. ² Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant. ² Do not mix with recycled coolant unless from a Ford-approved recycling process (see Use of Recycled Engine Coolant section). For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the “cold full” level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant. To avoid personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. 1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool. 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle). Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release. 3. Step back while the pressure releases. 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap. 5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see above), to within the “cold fill range” or the “cold full” level on the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full. 6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss.) After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration see Checking Engine Coolant section). If the concentration is not 50/50 (protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the 228
  • 229. Maintenance and specifications concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50 coolant concentration. Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level. If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant produced by Ford-approved processes in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored). However, not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant that meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44–A. Use of such coolant may harm the engine and cooling system components. Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available. Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer to Refill capacities in this chapter. Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this chapter. 229
  • 230. Maintenance and specifications Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]): ² It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. ² NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. ² Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. ² Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months. If you drive in extremely hot climates: ² It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40%. ² NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. ² Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. ² Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. ² Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection. What you should know about fail-safe cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred. The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and terrain. 230
  • 231. Maintenance and specifications How fail-safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat: ² The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area. ² The and the symbol will illuminate. ² The Service Engine Soon indicator light will illuminate. H C If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However: ² The engine power will be limited. ² The air conditioning system will be disabled. Continued operation will increase the engine temperature: ² The engine will completely shut down. ² Steering and braking effort will increase. Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. When fail-safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage, therefore: 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. 2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility. 3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. 4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low. 231
  • 232. Maintenance and specifications Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. 5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility. Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible. WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS Important safety precautions Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. 232
  • 233. Maintenance and specifications Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: ² Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle. ² Always turn off the vehicle before fueling. ² Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. ² Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. ² Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. ² Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. ² Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes. 233
  • 234. Maintenance and specifications The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container. Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: ² Place approved fuel container on the ground. ² DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the cargo area). ² Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. ² DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position. Fuel Filler Cap Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off feature. When fueling your vehicle: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. 3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe. 5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. If the “Service Engine Soon/Check Engine” indicator comes on and stays on after you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used. 234
  • 235. Maintenance and specifications The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components. Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT. Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was not designed may not be covered by your warranty. Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use “Premium” unleaded gasoline with an (R+M)/2 octane rating of 91 or 91 higher for optimum performance. (R+M)/2 METHOD The use of gasolines with lower octane ratings may degrade performance. We do not recommend the use of gasolines labeled as “Premium” in high altitude areas that are sold with octane ratings of less than 91. Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent any engine damage. Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded 235
  • 236. Maintenance and specifications gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty. Many of the world’s automakers issued the World-wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle. Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter. In Canada, look for fuels that display the Auto Makers’ Choicey logo. Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to improve air quality. Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse affect on powertrain components. If you have run out of fuel: ² You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. ² Your “Service Engine Soon” indicator may come on. For more information on the “Service Engine Soon” indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter. 236
  • 237. Fuel Filter For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter. Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used. ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 600 km (1 000 miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate measurement after 3 000 km–5 000 km (2 000 miles-3 000 miles). Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities section of this chapter. The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: ² Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling, an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running. ² Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time the tank is filled. Maintenance and specifications 237
  • 238. Maintenance and specifications ² Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling. ² Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating. ² Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand. ² Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up. ² Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time. Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent. Calculating fuel economy 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading (in kilometers or miles). 2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters or gallons). 3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. 4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading. 5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers traveled. Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used. Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy. Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy. Habits ² Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel. ² Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy. 238
  • 239. Maintenance and specifications ² Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste fuel. ² Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. ² Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy. ² Slow down gradually. ² Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]). ² Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy. ² Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy. ² You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs. Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy. ² Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy. ² Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy. ² Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. Maintenance ² Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size. ² Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy. ² Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. ² Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide. Conditions ² Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. ² Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately 0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried). 239
  • 240. Maintenance and specifications ² Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy. ² Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. ² Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving. ² Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. ² Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. ² Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation. ² Close windows for high speed driving. EPA window sticker Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG) expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: ² Use only the specified fuel listed. ² Avoid running out of fuel. ² Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. ² Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed according to the specified schedule. 240
  • 241. Maintenance and specifications The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Illumination of the “Check Engine” light, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications. Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information. Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test” condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a 241
  • 242. minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as described below: ² First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway. ² Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with at least four idle periods. Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only Ford Premium Power Steering Fluid. 1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C). 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several times. 3. Turn the engine off. 4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range. MAX MIN 5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. MAX MIN Maintenance and specifications 242
  • 243. Maintenance and specifications BRAKE FLUID Checking and adding brake fluid Brake fluid should be checked and refilled as needed. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. 1. Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent dirt or water from entering the reservoir. 2. Visually inspect the fluid level. 3. If necessary, add brake fluid from a clean un-opened container until the level reaches MAX. Do not fill above this line. 4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid certified to meet Ford specification ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes. Do not let the fluid level in the reservoir for the master cylinder fall below the MIN mark. If master cylinder runs dry, this may cause the brakes to fail. MAX MIN 243
  • 244. Maintenance and specifications TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage. Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking. 1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal, start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. 6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature. Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD above 10°C (50°F). 244
  • 245. Maintenance and specifications Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20 miles) of driving. You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature (66°C-77°C ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD [150°F-170°F]). The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature (10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]). ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of transmission ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage. High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Lubricant specifications section in this chapter. Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage. If necessary, add fluid in 250 mL (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct. 245
  • 246. Maintenance and specifications If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage. DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for maintenance intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary. AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element. When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter element listed. Refer to Motorcraft Part Numbers. Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. Changing the air filter element 1. Loosen the clamp that secures the air inlet tube to the engine air filter cover and disconnect the tube from the cover. 246
  • 247. Maintenance and specifications 2. Loosen the clamp that secures the air filter cover to the air filter housing and carefully separate the cover from housing. 3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. 4. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause filter damage and allow unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly seated. 5. Replace the air filter cover and secure the clamp. 6. Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp. 247
  • 248. Maintenance and specifications INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING New vehicles are fitted with tires that have a rating on them called Tire Quality Grades. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: ² Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA A B C The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 248
  • 249. Maintenance and specifications The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. SERVICING YOUR TIRES Checking the tire pressure ² Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. ² Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km (3 miles). ² Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the Certification Label. Tire pressure information can also be found on the Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door. Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. 249
  • 250. Maintenance and specifications Tire rotation Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. ² Four tire rotation Replacing the tires Replace the tires when the wear band is visible through the tire treads. When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions, your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford. 250
  • 251. Maintenance and specifications Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger size tires. Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the handling of the vehicle and make it easier for the driver to lose control and roll over. Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer. SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle. The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and chains. Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: ² Use only cable type chains offered by Ford as an accessory or equivalent. SAE class “S” or other conventional link type chains may contact and cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house and/or body. ² Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. ² Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. ² If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. ² Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. ² The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains. ² Do not exceed 48 km/h (30 mph) with tire chains on your vehicle. 251
  • 252. Maintenance and specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS Component 5.4L 4V V8 engine Air filter element FA-1634 Battery (standard) BXT-65-650 Fuel filter FG-986B Oil filter FL-820-S PCV valve EV-233 Spark plugs* AWSF-32P * Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark plug gap information. 252
  • 253. Maintenance and specifications REFILL CAPACITIES Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity Brake fluid High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid All Fill to line on reservoir Engine oil (includes filter change) Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil All 5.7L (6.0 quarts) Fuel tank N/A All 113.6L (30 gallons) Power steering fluid Motorcraft MERCON t ATF All Fill to line on reservoir Transmission fluid 1 Motorcraft MERCONtATF 4 x 2 vehicles 15.0L (15.9 quarts) 2 4 x 4 vehicles 15.5L (16.4 quarts) 2 Transfer case fluid Motorcraft MERCONtATF 4 x 4 vehicles 1.9L (2.0 quarts) Engine coolant 3 Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored) or Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) without aux rear heat 24.1L (25.5 quarts) with aux rear heat 26.4L (27.9 quarts) Front axle lubricant Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Premium 4x4 Front Axle Lubricant 4 x 4 vehicles 1.8-2.0L (3.5-3.7 pints) Rear axle lubricant 4 Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant All 2.9-3.1L (5.5-5.8 pints) 253
  • 254. Maintenance and specifications Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity Windshield washer fluid Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate All 4.1L (4.5 quarts) 1Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service interval. Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as MERCONt and MERCONt V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCONt type fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that require the MERCONt V type fluid. MERCONt and MERCONt V type fluids are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Use of a transmission fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCONt and MERCONt V) in an automatic transmission application requiring MERCONt may cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. 2Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range. 3Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. 4Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and is considered lubricated for life. These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the axle has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time the axle has been submerged in water. Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546–A or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 6 mm to 14 mm (1/4 inch to 9/16 inch) below the bottom of the filler hole. 254
  • 255. Maintenance and specifications LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS Item Ford part name Ford part number Ford specification Hinges, latches, striker plates and rotors, seat tracks, fuel filler door hinge and spring Multi-Purpose Grease DOAZ-19584-AA or F5AZ-19G209-AA ESB-M1C93-B or ESR-M1C159-A Lock cylinders Penetrating and Lock Lubricant Motorcraft XL-1 ESB-M2C75-B Brake fluid High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A and DOT 3 Driveshaft, slip spline, double Cardan joint center ball Premium Long Life Grease XG-1-C or XG-1-K ESA-M1C75–B Engine coolant Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored) VC-4–A (US) or CXC-10 (Canada) ESE-M97B44-A Motorcraft Premium Gold Engin Coolant (yellow-colored) VC-7–A WSS-M97B51-A1 Engine oil Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil XO-5W-20-QSP WSS-M2C153-H with API Certification Mark 255
  • 256. Maintenance and specifications Item Ford part name Ford part number Ford specification 4x4 front wheel bearings, 4x4 spindle needle bearings, spindle thrust bearings front drive axle u-joint/slip spline High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle Wheel Bearing Grease E8TZ-19590-A ESA-M1C198-A Automatic transmission 1 Motorcraft MERCONt ATF XT-2-QDX MERCONt Power steering fluid Motorcraft MERCONt ATF XT-2-QDX MERCONt Rear axle 2 Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 High Performance Synthetic Rear Axle Lube F1TZ-19580-B WSL-M2C192-A Front axle (4X4) Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Premium 4x4 Front Axle Lubricant XY-75W90-TQL WSP-M2C201-A Transfer case (4X4) Motorcraft MERCONt ATF XT-2-QDX MERCONt Windshield washer fluid Ultra-clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC ESR-M17P5-A 1Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service interval. 256
  • 257. Maintenance and specifications Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as MERCONt and MERCONt V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCONt type fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that require the MERCONt V type fluid. MERCONt and MERCONt V type fluids are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Use of a transmission fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCONt and MERCONt V) in an automatic transmission application requiring MERCONt may cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. 2Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of Ford Traction-Lok rear axles. ENGINE DATA Engine 5.4L 4V V8 engine Cubic inches 330 Required fuel 91 octane Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 Spark plug gap 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-0.056 inch) Ignition system Coil on plug Compression ratio 9.5:1 257
  • 258. Maintenance and specifications VEHICLE DIMENSIONS Vehicle dimensions 4x2 mm (in) 4x4 mm (in) (1) Overall length 5 202.0 (204.8) 5 202.0 (204.8) (2) Vehicle width 2 027.0 (79.8)1 2 027.0 (79.8)1 (3) Overall height2 1 907.0 (75.1) 1 940.0 (76.4) (4) Wheelbase 3 026.0 (119.1) 3 022.0 (119.0) (5) Track - Front 1 661.0 (65.4) 1 661.0 (65.4) (5) Track - Rear 1 663.0 (65.5) 1 663.0 (65.5) 1 Vehicle width, including mirrors: 2 293.0 mm (90.3 in) 2 Vehicle equipped with 16” tires and base suspension 258
  • 260. Maintenance and specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Certification label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Certification label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Certification label may be located. The Certification label is located on the front door latch pillar on the driver’s side. Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number is attached to a metal tag and is located on the driver side instrument panel. (Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number.) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Engine number The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification number) is stamped on the engine block and transmission. 260
  • 261. Accessories FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln, Mercury or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit: ² 12 months or 20 000 km (12 000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or ² The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 60 000 km (36 000 miles) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. Not all accessories are available for all models. Vehicle Security Styled wheel protector locks Vehicle security systems Comfort and convenience Battery warmer Cabin air filter Cargo nets Cargo organizer Cargo storage box Cargo tray Engine block heater Tire step 261
  • 262. Accessories Travel equipment Daytime running lights (DRL) Heavy-duty battery Raised cross bars Raised cross bar adaptors Rear mount bike rack Seatback organizer Soft luggage carrier Towing mirrors (removable and permanent) Trailer hitch bars and balls Trailer hitch mounted bike carrier Trailer hitch wiring adaptor Protection and appearance equipment Air bag anti-theft locks Bike carrier Cargo liners, interior Carpet floor mats Door edge guards Flat splash guards Front end covers (full) Hood deflector Instrument panel trim (woodgrain) Kayak/canoe carrier Load warrior carrier basket Locking gas cap Luggage basket Molded splash guards Molded vinyl floor mats Moonroof deflector Rear air deflectors 262
  • 263. Side window air deflectors Ski/snowboard adaptor Snow traction cables Truck cover Underbody security lighting Universal floor mats Wheels For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: ² When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information. ² The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician. ² Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) ² Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result from the use of such equipment. Accessories 263
  • 264. A Accessory delay ..........................67 Air bag supplemental restraint system ........124–125, 129 and child safety seats ............127 description ......................125, 129 disposal ....................................132 driver air bag ..................127, 130 indicator light ...........12, 129, 131 operation .........................127, 130 passenger air bag ...........127, 130 side air bag ..............................129 Air cleaner filter ...............246, 252 Air conditioning ..........................37 auxiliary heater and air conditioner ................................43 rear seat controls .....................42 Air suspension ...........................150 description ..............................150 warning light .............................12 Ambulance packages ....................7 Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) ................225 Anti-lock brake system (see Brakes) ..............................147 Anti-theft system warning light .............................13 Automatic transmission driving an automatic overdrive .................................154 fluid, adding ............................244 fluid, checking ........................244 fluid, refill capacities ..............253 fluid, specification ..................257 Auxiliary power point .................65 Axle lubricant specifications ..255, 257 refill capacities ........................253 traction lok ..............................152 B Battery .......................................223 acid, treating emergencies .....223 charging system warning light .............................12 jumping a disabled battery ....194 maintenance-free ....................223 replacement, specifications ...252 servicing ..................................223 voltage gauge ............................16 Belt minder ...............................120 Brakes ........................................146 anti-lock ...................................147 anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light .........11, 148 brake warning light ..................11 fluid, checking and adding ....243 fluid, refill capacities ..............253 fluid, specifications .........255, 257 lubricant specifications ..255, 257 parking ....................................148 pedals (see Power adjustable foot pedals) ............70 shift interlock ..........................153 Break-in period .............................5 C Capacities for refilling fluids ....253 Cassette tape player ...................18 CD changer .................................32 Cellular telephone (see your Cellular Phone Guide) ................82 Index 264
  • 265. Certification Label ....................260 Child safety restraints ..............132 child safety belts ....................132 Child safety seats ......................134 attaching with tether straps ..139 in front seat ............................135 in rear seat ......................135, 138 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment ..............211 exterior ....................................215 instrument cluster lens ..........214 instrument panel ....................213 interior .............................214–215 plastic parts ............................212 safety belts ..............................215 washing ....................................210 waxing .....................................210 wheels ......................................211 windows ..................................215 wiper blades ............................213 woodtone trim ........................215 Clock ......................................23, 65 Compass, electronic ..............62, 68 calibration .................................63 set zone adjustment .................63 Console ........................................82 overhead ........................60–61, 64 rear ............................................83 Controls power seat .................................99 steering column ........................75 Coolant checking and adding ..............225 refill capacities ................229, 253 specifications ..................255, 257 Cruise control (see Speed control) ....................71 Customer Assistance ................177 Index Ford accessories for your vehicle ......................216 Ford Extended Service Plan ............................202 Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada ..............206 Getting roadside assistance ...177 Getting the service you need ....................200 Ordering additional owner’s literature ...................207 The Dispute Settlement Board ...................203 Utilizing the Mediation/ Arbitration Program ...............206 D Daytime running lamps (see Lamps) ................................48 Defrost rear window ..............................46 Dipstick automatic transmission fluid ...................244 engine oil .................................220 Doors door ajar warning .....................13 lubricant specifications ..........255 Driveline universal joint and slip yoke .............................246 Driving under special conditions ..........................163, 166 sand .........................................164 snow and ice ...........................167 through water .................165, 169 265
  • 266. E Emergencies, roadside jump-starting ..........................194 Emission control system ..........240 Engine ................................257–258 check engine/ service engine soon light .........10 cleaning ...................................211 coolant .....................................225 fail-safe coolant ......................230 idle speed control ...................223 lubrication specifications ..................255, 257 refill capacities ........................253 service points ..........................219 starting after a collision .........178 Engine block heater .................145 Engine oil ..................................220 change oil soon warning, message center .......................220 checking and adding ..............220 dipstick ....................................220 filter, specifications ........222, 252 recommendations ...................222 refill capacities ........................253 specifications ..................255, 257 Exhaust fumes ..........................146 F Fail safe cooling ........................230 Floor mats ...................................83 Fluid capacities .........................253 Foglamps .....................................47 Four-Wheel Drive vehicles ................................14, 159 control trac .............................160 description ..............................160 driving off road .......................162 electronic shift ........................161 indicator light ...........................14 preparing to drive your vehicle ...................152 Fuel ............................................232 calculating fuel economy .......237 cap ...........................................234 capacity ...................................253 choosing the right fuel ...........235 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates .................240 detergent in fuel .....................236 filling your vehicle with fuel ..................232, 234, 237 filter, specifications ........237, 252 fuel pump shut-off switch .....178 gauge .........................................16 improving fuel economy ........237 low fuel warning light ..............12 octane rating ...........235, 257–258 quality ......................................235 running out of fuel .................236 safety information relating to automotive fuels ................232 Fuses ..................................180–181 G Garage door opener ..............61, 76 Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............234 Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) .................237 Gauges .........................................15 battery voltage gauge ...............16 engine coolant temperature gauge ...................15 engine oil pressure gauge ........16 fuel gauge ..................................16 Index 266
  • 267. odometer ...................................17 speedometer .............................17 tachometer ................................17 trip odometer ............................17 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .....170 calculating ...............................172 definition .................................170 driving with a heavy load ......170 location ....................................170 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .............170 calculating .......................170, 172 definition .................................170 driving with a heavy load ......170 location ....................................170 H Hazard flashers .........................178 Head restraints ...................99, 104 Headlamps ...................................47 aiming ..................................49–50 autolamp system .......................47 bulb specifications ....................52 daytime running lights .............48 flash to pass ..............................48 high beam ...........................13, 48 replacing bulbs .........................53 turning on and off ....................47 warning chime ..........................14 Heating ........................................37 HomeLink universal transceiver (see Garage door opener) ............76–79 Hood ..........................................218 Index I Ignition .......................142, 257–258 Infant seats (see Safety seats) .....................134 Inspection/ maintenance (I/M) testing .......241 Instrument panel cleaning ...................................213 cluster ................................10, 214 lighting up panel and interior .....................48 J Jack ............................................188 positioning ...............................188 storage .....................................188 Jump-starting your vehicle ......194 K Keyless entry system autolock .....................................92 locking and unlocking doors ....94 programming entry code .........93 Keys .......................................95–97 key in ignition chime ...............14 positions of the ignition .........142 L Lamps autolamp system .......................47 bulb replacement specifications chart ..................52 cargo lamps ...............................48 daytime running light ...............48 fog lamps ...................................47 headlamps .................................47 267
  • 268. headlamps, flash to pass ..........48 instrument panel, dimming .....48 interior lamps .....................51, 53 replacing bulbs ...................52–57 Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) ........................51 Liftgate ........................................83 Lights, warning and indicator ....10 air bag ........................................12 air suspension .........................152 anti-lock brakes (ABS) ....11, 148 anti-theft ...................................13 brake ..........................................11 charging system ........................12 check coolant ............................13 door ajar ....................................13 engine oil pressure ...................13 high beam .................................13 low fuel ......................................12 low washer fluid .......................12 safety belt .................................11 service engine soon ..................10 turn signal indicator .................13 Load limits .................................170 GAWR ......................................170 GVWR ......................................170 trailer towing ..........................170 Loading instructions .................171 Locks autolock .....................................92 childproof ..................................85 doors ..........................................85 Lubricant specifications ...255, 257 Lumbar support, seats ...............99 M Message center .....................62, 80 english/metric button ...............80 menu button .............................80 Mirrors .........................................60 automatic dimming rearview mirror .........................68 fold away ...................................70 heated ........................................69 programmable memory ............91 side view mirrors (power) ...............................68, 70 Moon roof ....................................62 Motorcraft parts ................237, 252 N Navigation system .......................82 O Octane rating ............................235 Odometer .....................................17 Oil (see Engine oil) ..................220 Overdrive .....................................81 P Panic alarm feature, remote entry system ................................88 Parking brake ............................148 Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....252 Pedals (see Power adjustable foot pedals) ...............70 Power distribution box (see Fuses) ...............................184 Power door locks ..................85, 92 Power steering ..........................150 fluid, checking and adding ....242 fluid, refill capacity ................253 Index 268
  • 269. fluid, specifications .........255, 257 Preparing to drive your vehicle .....................152 R Rear window defroster ...............46 Relays ................................180, 188 Remote entry system ...........86, 88 illuminated entry ......................90 locking/unlocking doors .....85–87 panic alarm ...............................88 replacement/additional transmitters ...............................89 replacing the batteries .............88 Reverse sensing system ...........157 Roof rack .....................................84 S Safety belts (see Safety restraints) ...............14 112–113, 115–116, 118 Safety defects, reporting ..........209 Safety restraints ...........112–113, 115–118 belt minder .............................120 cleaning the safety belts ......................123, 215 extension assembly ................123 for adults .................113, 115–116 for children .............................132 lap belt ....................................118 warning light and chime ............11, 14, 119–120 Safety seats for children ..........134 Seat belts (see Safety restraints) .............112 Index Seats ............................................99 child safety seats ....................134 cleaning ...................................214 climate control ........................102 memory seat .....................91, 101 SecuriLock passive anti-theft system ...................95–97 Servicing your vehicle ..............217 Snowplowing .................................7 Spark plugs, specifications .............252, 257–258 Special notice ambulance conversions ..............7 utility-type vehicles ....................7 Specification chart, lubricants ...........................255, 257 Speed control ..............................71 Speedometer ...............................17 Starting your vehicle .......142–143, 145 jump starting ..........................194 Steering speed sensitive .......................150 Steering wheel controls ..........................60, 71, 75 tilting .........................................60 T Tachometer .................................17 Tires ...........................188, 248–249 changing ..........................188, 190 checking the pressure ............249 replacing ..................................250 rotating ....................................250 snow tires and chains ............251 tire grades ...............................249 269
  • 270. treadwear ................................248 Towing .......................................172 recreational towing .................176 trailer towing ..........................172 wrecker ....................................199 Traction-lok rear axle ...............152 Transmission .............................153 fluid, checking and adding (automatic) .............................244 fluid, refill capacities ..............253 lubricant specifications ..255, 257 Trip odometer .............................17 Turn signal ............................13, 51 V Vehicle dimensions ...................258 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..........................................260 Vehicle loading ..........................170 Ventilating your vehicle ...........146 W Warning chimes ...........................14 Warning lights (see Lights) .......10 Washer fluid ..............................220 Water, Driving through .............169 Windows power .........................................66 rear wiper/washer .....................58 Windshield washer fluid and wipers checking and adding fluid .....220 checking and cleaning ..............59 liftgate reservoir .....................220 operation ...................................58 replacing wiper blades .............59 Wrecker towing .........................199 Index 270
  • 271. 271
  • 272. 272